JCW GP. MINI HARDTOP 2 DOOR / 4 DOOR / OWNER'S MANUAL.

OWNER'S MANUAL.MINI HARDTOP 2 DOOR / 4 DOOR /JCW GP.

LINK:CONTENT & A-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20

WELCOME TO MINI.

OWNER'S MANUAL.MINI HARDTOP 2 DOOR / 4 DOOR / JCW GP.

Thank you for choosing a MINI.The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will haveon the road. We therefore strongly suggest:Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI. Also use theIntegrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It contains important informationon vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical featuresavailable in your MINI. The manual also contains information designed toenhance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute tomaintaining the value of your MINI.Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix ofthe printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.Get started now. We wish you driving fun and inspiration with your MINI.

3Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Navigation, Entertainment and Communication can be called up via theIntegrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

NOTESInformation.............................................................................................................................. 6

QUICK REFERENCEEntering.................................................................................................................................. 16

Set-up and use.......................................................................................................................20

On the road............................................................................................................................ 24

AT A GLANCECockpit.................................................................................................................................... 32

Central Information Display (CID)..................................................................................36

Voice activation system.................................................................................................... 44

General settings................................................................................................................... 48

Owner's Manual media.......................................................................................................60

CONTROLSOpening and closing........................................................................................................... 62

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel.................................................................................82

Transporting children safely............................................................................................ 92

Driving.................................................................................................................................... 98

Displays................................................................................................................................ 122

Lights.................................................................................................................................... 144

Safety.....................................................................................................................................150

Driving stability control systems.................................................................................173

Driving comfort................................................................................................................. 178

Climate control...................................................................................................................199


Interior equipment............................................................................................................208

Storage compartments.....................................................................................................219

Cargo area............................................................................................................................223

DRIVING TIPSThings to remember when driving.............................................................................. 230

Reducing fuel consumption........................................................................................... 236

MOBILITYRefueling..............................................................................................................................244

Fuel........................................................................................................................................246

Wheels and tires................................................................................................................248

Engine compartment........................................................................................................272

Engine oil.............................................................................................................................275

Coolant..................................................................................................................................279

Maintenance....................................................................................................................... 281

Replacing components.................................................................................................... 283

Breakdown assistance..................................................................................................... 292

Care........................................................................................................................................300

REFERENCETechnical data.................................................................................................................... 306

Appendix..............................................................................................................................311

Everything from A to Z....................................................................................................312

© 2020 Bayerische Motoren WerkeAktiengesellschaftMunich, GermanyReprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich.US English ID5 II/20, 03 20 490Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.


Information

Using this Owner's Manual

OrientationThe fastest way to find information on aparticular topic is by using the index.

An initial overview of the vehicle is pro-vided in the first chapter.

John Cooper Works GPThe John Cooper Works GP is a specialmodel of the MINI 3-door model with spe-cial focus on a sporty character.

Special features:

– Specially designed lowered chassis andsport tires for a sporty driving style.

– Specially designed driving mode for thevehicle: GP MODE.

– Improved aerodynamics, for instancewith front and rear spoilers.

– Strut brace for stronger body rigidityand improved roadholding.

– Limited slip differential for improvedforward momentum.

– Lightweight construction, for instancewith CFRP wheel arch width extensions.

Some of the operation related features ofthe John Cooper Works GP differ fromthose of the MINI 3-door production model.These deviations are described in the re-spective chapters and marked as follows:John Cooper Works GP.

Deviations from the production vehicle:

– Omission of the second seat row and thedrink holders in the rear.

– Modified cargo area with cargo rod.

– Omission of the cargo cover and thesocket in the cargo area.

– Modified position of the attachmentpoint for securing a child seat.

– GP MODE replaces DTC.

– Omission of the Driving Mode switch.

– Speed Limiter.

– Standard sport tires.

– Not approved for driving through a carwash.

– Omission of the rear window wiper.

For an overview of all descriptions on theJohn Cooper Works GP, refer to the indexunder John Cooper Works GP.

Updates made after the editorialdeadlineDue to updates after the editorial deadline,differences may exist between the printedOwner's Manual and the Integrated Owner'sManual in the vehicle.

Notes on updates can be found in the ap-pendix of the printed Owner's Manual forthe vehicle.

Owner's Manual for Navigation,Entertainment, CommunicationThe Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter-tainment, and Communication can be ob-tained as a printed book from the servicecenter.

The topics are also discussed in theIntegrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

Seite 6

NOTES Information


Additional sources of informa-tion

Service centerA service center will be glad to answerquestions at any time.

InternetVehicle information and general informa-tion on MINI, e.g., on technology, are availa-ble on the Internet: www.miniusa.com.

Integrated Owner's Manual in thevehicleThe Integrated Owner's Manual specificallydescribes features and functions found inthe vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manualcan be displayed on the Control Display. Ad-ditional information, refer to page 60.

MINI Motorer’s Guide appThe app specifically describes features andfunctions found in the vehicle. The app canbe displayed on smartphones and tablets.

MINI Motorer’s Guide WebDriver’s Guide Web shows the most suita-ble information for the selected vehicle. Ifpossible, only equipment and functions thatare actually installed in the vehicle will beexplained. Driver’s Guide Web can be dis-played in any current browser.

Symbols and displays

Symbols in the Owner's Manual

Symbol Meaning

Precautions that must befollowed in order to avoid thepossibility of injury to yourselfand to others as well as seriousdamage to the vehicle.

Measures that can be taken tohelp protect the environment.

"..." Control Display texts used toselect individual functions.

›...‹ Verbal instructions to use withthe voice activation system..

››...‹‹ Responses generated by thevoice activation system.

Action stepsAction steps to be carried out are presentedas a numbered list. The steps must be car-ried out in the defined order.

1. First action step.

2. Second action step.

EnumerationsEnumerations without mandatory order oralternative possibilities are presented as alist with bullet points.

– First possibility.

– Second possibility.

Symbols on vehicle components This symbol on a vehicle component

indicates that further information on thecomponent is available in the Owner'sManual.

Seite 7

Information NOTES


Vehicle features and options

This Owner's Manual describes all modelsand all standard, country-specific and op-tional equipment that is offered in themodel series. Therefore, this Owner'sManual also describes and illustrates fea-tures and functions that are not available ina vehicle, for example because of the se-lected optional features or the country-spe-cific version.

This also applies to safety-related functionsand systems.

When using these functions and systems,the applicable laws and regulations must beobserved.

For any options and equipment not descri-bed in this Owner's Manual, refer to theSupplementary Owner's Manuals.

Your dealer’s service center is happy to an-swer any questions that you may haveabout the features and options applicable toyour vehicle.

Status of the Owner's Manual

Basic informationThe manufacturer of your vehicle pursues apolicy of constant development that is con-ceived to ensure that our vehicles continueto embody the highest quality and safetystandards. In rare cases, therefore, the fea-tures described in this Owner's Manual maydiffer from those in your vehicle.

Updates made after the editorialdeadlineDue to updates after the editorial deadline,differences may exist between the printedOwner's Manual and the Integrated Owner'sManual in the vehicle.

Notes on updates can be found in the ap-pendix of the printed Owner's Manual forthe vehicle.

For Your Own Safety

ManufacturerThe manufacturer of this MINI is Bayeri-sche Motoren Werke Aktionengesellschaft,BMW AG.

Intended useHeed the following when using the vehicle:

– Owner's Manual.

– Information on the vehicle. Do not re-move stickers.

– Technical vehicle data.

– The traffic, speed, and safety laws wherethe vehicle is driven.

– Vehicle documents and statutory docu-ments.

WarrantyYour vehicle is technically configured forthe operating conditions and registrationrequirements applying in the country offirst delivery, also known as homologation.If your vehicle is to be operated in a differ-ent country it might be necessary to adaptyour vehicle to potentially differing operat-ing conditions and registration require-ments. If your vehicle does not comply withthe homologation requirements in a certaincountry you may not be able to lodge war-ranty claims for your vehicle there. Furtherinformation on warranty is available from aservice center.

Maintenance and repairsAdvanced technology, for instance the useof modern materials and high-performance

Seite 8

NOTES Information


electronics, requires suitable maintenanceand repair work.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-mends that you entrust corresponding pro-cedures to a MINI dealer’s service center. Ifyou choose to use another service facility,the manufacturer of your vehicle recom-mends use of a facility that performs work,e.g., maintenance and repair, according toMINI specifications with properly trainedpersonnel, referred to in the Owner'sManual as "another qualified service centeror repair shop".

If work is performed improperly, for in-stance maintenance and repair, there is arisk of subsequent damage and relatedsafety risks.

Improperly performed work on the vehiclepaint can lead to a failure or malfunction ofcomponents, e.g., the radar sensors, andthereby result in a safety risk.

Parts and accessoriesThe manufacturer of your vehicle recom-mends the use of parts and accessory prod-ucts approved by the manufacturer of theMINI.

Approved parts and accessories, and adviceon their use and installation are availablefrom a MINI dealer's service center.

MINI parts and accessories were tested bythe manufacturer of the MINI for theirsafety and suitability in MINI vehicles.

The manufacturer of your vehicle warrantsgenuine MINI parts and accessories.

The manufacturer of your vehicle does notevaluate whether each individual productfrom another manufacturer can be usedwith MINI vehicles without presenting asafety hazard, even if a country-specific of-ficial approval was issued. The manufac-turer of your vehicle does not evaluatewhether these products are suitable forMINI vehicles under all usage conditions.

California Proposition 65 WarningFor vehicles sold in California, the law re-quires vehicle manufacturers to provide thefollowing warning:

Warning

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Au-tomobile components and parts, includingcomponents found in the interior furnish-ings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemi-cals known to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects and repro-ductive harm. In addition, certain fluidscontained in vehicles and certain productsof component wear contain or emit chemi-cals known to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects or other re-productive harm. Battery posts, terminalsand related accessories contain lead andlead compounds. Batteries also containother chemicals known to the State of Cali-fornia to cause cancer. Wash your handsafter handling. Used engine oil containschemicals that have caused cancer in labo-ratory animals. Always protect your skinby washing thoroughly with soap and wa-ter. For more information go towww.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-ve-hicle.

Warning

Operating, servicing and maintaining apassenger vehicle or off-highway motorvehicle can expose you to chemicals in-cluding engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,phthalates, and lead, which are known tothe State of California to cause cancer andbirth defects or other reproductive harm.To minimize exposure, avoid breathing ex-haust, do not idle the engine except asnecessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or washyour hands frequently when servicing

Seite 9

Information NOTES


your vehicle. For more information go towww.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-ve-hicle.

Service and warrantyWe recommend that you read this publica-tion thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered bythe following warranties:

– New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

– Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.

– Federal Emissions System Defect War-ranty.

– Federal Emissions Performance War-ranty.

– California Emission Control System Lim-ited Warranty.

Detailed information about these warrantiesis listed in the Service and Warranty Infor-mation Booklet for US models or in the War-ranty and Service Guide Booklet for Cana-dian models.

Your vehicle has been specifically adaptedand designed to meet the particular operat-ing conditions and homologation require-ments in your country and continental re-gion in order to deliver the full drivingpleasure while the vehicle is operated underthose conditions. If you wish to operateyour vehicle in another country or region,you may be required to adapt your vehicleto meet different prevailing operating con-ditions and homologation requirements.You should also be aware of any applicablewarranty limitations or exclusions for suchcountry or region. In such case, please con-tact Customer Relations for further informa-tion.

MaintenanceMaintain the vehicle regularly to sustainthe road safety, operational reliability andthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Specifications for maintenance measures:

– MINI Maintenance system.

– Service and Warranty Information Book-let for US models.

– Warranty and Service Guide Booklet forCanadian models.

If the vehicle is not maintained or is im-properly maintained, this could result in se-rious damage to the vehicle. Such damage isnot covered by the MINI New Vehicle Lim-ited Warranty.

Refer to chapter engine oil change regard-ing recommended service intervals for oilchanges.

Data memory

General informationElectronic control devices are installed inthe vehicle. Electronic control units processdata they receive from vehicle sensors, self-generate or exchange with each other. Somecontrol units are necessary for the vehicleto function safely or provide assistance dur-ing driving, for instance driver assistancesystems. Furthermore, control units facili-tate comfort or infotainment functions.

Information about stored or exchanged datacan be requested from the manufacturer ofthe vehicle, in a separate booklet, for exam-ple.

Personal referenceEach vehicle is marked with a unique vehi-cle identification number. Depending on thecountry, the vehicle owner can be identifiedwith the vehicle identification number, li-cense plate and corresponding authorities.In addition, there are other options to trackdata collected in the vehicle to the driver orvehicle owner, for instance via utilizedservices.

Seite 10

NOTES Information


Operating data in the vehicleControl units process data to operate the ve-hicle.

For example, this includes:

– Status messages for the vehicle and itsindividual components, e.g., wheel rota-tional speed, wheel speed, deceleration,transverse acceleration, engaged safetybelt indicator.

– Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature,rain sensor signals.

The processed data is only processed in thevehicle itself and generally volatile. Thedata is not stored beyond the operating pe-riod.

Electronic components, e.g. control unitsand ignition keys, contain components forstoring technical information. Informationabout the vehicle condition, component us-age, maintenance requirements events orfaults can be stored temporarily or perma-nently.

This information generally records the stateof a component, a module, a system, or theenvironment, for instance:

– Operating states of system components,for instance, fill levels, tire inflationpressure, battery status.

– Malfunctions and faults in importantsystem components, for instance lightsand brakes.

– Responses by the vehicle to special sit-uations such as airbag deployment orengagement of the driving stability con-trol systems.

– Information on vehicle-damagingevents.

The data is required to perform the controlunit functions. Furthermore, it also servesto recognize and correct malfunctions, andhelps the vehicle manufacturer to optimizevehicle functions.

The majority of this data is volatile and isonly processed within the vehicle itself.Only a small share of the data is storedevent-related in event or fault memories.

When servicing, for instance during repairs,service processes, warranty cases, and qual-ity assurance measures, this technical infor-mation can be read out from the vehicle to-gether with the vehicle identificationnumber.

A dealer’s service center or another quali-fied service center or repair shop can readout the information. The socket for OBD On-board Diagnosis required by law in the ve-hicle is used to read out the data.

The data is collected, processed, and usedby the relevant organizations in the servicenetwork. The data documents technical con-ditions of the vehicle, helps with the identi-fication of the fault, compliance with war-ranty obligations and quality improvement.

Furthermore, the manufacturer has productmonitoring duties to meet in line with prod-uct liability law. To fulfill these duties, thevehicle manufacturer needs technical datafrom the vehicle. The data from the vehiclecan also be used to check customer claimsfor warranty and guaranty.

Fault and event memories in the vehicle canbe reset when a dealer’s service center oranother qualified service center or repairshop performs repair or servicing work.

Data entry and data transfer intothe vehicle

General informationDepending on the vehicle equipment, com-fort and individual settings can be stored inthe vehicle and modified or reset at anytime.

For example, this includes:

Seite 11

Information NOTES


– Settings for the seat and steering wheelpositions.

– Suspension and climate control settings.

If necessary, data can be transferred to theentertainment and communication systemof the vehicle, for instance via smartphone.

This includes the following depending onthe respective equipment:

– Multimedia data such as music, films orphotos for playback in an integratedmultimedia system.

– Address book data for use in conjunc-tion with an integrated hands-free sys-tem or an integrated navigation system.

– Entered navigation destinations.

– Data on the use of Internet services.

This data can be stored locally in the vehicleor is found on a device that has been con-nected to the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone,USB stick or MP3 player. If this data isstored in the vehicle, it can be deleted atany time.

This data is only transmitted to third partiesupon personal request as part of the use ofonline services. The transmission dependson the selected settings for the use of theservices.

Incorporation of mobile devicesDepending on the vehicle equipment, mo-bile devices connected to the vehicle, for in-stance smartphones, can be controlled viathe vehicle control elements.

The sound and picture from the mobile de-vice can be played back and displayedthrough the multimedia system. Certain in-formation is transferred to the mobile de-vice at the same time. Depending on thetype of incorporation, this includes, for in-stance position data and other general vehi-cle information. This optimizes the way inwhich selected apps, for instance navigationor music playback, work.

There is no further interaction between themobile device and the vehicle, such as ac-tive access to vehicle data.

How the data will be processed further isdetermined by the provider of the particularapp being used. The extent of the possiblesettings depends on the respective app andthe operating system of the mobile device.

Services

General informationIf the vehicle has a wireless network con-nection, this enables data to be exchangedbetween the vehicle and other systems. Thewireless network connection is realized viaan in-vehicle transmitter and receiver unitor via personal mobile devices brought intothe vehicle, for instance smartphones. Thiswireless network connection enables 'onlinefunctions' to be used. These include onlineservices and apps supplied by the vehiclemanufacturer or by other providers.

Services from the vehiclemanufacturerWhere online services from the vehiclemanufacturer are concerned, the corre-sponding functions are described in the ap-propriate place, for instance the Owner'sManual or manufacturer's website. The rele-vant legal information pertaining to dataprotection is provided there too. Personaldata may be used to perform online serv-ices. Data is exchanged over a secure con-nection, for instance with the IT systems ofthe vehicle manufacturer intended for thispurpose.

Any collection, processing, and use of per-sonal data above and beyond that needed toprovide the services must always be basedon a legal permission, contractual arrange-ment or consent. It is also possible to acti-vate or deactivate the data connection as awhole. That is, with the exception of func-

Seite 12

NOTES Information


tions and services required by law such asAssist systems.

Services from other providersWhen using online services from other pro-viders, these services are the responsibilityof the relevant provider and subject to theirdata privacy conditions and terms of use.The vehicle manufacturer has no influenceon the content exchanged during this proc-ess. Information on the way in which per-sonal data is collected and used in relationto services from third parties, the scope ofsuch data, and its purpose, can be obtainedfrom the relevant service provider.

Event Data Recorder EDR

This vehicle is equipped with an event datarecorder EDR. The main purpose of an EDRis to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deploy-ment or hitting a road obstacle, data thatwill assist in understanding how a vehicle’ssystems performed. The EDR is designed torecord data related to vehicle dynamics andsafety systems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re-cord such data as:

– How various systems in your vehiclewere operating.

– Whether or not the driver and passen-ger safety belts were fastened.

– How far, if at all, the driver was depress-ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal.

– How fast the vehicle was traveling.

This data can help provide a better under-standing of the circumstances in whichcrashes and injuries occur.

EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only ifa nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data

is recorded by the EDR under normal driv-ing conditions and no personal data, for in-stance name, gender, age, and crash loca-tion, are recorded.

However, other parties, such as law enforce-ment, could combine the EDR data with thetype of personally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, specialequipment is required, and access to the ve-hicle or the EDR is needed. In addition tothe vehicle manufacturer, other parties,such as law enforcement, that have the spe-cial equipment, can read the information ifthey have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Vehicle identification number

Engine compartment

The vehicle identification number can befound in the engine compartment, on theright-hand side of the vehicle.

Seite 13

Information NOTES


Windshield

The vehicle identification number can alsobe found behind the windshield.

Reporting safety defects

For US customersThe following only applies to vehiclesowned and operated in the US.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could cause in-jury or death, you should immediately in-form the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration NHTSA, in addition to noti-fying MINI of North America, LLC, P.O. Box1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227,Telephone 1-800-831-1117.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, itmay open an investigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in a group of ve-hicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign.

However, NHTSA cannot become involvedin individual problems between you, yourdealer, or MINI of North America, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra-tor, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain

other information about motor vehiclesafety from http://www.safercar.gov

For Canadian customersCanadian customers who wish to report asafety-related defect to Transport Canada,Defect Investigations and Recalls, may callthe toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. Youcan also obtain other information about mo-tor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.

Seite 14

NOTES Information


Seite 15

Information NOTES


Entering

Opening and closing

Buttons on the vehicle key

1 Unlocking

2 Locking

3 Unlocking the tailgate

4 Panic mode

Unlocking the vehiclePress the button on the vehicle key.

Depending on the settings, either only thedriver's door or all vehicle access points areunlocked.

If only the driver's door is unlocked, pressthe button on the vehicle key again to un-lock the other vehicle access points.

Press and hold the button on the ve-hicle key after unlocking.

The windows and the glass sunroof areopened, as long as the button on the vehiclekey is pressed.

Locking the vehiclePress the button on the vehicle key.

All vehicle access points are locked.

Buttons for the central lockingsystem

Overview

Buttons for the central locking system.

Locking

Pressing the button locks the vehi-cle if the front doors are closed.

Unlocking

Pressing the button unlocks the ve-hicle.

Panic modeYou can trigger the alarm system if you findyourself in a dangerous situation.

Press the button on the vehicle keyand hold for at least 3 seconds.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Comfort Access

ConceptThe vehicle can be accessed without operat-ing the vehicle key.

Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., inyour pants pocket, is sufficient.

Seite 16

QUICK REFERENCE Entering


The vehicle automatically detects the vehi-cle key when it is in close proximity or inthe car's interior.

Unlocking the vehicle

On the driver's or front passenger's doorhandle, press the button.

Locking the vehicle

On the driver's or front passenger's doorhandle, press the button.

Tailgate

unlocking

– Unlock the vehicle and then press thebutton on the outside of the tailgate.

– Press and hold the button on thevehicle key for approx. 1 second.

Depending on the setting, the doors mayalso be unlocked.

ClosingClosing the tailgate manually.

Displays and control elements

In the vicinity of the steeringwheel

1 Low beams, fog lights

2 High beams, headlight flasher, turn sig-nal

3 Instrument cluster

4 Wiper system

Indicator/warning lights

Instrument clusterThe indicator/warning lights can light up ina variety of combinations and colors.

Several of the lights are checked for properfunctioning and light up temporarily whenthe engine is started or the ignition isswitched on.

Seite 17

Entering QUICK REFERENCE


Driver's doorFor 3-door models:

1 Power windows

2 Exterior mirrors

For 5-door models:

1 Safety switch

2 Power windows

3 Exterior mirrors

All around the selector lever

1 Selector lever

2 Controller with buttons

3 Parking brake

Central Information Display (CID)

ConceptThe Central Information Display (CID) com-bines the functions of a multitude ofswitches. These functions can be operatedvia the Controller.

Buttons on the Controller

Button Function

Press once: calls up the mainmenu.

Press twice: open recently usedmenus.

Opens the Communication menu.

Opens the Media/Radio menu.

Opens destination input menufor navigation.

Opens navigation map.

Opens the previous display.

Opens the Options menu.

Voice activation

Activating the voice activation system

1. Press the button on the steeringwheel.

2. Wait for the signal.

3. Say the command.

This symbol indicates that the voice ac-tivation system is active.

Seite 18

QUICK REFERENCE Entering


If no other commands are available, operatethe function via the Central InformationDisplay (CID).

Terminating the voice activationsystem

Press the button on the steeringwheel or ›Cancel‹.

Seite 19

Entering QUICK REFERENCE


Set-up and use

Seats, mirrors, and steeringwheel

Manually adjustable seats

1 Forward/backward

2 Thigh support

3 Height

4 Backrest tilt

Adjusting the head restraint

Height

– To raise: push the head restraint up.

– To lower: press the button, arrow 1, andpush the head restraint down.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

1 Adjusting

2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Mon-itor

3 Folding in and out

Adjusting the steering wheel

In four directions

1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the prefer-red height and angle to suit your seatingposition.

3. Fold the lever back up.

Seite 20

QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use


Entering the rear1. Pull lever up to the stop.

2. Fold backrest forward.

3. Push the seat forward.

Original position1. Push the seat back into the original po-

sition.

2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.

Infotainment

Radio

Control elements

1 Changing the waveband

2 Changing the entertainment source

3 Sound output on/off, volume

4 Changing the station/track

5 Programmable memory buttons

Navigation destination entry

Entering a destination via address

State/province

1. "Navigation"

2. "Enter address"

3. "State/Province?"

4. Select the country from the list.

Entering the address

The address can be entered in any order.

Example: entering the address via the town/city

1. "City/Postal code?"

2. Enter the town/city.

The list is narrowed down further witheach entry.

3. Select the symbol.

4. Select a town/city from the list.

5. If necessary, enter the street.

6. Select the street as you would the town/city.

7. If necessary, enter a house number.


9. Select a house number or range of housenumbers from the list.

Starting destination guidance"Start guidance"

If only the town/city was entered: destina-tion guidance is started to the town/citycenter.

Pairing the mobile phoneAfter the mobile phone is paired once withthe vehicle, the mobile phone can be oper-ated using the Central Information Display

Seite 21

Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE


(CID), the steering wheel buttons and spo-ken instructions.

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Connect new device"

The vehicle's Bluetooth name is dis-played on the Control Display.

5. Select the functions for which the mo-bile phone is to be used.

6. To perform additional steps on the mo-bile phone, refer to the mobile phoneowner's manual: e.g., search for or con-nect the Bluetooth device or a new de-vice.

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle ap-pears on the mobile phone display. Se-lect the Bluetooth name of the vehicle.

7. Depending on the mobile device, a con-trol number is displayed or the controlnumber must be entered.

– Compare the control number dis-played on the Control Display withthe control number on the display ofthe device.

Confirm the control number on thedevice and on the Control Display.

– Enter and confirm the same controlnumber on the device and via theCentral Information Display (CID).

The device is connected and displayedin the device list.

The mobile phone is connected and will ap-pear at the top of the list of mobile phones.

Using the phone

Accepting a callIncoming call can be accepted via the Cen-tral Information Display (CID) or the buttonon the steering wheel.

Via the Central Information Display (CID)

"Accept"

Via the button on the steering wheel

Press the button.

Via the instrument cluster

Use the OK button on the steering wheel toselect: "Accept"

Dialing a number1. "Communication"

2. "Dial number"

3. Select the numbers individually.


Establish the connection via the additionalphone:

1. Press the button.

2. "Call via"

Apple CarPlay preparation

ConceptCarPlay allows certain functions of a com-patible Apple iPhone to be used via Sirivoice operation and the Central InformationDisplay (CID).

Functional requirements– Compatible iPhone.

iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.

– Corresponding mobile contract.

– Bluetooth, WLAN, and Siri voice opera-tion are activated on the iPhone.

Seite 22

QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use


Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlayVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. Select the following settings:

– "Bluetooth®"

– "Apple CarPlay"

Pairing the iPhone with CarPlayPair iPhone via Bluetooth with the vehicle.

Select CarPlay as the function:

"Apple CarPlay"

The iPhone is connected to the vehicle anddisplayed in the device list.

Seite 23

Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE


On the road

Driving

Starting and stopping the engine

Ignition on/off

– On: press the Start/Stopbutton.

Most of the indicator/warning lights light up fora varied length of time.

– Off: press the Start/Stop button again.

All indicator lights go out.

– Radio-ready state: when the ignition isswitched off, press the ON/OFF buttonon the radio or when the engine is run-ning, press the Start/Stop button.

Some electronic systems/power con-sumers remain ready for operation.

Start/stop engine

Steptronic transmission: starting

1. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Engage selector lever position P or N.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

Manual transmission: starting


2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift toneutral.


Steptronic transmission: switching off

1. When the vehicle is stationary, applythe parking brake.

2. Engage selector lever position P.


Manual transmission: switching off

1. With the vehicle at a standstill, pressthe Start/Stop button.

2. Shift into first gear or reverse.

3. Set the parking brake.

Auto Start/Stop function

Steptronic transmission: switches the en-gine off automatically while stationary tosave fuel. The engine starts automaticallywhen the brake pedal is released.

Manual transmission: switches the engineoff automatically while stationary to savefuel. As soon as the clutch pedal is de-pressed, the engine starts automatically.

Parking brake

ApplyingThe lever automatically engages after beingpulled up.

Releasing

Raise lever slightly, press the button andguide the lever down.

Seite 24

QUICK REFERENCE On the road


Manual transmission

ShiftingWhen shifting into 5th or 6th gear, pushthe gearshift lever to the right in order toprevent inadvertent shifting into the 3rd or4th gear.

Reverse gearSelect only when the vehicle is stationary.

To overcome the resistance push the gear-shift lever dynamically to the left and en-gage reverse gear with a forward shiftingmovement.

Steptronic transmission

Selector lever positionsParking position P.

R is reverse.

Neutral N.

Drive mode D.

Engage selector lever position P or R onlywhen the vehicle is stationary.

To prevent the vehicle from creeping afteryou select a drive mode or reverse, maintainpressure on the brake pedal until you areready to start.

Selector lever lockA lock prevents an inadvertent change fromselector lever position P to another selectorlever position and, depending on the trans-mission version, inadvertent switching toselector lever position P or R.

To release the lock: with the brake pedal de-pressed, press the button on the front orside of the selector lever.

Steptronic transmission, Sport andmanual mode

Sport program:

Press the selector lever to the left from se-lector lever position D.

Manual mode:

– To shift down: press the selector leverforward.

– To shift up: pull the selector lever rear-wards.

High beams, headlight flasher, turnsignal, roadside parking light

High beams, headlight flasher

Push the lever forward or pull it backward.

– High beams on, arrow 1.

The high beams light up when the lowbeams are switched on.

– High beams off/headlight flasher, ar-row 2.

Seite 25

On the road QUICK REFERENCE


Turn signal

– On: press the lever past the resistancepoint.

– Off: lightly tap the lever to the resist-ance point.

– Off: press the lever past the resistancepoint in the opposite direction.

– Triple turn signal activation: lightly tapthe lever up or down.

– Brief signaling: press the lever to the re-sistance point and hold it there for aslong as you want the turn signal to flash.

Canada: roadside parking light

To illuminate the vehicle on one side.

– On: with the ignition switched off, pressthe lever either up or down past the re-sistance point for approx. 2 seconds.

– Off: briefly press the lever to the resist-ance point in the opposite direction.

Lights and lighting

Light functions

Symbol Function

Front fog lights.

Automatic headlight control.

Lights off.

Daytime running lights.

Parking lights.

Low beams.

Instrument lighting.

Wiper system

Switching the wipers on/off and briefwipe

Switching on

Press the lever up until the desired positionis reached.

– Resting position of the wipers: posi-tion 0.

Seite 26



– Rain sensor: position 1.

– Normal wiper speed: position 2.

– Fast wiper speed: position 3.

Brief wipe and switching off

Press the lever down.

– Switching off: press the lever down untilit reaches its standard position.

– Brief wipe: press the lever down fromthe standard position.

Rain sensor

Activating/deactivating

To activate: press the lever up once from itsstandard position, arrow 1.

To deactivate: press the lever back into thestandard position.

Set interval or sensitivity of the rainsensor

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.

Cleaning the windshield

Pull the lever.

Canada: wiper system

Switching the wipers on/off and briefwipe

Switching on

Tap up the lever or press it past the resist-ance point.

Seite 27



– Normal wiper speed: tap up once.

– Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or taponce beyond the resistance point.

Brief wipe and switching off


– To switch off fast wipe: press downtwice.

– To switch off normal wipe: press downonce.

– Brief wipe: press down once.

Rain sensor


Press the button on the wiper lever.

Set interval or sensitivity of the rainsensor

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.


Pull the lever.

Climate control

Air conditioner

Button Function

Temperature.

Air conditioning.

Recirculated-air mode.

Seite 28



Button Function

Controls the air flow,manual.

Controls the air distributionmanually.

Windshield defroster.

Automatic climate control

Button Function

Temperature.

Air conditioning.

Maximum cooling.

AUTO program.

Recirculated-air mode.

Controls the air flow,manual.

Air distribution, manual.

Defrosts and defogs thewindows.

Button Function

Windshield defroster.

Rear window defroster.

Refueling stop

Refueling

Fuel cap1. Grasp the fuel filler flap at the rear edge

and open it.

2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket at-tached to the fuel filler flap.

GasolineFor the best fuel efficiency, the gasolineshould be sulfur-free or very low in sulfurcontent.

Refuel only with unleaded gasoline withoutmetallic additives.

Information on the recommended fuel gradecan be found in the Owner's Manual.

Seite 29



Wheels and tires

Tire inflation pressure specifications

For 5-door models:

The tire inflation pressure values can befound on the sign on the door pillar.

For 3-door models:

The tire inflation pressure values can befound on the sign on the door pillar.

Checking the tire inflation pressureRegularly check the tire inflation pressureand correct it as needed:

– At least twice a month.

– Before embarking on an extended trip.

After correcting the tire inflationpressureReinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.

Electronic oil measurement

RequirementsA current measured value is available afterapprox. 30 minutes of driving. During ashorter trip, the status of the last, suffi-ciently long trip is displayed.

Displaying the engine oil levelVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Engine oil level"

The engine oil level is displayed.

Adding engine oil

General informationSwitch off the ignition and safely park thevehicle before engine oil is added.

Adding engine oil

Only add engine oil when the message isdisplayed in the instrument cluster.

Observe the quantity to be added in themessage.

Take care not to add too much engine oil.

Observe recommended engine oil types.

Seite 30



Providing assistance

Hazard warning flashers

The button is located above the Control Dis-play.

Breakdown assistance

MINI Roadside AssistanceThis service can be reached around theclock in many countries.

1. "MINI Connected"

2. "MINI Assist"

3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"

The contact to the MINI Roadside Assis-tance is established.

A telephone number is displayed, ifneeded. Select to dial the telephonenumber on a connected mobile phone.

Seite 31



Cockpit


This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered withthe series. It also describes features andfunctions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-tions or country versions. This also appliesto safety-related functions and systems.When using these functions and systems,the applicable laws and regulations must beobserved.

In the vicinity of the steering wheel

1 Power windows 77

2 Exterior mirror operation 88

3 Buttons of the central locking sys-tem 67

4 Lights

Front fog lights 147

Light switch 144

Lights off

Daytime running lights 146

Parking lights 144

Low beams 144

Seite 32

AT A GLANCE Cockpit


Automatic headlight con-trol 145

Cornering light 146

High-beam Assistant 146Instrument lighting 148

5 Steering wheel buttons, left

Camera-based cruise controlon/off 178

Cruise control on/off 185

Speed Limiter 168

Cruise control: to store thespeed

Pausing, continuing cruisecontrol

Cruise control: increase speed

Cruise control: reduce speed

Camera-based cruise control:reduce distance

Camera-based cruise control:increase distance

6 Steering column stalk, left

Turn signal 104

High beams, head-light flasher 104

High-beam Assistant 146

Roadside parking lights 145

Onboard Computer 135

7 Instrument cluster 122

8 Steering column stalk, right

Wipers 105

Wiper on Canadian mod-els 109Rain sensor 106

Rain sensor on Canadian mod-els 109Cleaning windows 107

Rear window wiper in Cana-dian models 107

Rear window wiper 107

Clean the rear window 107

9 Steering wheel buttons, right

Voice activation 44

Telephone

Confirm the selection 134

Move selection up 134

Move selection down 134

Seite 33

Cockpit AT A GLANCE


Increase volume

Reduce volume

10 Horn, entire surface

11 Adjusting the steering wheel 90

12 Unlocking the hood 273

In the vicinity of the center console

1 Hazard warning system 292

Intelligent Safety 161

2 Control Display 36

3 Radio/Multimedia

4 Glove compartment 219

5 Climate control 199

6 PDC Park Distance Con-trol 187

Rearview camera 191

Parking assistant 194Auto Start/Stop func-tion 101

Start/stop the engine andswitch the ignition on/off 98

Seite 34

AT A GLANCE Cockpit


DSC Dynamic Stability Control 173

MINI Driving Modesswitch 176

7 Steptronic transmission selectorlever 114

Manual transmission gearshiftlever 113

8 Controller with buttons 38

9 Parking brake 104

In the vicinity of the roofliner

1 Emergency Request,SOS 293

2 Indicator light, front-seat pas-senger airbag 153

3 Reading lights 148

4 Ambient light 148

5 Panoramic glass sunroof 79

6 Interior lights 148

Seite 35

Cockpit AT A GLANCE


Central Information Display (CID)


This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered withthe series. It also describes features andfunctions that are not necessarily availablein your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-tions or country versions. This also appliesto safety-related functions and systems.When using these functions and systems,the applicable laws and regulations must beobserved.

Concept

The Central Information Display (CID) com-bines the functions of a multitude ofswitches. These functions can be operatedvia the Controller.

Safety information

Warning

Operating the integrated information sys-tems and communication devices whiledriving can distract from traffic. It is pos-sible to lose control of the vehicle. There isa risk of accident. Only use the systems ordevices when the traffic situation allows.As warranted, stop and use the systemsand devices while the vehicle is stationary.

Input and display

Letters and numbersDepending on the menu, you can switch be-tween entering upper and lower case let-ters, numbers and characters:

Symbol Function

Change between capital andlower-case letters.

Insert blank space.

Use voice activation.

Confirm entry.

Without navigation system Select the symbol.

Entry comparisonWhen entering names and addresses, thechoice is narrowed down with every letterentered and letters may be added automati-cally.

Entries are continuously compared withdata stored in the vehicle.

– Only those letters are offered during en-try for which data is available.

– Destination search: place names can beentered in all languages that are availa-ble on the Control Display.

Activating/deactivating thefunctionsSeveral menu items are preceded by acheckbox. The checkbox indicates whetherthe function is activated or deactivated. Se-lecting the menu item activates or deacti-vates the function.

Seite 36

AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)


Function is activated.

Function is deactivated.

Status information

General informationThe status field can be found in the upperarea of the Control Display. Status informa-tion is displayed in the form of symbols.

Radio

Symbol Meaning

HD Radio station is being re-ceived.

Satellite radio is switched on.

Telephone

Symbol Meaning

Incoming or outgoing call.

Missed call.

Signal strength of cellular net-work.

Symbol flashes: network search.

Cellular network is not available.

Roaming is active.

SMS text message received.

Message received.

Reminder.

Sending not possible.

Entertainment

Symbol Meaning

Bluetooth audio.

USB audio interface.

Mobile phone audio interface.

Other symbols

Symbol Meaning

Check Control message.

The sound output has beenswitched off.

Encrypted connection not ac-tive.

Request for the current vehicleposition.

Checking the current vehicle po-sition.

Split screen

General information

Additional information can be displayed onthe right side of the split screen, for in-stance information from the Onboard Com-puter.

In the divided screen view, the so-calledsplit screen, this information remains visi-ble even when switching to another menu.

Switching the split screen on/off


2. "Split screen"

Seite 37

Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE


Selecting the display

The display can be selected in menus whichsupport the split screen function.

1. Move the Controller to the right untilthe split screen is selected.

2. Press the Controller.

3. Select the desired setting.

Specifying the number of displays

It is possible to specify the number of dis-plays.

1. Move the Controller to the right untilthe split screen is selected.


3. "Personalize menu"


5. Move the Controller to the left.

Control elements

Overview

1 Control Display with touchscreen

2 Controller with buttons

Control Display

General informationTo clean the Control Display, follow the careinstructions, refer to page 304.

In the case of very high temperatures onthe Control Display, for instance due to in-tense solar radiation, the brightness may bereduced down to complete deactivation.Once the temperature is reduced, for in-stance through shade or air conditioning,the normal functions are restored.

Safety information

NOTICE

Objects in the area in the front of the Con-trol Display can shift and damage the Con-trol Display. There is a risk of damage toproperty. Do not place objects in the areain front of the Control Display.

Switching on/off automaticallyThe Control Display is switched on automat-ically when the vehicle is unlocked or assoon as the Control Display is needed foroperation.

In certain situations, the Control Display isswitched off automatically, for instance ifno operation is performed on the vehicle forseveral minutes.

Switching on/off manuallyThe Control Display can also be switched offmanually.


2. "Turn off control display"

Press the Controller or any button on theController to switch it back on again.

Controller with navigation system

General informationThe buttons can be used to open the menusdirectly. The Controller can be used to se-lect menu items and enter the settings.

Seite 38



Operation– Turn to switch between menu items, for

example.

– Press to select a menu item, for example.

– Tilt in four directions to switch betweendisplays, for example.


Button Function





Opens destination input menufor navigation.

Opens navigation map.



Controller without navigationsystem

General informationThe buttons can be used to open the menusdirectly. The Controller can be used to se-lect menu items and enter the settings.

Operation– Turn to switch between menu items, for

example.

Seite 39



– Press to select a menu item, for example.

– Tilt in two directions to switch betweendisplays, for example.


Button Function







Operating via the Controller

Opening the main menuPress the button.

The main menu is displayed.

All Central Information Display (CID) func-tions can be called up via the main menu.

Selecting menu itemsHighlighted menu items can be selected.

1. Turn the Controller until the desiredmenu item is highlighted.


Adjusting menu contentsThe display of menus "Media/Radio","Communication" and "MINI Connected" canbe adjusted, for instance to remove the en-tries of functions that are not used from themenu.

Seite 40



Via Central Information Display (CID):

1. Select the menu.

2. "Personalize menu"

3. Select desired menu contents to be dis-played.

Changing between displaysAfter a menu item is selected, for instance"System settings", a new display appears.

– Move the Controller to the left.

The current display closes and the previ-ous display is shown.

– Press the button.

The previous display re-opens.

– Move the Controller to the right.

The new display opens.

An arrow indicates that additional displayscan be opened.

Opening recently used menusThe recently used menus can be displayed.

Press the button twice.

Opening the Options menuPress the button.

The "Options" menu is displayed.

The menu consists of various areas, for in-stance:

– "Split screen": screen settings.

– "Media/Radio": control options for theselected main menu.

– "Save station": if applicable, further con-trol options for the selected menu.

Entering letters and numbers

Input1. Turn the Controller: select letters or

numbers.

2. : confirm entry.

Deleting

Symbol Function

Press the Controller: deleteletters or number.

or

Hold the Controller down: de-lete all letters or numbers.

Using alphabetical listsFor alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-tries, the letters for which there is an entryare displayed at the left edge.

1. Turn the Controller to the left or rightquickly.

All letters for which there are entriesare displayed on the left edge.

2. Select the first letter of the desired en-try.

The first entry of the selected letter isdisplayed.

Operation via touchscreen

General informationThe Control Display is equipped with atouchscreen.

Touch the screen with your fingers. Do notuse any objects.

Opening the main menu Tap on the symbol.

Seite 41



The main menu is displayed.

All Central Information Display (CID) func-tions can be called up via the main menu.

Selecting menu itemsTap the desired menu item.

Changing between displaysAfter a menu item is selected, a new displayopens.

An arrow indicates that additional displayscan be opened.

– Swipe to the left.

– Tap arrow.

The new display opens.

Opening recently used menus1. Tap on the symbol.

2. Tap on the symbol.

Entering letters and numbers

Input1. Tap the symbol on the touchscreen.

A keyboard is displayed on the ControlDisplay.

2. Enter desired letters and numbers.

Deleting

Symbol Function

Tapping the symbol: deletes theletter or number.

Tapping and holding the symbolall letters: deletes all letters ornumbers.

Operating navigation mapThe navigation map can be moved using thetouchscreen.

Function Operation

Enlarge/shrinkmap.

Drag in or out with thefingers.

Programmable memory but-tons

General informationThe Central Information Display (CID) func-tions can be stored on the programmablememory buttons and called up directly, forinstance radio stations, navigation destina-tions, phone numbers and menu entries.

Settings are stored for the driver profilecurrently used.

Seite 42



Storing a function1. Select the function via the Central Infor-

mation Display (CID).

2. Press and hold the desired but-ton, until a signal sounds.

Executing a functionPress the button.

The function will work immediately.This means, for instance that the number isdialed when a phone number is selected.

Displaying the key assignmentTouch buttons with finger. Do not weargloves or use objects.

The assignment of the buttons is displayedin the upper area of the Control Display.

Deleting the button assignments1. Press buttons 1 and 6 simultaneously

for approx. 5 seconds.

2. "OK"

Seite 43



Voice activation system



Concept

Most functions displayed on the ControlDisplay can be operated by voice commandsvia the voice activation system. The systemsupports you with announcements duringinput.

General information

– Functions that can only be used whenthe vehicle is stationary can only be op-erated via the voice activation system toa limited extent.

– The system uses a special microphoneon the driver's side.

– ›...‹ in the Owner's Manual denotes ver-bal instructions to use with the voice ac-tivation system.

Functional requirements

– A language must be set via the ControlDisplay that is supported by the voice

activation system. To set the language,refer to page 48.

– Always say commands in the languageof the voice activation system.

Using the voice activation sys-tem

Activating the voice activationsystem



3. Say the command.

This symbol indicates that the voice ac-tivation system is active.

No other commands may be available. Inthis case, operate the function via the Cen-tral Information Display (CID).

Terminating the voice activationsystem

Press the button on the steeringwheel or ›Cancel‹.

Possible commands

General informationMost menu items on the Control Display canbe spoken as commands.

Commands from other menus can also bespoken.

You can also select list entries such asphone list entries via voice activation. Read

Seite 44

AT A GLANCE Voice activation system


these list entries out loud exactly as theyare shown in the respective list.

Displaying possible commandsThe following is displayed in the top area ofthe Control Display:

– Some possible commands for the currentmenu.

– Some possible commands from othermenus.

– Status of the voice recognition.

– Encrypted connection is not availa-ble.

Help on the voice activation system– ›General information on voice control‹:

have information on the operating prin-ciple of the voice activation system readout loud.

– ›Help‹: have help for the current menuread out loud.

Example: opening the tone set-tings

The commands of the menu items are spo-ken just as they are selected via the Con-troller.

1. Switch on the Entertainment sound out-put, if needed.


3. ›Media and radio‹

4. ›Tone‹

Adjusting

Setting the languageThe language to be used for voice activationand system announcements can be set.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. If necessary, "Language"

4. "Language:"

5. Select the desired language.

Setting the voice dialogYou can set the system to use standard dia-log or a short version.

The short version of the voice dialog playsback short messages in abbreviated form.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Language"

4. "Speech mode:"


Speaking during voice outputIt is possible to answer during inquiries ofthe voice activation system. The functioncan be deactivated if inquiries are often un-desirably interrupted, for instance due tobackground noise or conversations in thevehicle.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Language"

4. "Speaking during voice output"

Seite 45

Voice activation system AT A GLANCE


Activating voice recognition viathe serverThe voice recognition feature via the serverprovides a dictation function and a naturalmethod of entering destinations while im-proving the quality of voice recognition. Touse the functions, data is transmitted to aservice provider via an encrypted connec-tion and stored locally there.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Language"

4. "Server speech recognition"

Adjusting the volumeTurn the volume button during the spokeninstructions until the desired volume is set.

– The volume remains constant even if thevolume of other audio sources ischanged.

– The volume is stored for the profile cur-rently used.

Information on EmergencyRequests

Do not use the voice activation system toinitiate an Emergency Request. In stressfulsituations, the voice and vocal pitch canchange. This can unnecessarily delay the es-tablishment of a phone connection.

Instead, use the SOS button, refer topage 293, close to the interior mirror.

System limits

– Certain noises can be detected and maylead to problems. Keep the doors, win-dows, and glass sunroof closed.

– Noises from the front passenger or therear seat bench can impair the system.Avoid making other noise in the vehiclewhile speaking.

– Major language dialects can cause prob-lems with the voice recognition feature.Speak loud and clear.

Using the voice activation sys-tem of the smartphone

A smartphone connected to the vehicle canbe used via voice activation.

Activate voice command response on thesmartphone for this purpose.

1. Press and hold the button on thesteering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.

Voice command response is activated onthe smartphone.

2. Release the button.

If activation is successful, a confirma-tion appears on the Control Display.

If it was not possible to activate voice com-mand response, the list of Bluetooth devicesappears on the Control Display.

Amazon Alexa Car Integration

ConceptAlexa is a digital voice-controlled assistantby Amazon. With Amazon Alexa Car Inte-gration, Alexa can be used in the vehicle.

Seite 46

AT A GLANCE Voice activation system


General informationSome of the Alexa functions are limited inthe vehicle to prevent any impairment ofsafety while driving.

Functional requirements– Connected Voice Services purchased via

MINI Connected Store.

– Same MINI Connected account used inthe vehicle and in the MINI Connectedapp.

– Vehicle added in the MINI Connectedapp.

– Amazon account and MINI account con-nected in the MINI Connected app.

– Smartphone connected to the vehicle viaBluetooth or USB.

Activation in the MINI ConnectedappThe Amazon Alexa Car Integration is acti-vated in the MINI Connected app.

Follow the instructions in the app.

Activation in the vehicleAn authorization for the use of AmazonAlexa Car Integration is required every timebefore starting a trip.

1. Authorizing Amazon Alexa Car Integra-tion:

– Connect the smartphone to the vehi-cle via Bluetooth.

– Selects appropriate driver profile, re-fer to page 71.



4. Say activation word ›Alexa‹ and desiredcommand.

Information about the active function isdisplayed on the Control Display.

MalfunctionIn case of a malfunction, switch off the en-gine and start the engine again.

Seite 47

Voice activation system AT A GLANCE


General settings



Language

Setting the languageVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. If necessary, "Language"

4. "Language:"


The setting is stored for the driver profilecurrently used.

Setting the voice dialogFor voice dialog for the voice activation sys-tem, refer to page 45.

Time

Setting the time zoneVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Date and time"

4. "Time zone:"



Setting the timeVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Date and time"

4. "Time:"

5. Turn the Controller until the desiredhours are displayed.


7. Turn the Controller until the desired mi-nutes are displayed.


Setting the time formatVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Date and time"

4. "Time format:"


Seite 48

AT A GLANCE General settings



Date

Setting the dateVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Date and time"

4. "Date:"

5. Turn the Controller until the desired dayis displayed.


7. Make the settings for the month andyear.

Setting the date formatVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Date and time"

4. "Date format:"



Setting the units of measure-ment

You can set the units of measurement forsome values, for example, consumption, dis-tances and temperature.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Units"

4. Select the desired menu item.



Activating/deactivating thedisplay of the current vehicleposition

ConceptIf vehicle tracking has been activated, thecurrent vehicle position can be displayed inthe MINI Connected app.

Activating/deactivatingVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Vehicle tracking"

4. "Vehicle tracking"


Activating/deactivatingpopup windows

For some functions, popup windows are dis-played automatically on the Control Display.Some of these popup windows can be acti-vated or deactivated.

Seite 49

General settings AT A GLANCE



1. "My MINI"


3. "Pop-ups"



Control Display

BrightnessVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"

4. "Control display"

5. "Brightness at night"

6. Turn the Controller until the desiredbrightness is set.



Depending on the light conditions, thebrightness settings may not be clearly visi-ble.

ScreensaverIf no entries are made via the Central Infor-mation Display (CID), a screensaver can bedisplayed after an adjustable time.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"

4. "Control display"

5. "Screensaver"



Messages

ConceptThe menu centrally displays all messages ar-riving in the vehicle in list form.

General informationThe following messages can be displayed:

– Traffic messages.

– Communication messages, for examplee-mails, SMS text messages or remind-ers.

– Check Control messages.

– Messages on service notifications.

– Messages from the vehicle manufac-turer.

Messages are additionally displayed in thestatus field.

Retrieving messagesVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "Notifications"

2. Select the desired message.

The menu in which the message is dis-played will open.

Deleting messagesAll messages, except Check Control mes-sages or messages from the vehicle manu-facturer, can be deleted from the list.

Check Control messages or messages fromthe vehicle manufacturer are displayed aslong as they are relevant.

Seite 50




1. "Notifications"

2. Select the desired message.


4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete allnotifications"

AdjustingThe following settings can be adjusted:

– Select the applications, from which mes-sages will be permitted.

– Sort the messages according to date orpriority.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Notifications"


Data protection

Data transfer

ConceptThe vehicle offers various functions whichrequire data to be transferred to MINI or aservice provider. The data transfer can bedeactivated for some functions.

General informationWith data transfer deactivated, the respec-tive function cannot be used.

Only make these settings while stationary.

Activating/deactivatingFollow the instructions on the Control Dis-play.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Data privacy"


Deleting personal data in thevehicle

ConceptDepending on the usage, the vehicle storespersonal data, such as stored radio stations.This personal data can be permanently de-leted via the Central Information Display(CID).

General informationDepending on the vehicle equipment, thefollowing data is deleted:

– Driver profile settings.

– Stored radio stations.

– Stored programmable memory buttons.

– Travel and Onboard Computer informa-tion.

– Music hard disk.

– Navigation, for instance stored destina-tions.

– Phone book.

– Office data, for instance voice notes.

– Login accounts.

Altogether, the deletion of the data can takeup to 15 minutes.

Functional requirementData can only be deleted while stationary.

Deleting dataNote and follow the instructions on the Con-trol Display.

Seite 51




1. "My MINI"


3. "Data privacy"

4. "Delete personal data"

5. "Delete personal data"

6. "OK"

7. Exit and lock the vehicle.

The deletion process takes 15 minutes tocomplete.

If not all data was deleted, repeat the dele-tion.

Canceling deletionStart the engine to cancel deletion of thedata.

Connections

ConceptVarious connection types are available forusing mobile devices in the vehicle. Theconnection type to select depends on themobile device and the desired function.

General informationThe following overview shows possiblefunctions and the suitable connection typesfor them. The scope of functions depends onthe mobile device.

Function Connec-tion type

Making calls via the hands-free system.

Using phone functions viathe Central Information Dis-play (CID).

Using the smartphone Of-fice functions.

Bluetooth.

Playing music from thesmartphone or the audioplayer.

Bluetoothor USB.

Using compatible apps viathe Central Information Dis-play (CID).

Bluetoothor USB.

USB storage device:

Exporting and importingdriver profiles.

Update the software.

Playing music.

USB.

Playing videos from thesmartphone or the USB de-vice.

USB.

Using Apple CarPlay appsvia the Central InformationDisplay (CID) and voice op-eration.

BluetoothandWLAN.

The following connection types require one-time pairing with the vehicle:

– Bluetooth.

– Apple CarPlay

Paired devices are automatically recognizedlater on and connected to the vehicle.

Seite 52



Safety information

Warning

Operating the integrated information sys-tems and communication devices whiledriving can distract from traffic. It is pos-sible to lose control of the vehicle. There isa risk of accident. Only use the systems ordevices when the traffic situation allows.As warranted, stop and use the systemsand devices while the vehicle is stationary.

Compatible devices

General informationMalfunctions may occur with devices notlisted or deviating software versions.

Displaying the vehicle identificationnumber and software part numberWhen looking for compatible devices, youmay have to state the vehicle identificationnumber and the software part number.These numbers can be displayed in the ve-hicle.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. "Bluetooth® info"

6. "System information"

A software update, refer to page 58, canbe performed.

Bluetooth connection

Functional requirements– Compatible device, refer to page 53,

with Bluetooth interface.

– The vehicle key is in the vehicle.

– The device is ready for operation.

– Bluetooth is activated on the device andin the vehicle, refer to page 53.

– Bluetooth presettings, such as visibility,may be required on the device; refer tothe owner's manual of the device.

Switching on BluetoothVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. "Bluetooth®"

Activating/deactivating telephonefunctionsTo use all supported functions of a mobilephone, the following functions must be acti-vated prior to pairing.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. Select the desired setting:

– "Office"

Activate function to transmit shortmessages, e-mails, calendars, tasks,notes, and reminders to the vehicle.Costs can be incurred by transmit-ting all data to the vehicle.

– "Contact images"

Activate function to show the con-tact pictures.


Seite 53



Pairing the mobile device with thevehicleVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Connect new device"

5. Select the functions for which the de-vice will be used:

– "Telephone"

– "Bluetooth® audio"

– "Apps"

– "Apple CarPlay"

The vehicle's Bluetooth name is dis-played on the Control Display.

6. On the mobile device, search for Blue-tooth devices in the vicinity.

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle ap-pears on the mobile device display.

Select the Bluetooth name of the vehi-cle.

7. Depending on the mobile device, a con-trol number is displayed or the controlnumber must be entered.

– Compare the control number dis-played on the Control Display withthe control number on the display ofthe device.

Confirm the control number on thedevice and on the Control Display.

– Enter and confirm the same controlnumber on the device and via theCentral Information Display (CID).

The device is connected and displayedin the device list.

If connection was not successful: Fre-quently Asked Questions, refer to page 54.

Frequently Asked QuestionsAll requirements are met and all requiredsteps were completed in the specified order.Despite that, the mobile device does notfunction as expected.

In this case, the following explanations canhelp:

Why could the mobile phone not be pairedor connected?

– There are too many Bluetooth devicesconnected to the mobile phone or vehi-cle.

In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connec-tions with other devices.

Delete all known Bluetooth connectionsfrom the device list on the mobile phoneand start a new device search.

– The mobile phone is in power-save modeor has only a limited remaining batterylife.

Charge the mobile phone.

Why does the mobile phone no longer re-act?

– The applications on the mobile phone donot function anymore.

Switch the mobile phone off and onagain.

– Possibly too high or too low ambienttemperatures for mobile phone opera-tion.

Do not subject the mobile phone to ex-treme ambient temperatures.

Why can phone functions not be used viathe Central Information Display (CID)?

– The mobile phone may not be properlyconfigured, for instance as Bluetooth au-dio device.

Connect the mobile phone with the tele-phone or additional phone function.

Why are no or not all phone book entriesdisplayed or why are they incomplete?

Seite 54



– Transmission of the phone book entriesis not yet complete.

– It is possible that only the phone bookentries of the mobile phone or the SIMcard are transmitted.

– It may not be possible to display phonebook entries with special characters.

– It may not be possible to transmit con-tacts from social networks.

– The number of phone book entries to bestored is too high.

– Data volume of the contact too large, forinstance due to stored information suchas notes.

Reduce the data volume of the contact.

– A mobile phone is only connected as anaudio source.

Reconfigure the mobile phone and con-nect it with the telephone or additionalphone function.

How can the phone connection quality beimproved?

– The strength of the Bluetooth signal onthe mobile phone can be adjusted, de-pending on the mobile phone.

– Insert the mobile phone into the wire-less charging tray.

– Adjust the volume of the microphoneand loudspeakers separately.

If all points in this list have been checkedand the required function is still not availa-ble, contact the hotline, a dealer’s servicecenter or another qualified service center orrepair shop.

USB connection

General informationThe following mobile devices can be con-nected to the USB port:

– Mobile phones.

– Audio devices with USB port, for in-stance MP3 players.

– USB storage devices.

Common file systems are supported.FAT32 and exFAT are the recommendedformats.

A connected USB storage device will besupplied with charge current via the USBport if the device supports this. Follow themaximum charge current of the USB port.

The following uses are possible on USBports with data transfer:

– Exporting and importing driver profiles,refer to page 71.

– Playing music files via USB audio.

– Playing videos via USB video.

– Loading of software updates, refer topage 58.

Follow the following when connecting:

– Do not use force when plugging the con-nector into the USB port.

– Use a flexible adapter cable.

– Protect the USB storage device againstmechanical damage.

– Due to the large number of USB storagedevices available on the market, it can-not be guaranteed that every device isoperable on the vehicle.

– Do not expose USB storage devices toextreme environmental conditions, suchas very high temperatures; refer to theowner's manual of the device.

– Due to the many different compressiontechniques, proper playback of the me-dia stored on the USB storage devicecannot be guaranteed in all cases.

– To ensure proper transmission of thestored data, do not charge a USB storagedevice via the onboard socket, when itis connected to the USB port.

– Depending on how the USB storage de-vice is being used, settings may be re-

Seite 55



quired on the USB storage device, referto the owner's manual of the device.

Not compatible USB media:

– USB hard drives.

– USB hubs.

– USB memory card readers with multipleslots.

– HFS-formatted USB storage devices.

– Devices such as fans or lamps.

Functional requirementCompatible device, refer to page 53, withUSB port.

Connecting the deviceConnect the USB device using a suitableadapter cable to a USB port, refer topage 215.

The USB device is connected to the vehicleand displayed in the device list.

Apple CarPlay preparation

ConceptCarPlay allows certain functions of a com-patible Apple iPhone to be used via Sirivoice operation and the Central InformationDisplay (CID).

Functional requirements– Compatible iPhone, refer to page 53.

iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.

– Corresponding mobile contract.

– Bluetooth, WLAN, and Siri voice opera-tion are activated on the iPhone.

– Booking the MINI Connected service:Apple CarPlay preparation.

Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlayVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. Select the following settings:

– "Bluetooth®"

– "Apple CarPlay"

Pairing the iPhone with CarPlayPairing an iPhone with the vehicle, refer topage 54, via Bluetooth

Select CarPlay as the function:

"Apple CarPlay"

The iPhone is connected to the vehicle anddisplayed in the device list, refer topage 57.

OperationFor more information, refer to theIntegrated Owner's Manual or the Owner'sManual for Navigation, Entertainment, Com-munication.

Frequently Asked QuestionsAll requirements are met and all requiredsteps were completed in the specified order.Despite that, the mobile device does notfunction as expected.

In this case, the following explanations canhelp:

The iPhone has already been paired withApple CarPlay. When a new connection isestablished, CarPlay can no longer be se-lected.

– Delete the iPhone concerned from thedevice list.

Seite 56



– On the iPhone, delete the vehicle con-cerned from the list of stored vehiclesunder Bluetooth and under WLAN.

– Pair the iPhone as a new device.

If the steps listed have been carried out andthe required function is still not available:contact the hotline, a dealer's service centeror another qualified service center or repairshop.

Managing mobile devices

General information– After one-time pairing, the devices are

automatically recognized and recon-nected when the ignition is switched on.

– The data stored on the SIM card or inthe mobile phone is transferred to thevehicle after recognition.

– For some devices, certain settings maybe necessary, for instance authorization,see owner's manual of the device.

Displaying the device listAll devices paired and/or connected withthe vehicle are displayed in the device list.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Mobile devices"

A symbol indicates, for which function a de-vice is used.

Symbol Function

"Telephone"

"Additional telephone"

"Bluetooth® audio"

"Apps"

"Apple CarPlay"

Configuring the deviceFunctions can be activated or deactivatedfor paired and connected devices.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Mobile devices"

4. Select the desired device.


If a function is assigned to a device, thefunction will be deactivated where appro-priate for a device that is already connectedand the device will be disconnected.

Disconnecting the deviceThe device's connection to the vehicle isdisconnected.

The device remains paired and can be con-nected again, refer to page 57.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Mobile devices"

4. Select device.

5. "Disconnect device"

Connecting the deviceA disconnected device can be reconnected.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Mobile devices"

4. Select device.

5. "Connect device"

The functions that were assigned to the de-vice before disconnecting are assigned tothe device when it is reconnected. The func-

Seite 57



tions may be deactivated on a device al-ready connected.

Deleting the deviceVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Mobile devices"

4. Select device.

5. "Delete device"

The device is disconnected and removedfrom the device list.

Swapping the telephone and additionalphoneIf two mobile phones are connected to thevehicle, the functions of the phone and ad-ditional phone can be switched.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. "Swap telephone/additional tel."

Software update

General informationThe vehicle supports a large number of mo-bile devices, for example mobile phones andMP3 players. Software updates are availablefor many of the supported devices. The ve-hicle is kept up-to-date via regular vehiclesoftware updates.

Contact a dealer's service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop forinformation on available software updates.

Displaying the version of the installedsoftwareThe software version installed in the vehicleis displayed.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Software update"

4. "Show current version"

If an update has been carried out before, se-lect the desired version to display additionalinformation.

Updating software via USBThe software may only be updated when thevehicle is stationary.


1. Store the file for the software update inthe main directory of a USB storage de-vice.

2. Connecting USB storage devices to theUSB port.

3. "My MINI"



6. "Update software"

7. "USB"

8. "Install software"

9. "OK"

10. Wait for the update to complete.

11. Confirm system restart.

Restoring the software versionYou can restore the software to the versionprior to the last update or to its factory set-tings.

The software may only be restored whenthe vehicle is stationary.

Seite 58




1. "My MINI"



4. "Restore software"

5. – "Previous version"

The previous software version is re-stored.

– "Default software settings"

The first software version is re-stored.

6. "Remove software"

7. "OK"

8. Wait for restore.

9. Confirm system restart.

Seite 59



Owner's Manual media



General information

You can use the following media formats tocall up the content in the Owner's Manual:

– Printed Owner's Manual, refer topage 60.

– Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehi-cle, refer to page 60.

Printed Owner's Manual

ConceptThe printed Owner's Manual describes allstandard, country-specific, and optional fea-tures offered with the series.

General informationThe Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter-tainment, and Communication can be ob-tained as a printed book from the servicecenter.

Supplementary Owner's ManualsAlso follow the Supplementary Owner'sManuals, which are included in addition tothe onboard literature.

Integrated Owner's Manual inthe vehicle

ConceptThe Integrated Owner's Manual specificallydescribes features and functions found inthe vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manualcan be displayed on the Control Display.

Selecting the Owner's Manual


2. "My MINI"

3. "Owner's Manual"

4. Select the desired method of accessingthe contents.

Scrolling through the Owner'sManualTurn the Controller, until the next or previ-ous contents are displayed.

Context help

General informationThe section of the Owner's Manual relatingto the function that is currently selectedcan be displayed directly.

Seite 60

AT A GLANCE Owner's Manual media


Opening via Central InformationDisplay (CID)Change directly to the Options menu fromthe function on the Control Display:


2. "Owner's Manual"

Opening when a Check Controlmessage is displayedDirectly from the Check Control message onthe Control Display:

"Owner's Manual"

Changing between a function and theOwner's ManualTo switch from a function, for instanceradio, to the Owner's Manual on the ControlDisplay and to alternate between the twodisplays:


2. "Owner's Manual"

3. Select the desired page in the Owner'sManual.

4. Press the button again to return tothe last displayed function.

5. Press the button to return to thepage of the Owner's Manual displayedlast.

To alternate continuously between the lastdisplayed function and the last displayedpage of the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4& 5. Opens a new display every time.

Programmable memory buttons

General informationThe Owner's Manual can be stored on theprogrammable memory buttons and calledup directly.

Storing1. Select the desired entry point via the

Central Information Display (CID):

– "Quick reference"

– "Search by pictures"

– "Keyword search"

– "Animations"

2. Press and hold the desired but-ton, until a signal sounds.

Executing

Press the button.

The Owner's Manual is displayedimmediately.

Seite 61

Owner's Manual media AT A GLANCE


Opening and closing



Vehicle key

General informationThe vehicle is supplied with two vehiclekeys with integrated key.

Each vehicle key contains a replaceable bat-tery, refer to page 65.

Depending on the equipment and countryversion, various settings, refer to page 74,can be configured for the button functions.

A personal driver profile, refer to page 71,for each vehicle key is stored in the vehicle.

To provide information on maintenance re-quirements, the service data is stored in thevehicle key, refer to page 281.

To prevent possible locking in of the vehiclekey, take the vehicle key with you when ex-iting the vehicle.

Safety information

Warning

People or animals in the vehicle can lockthe doors from the inside and lock them-selves in. In this case, the vehicle cannotbe opened from the outside. There is a riskof injury. Take the vehicle key with you sothat the vehicle can be opened from theoutside.

Warning

Unlocking from the inside is only possiblewith special knowledge.

Persons who spend a lengthy time in thevehicle while being exposed to extremetemperatures are at risk of injury or death.Do not lock the vehicle from the outsidewhen there are people in it.

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the ve-hicle can cause the vehicle to move andendanger themselves and traffic, for in-stance due to the following actions:

– Pressing the Start/Stop button.

– Releasing the parking brake.

– Opening and closing the doors orwindows.

– Engaging selector lever position N.

– Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Donot leave children or animals unattendedin the vehicle. Take the vehicle key withyou when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Seite 62

CONTROLS Opening and closing


Overview

1 Unlocking

2 Locking

3 Unlocking the tailgate

4 Panic mode

UnlockingPress the button on the vehicle key.

Depending on the settings, refer topage 74, the following access points areunlocked.

– Driver's door and fuel filler flap.

Press the button on the vehicle keyagain to unlock the other vehicle accesspoints.

– All doors, tailgate, and fuel filler flap.

In addition, the following functions are exe-cuted:

– Unlocking is confirmed by the turn sig-nals and the horn. This function must beactivated in the settings, refer topage 74.

– The settings stored in the driver profile,refer to page 71, are applied.

– The interior lights, refer to page 148,and the MINI logo projection areswitched on, provided that the interiorlights were not switched off manually.

– Depending on the settings, the welcomelight and pathway lighting, refer topage 145, are switched on.

– Exterior mirrors folded through conven-ient closing are folded open.

– The alarm system, refer to page 75, isswitched off.

The light functions may depend on the am-bient brightness.

Convenient openingPress and hold the button on the ve-hicle key after unlocking.

The windows and the glass sunroof areopened, as long as the button on the vehiclekey is pressed.

Locking1. Close the driver's door.

2. Press the button on the vehiclekey.

The following functions are executed:

– All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel fillerflap are locked.

– Locking is confirmed by the turn signalsand the horn. This function must be ac-tivated in the settings, refer topage 74.

– The alarm system, refer to page 75, isswitched on.

If the engine or ignition is still switched onwhen you lock the vehicle, the vehicle hornhonks twice. In this case, the engine or ig-nition must be switched off by means of theStart/Stop button.

Seite 63

Opening and closing CONTROLS


With Comfort Access: convenientclosing

Safety information

Warning

With convenient closing, body parts canbe jammed. There is a risk of injury. Makesure that the area of movement of thedoors is clear during convenient closing.

Closing

Press and hold the button on the ve-hicle key in the area close to the ve-hicle.

The windows and the glass sunroof areclosed, as long as the button on the vehiclekey is pressed.

The exterior mirrors are folded in.

Switch on interior lights andcourtesy light

Press the button on the vehicle keywith the vehicle locked.

The MINI logo projection is also switchedon.

These functions are not available if the inte-rior lights were switched off manually.

The light functions may depend on the am-bient brightness.

After locking, wait 10 seconds before press-ing the button again.

Tailgate

General informationTo avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi-cle, do not place the remote control in thecargo area.

Depending on the vehicle equipment andcountry version, it is possible to specifywhether the tailgate can be unlocked withthe vehicle key and how the vehicle doorswill respond to this. To perform settings, re-fer to page 74.

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operatingthe tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Makesure that the area of movement of the tail-gate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

The tailgate swings back and up when itopens. There is a risk of damage to prop-erty. Make sure that the area of movementof the tailgate is clear during opening andclosing.

NOTICE

Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit thewindows and heat conductors while driv-ing. There is a risk of damage to property.Cover the edges and ensure that pointedobjects do not hit the windows.

Opening

Press and hold the button on the ve-hicle key for approx. 1 second.

The tailgate is unlocked and can be swungupward.


Seite 64



– Press the button on the vehiclekey and hold for at least 3 sec-onds.

– Briefly press the button on the vehiclekey three times in succession.


Replacing the battery1. Remove the integrated key from the ve-

hicle key, refer to page 67.

2. Slide the integrated key into the open-ing and raise the cover.

The battery compartment is accessible.

3. Slide the integrated key in the cover ofthe battery compartment and raise thecover.

4. Push battery in the direction of the ar-row using a pointed object and lift itout.

5. Insert a type CR 2032 battery with thepositive side facing up.

6. Insert lid and cover.

7. Push the integrated key into the vehiclekey until it engages.

Have old batteries disposed of by adealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repair

shop or take them to a collection point.

Additional vehicle keysAdditional vehicle keys are available from aservice center or another qualified servicecenter or repair shop.

Loss of vehicle keysA lost vehicle key can be blocked and re-placed by a dealer’s service center or an-other qualified service center or repairshop.

Malfunction

General informationA Check Control message is displayed.

Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle maymalfunction under the following circum-stances:

Seite 65



– The battery of the vehicle key is dis-charged. For replacing the battery, referto page 65.

– Interference of the radio connectionfrom transmission towers or otherequipment with high transmittingpower.

– Shielding of the vehicle key due to metalobjects.

Do not transport the vehicle key to-gether with metal objects.

– Interference of the radio connectionfrom mobile phones or other electronicdevices in direct proximity to the vehi-cle key.

Do not transport the vehicle key to-gether with electronic devices.

– Interference of radio transmission by acharging process of mobile devices, forinstance charging of a mobile phone.

– The vehicle key is in direct proximity ofthe wireless charging tray.

Place the vehicle key in a different loca-tion.

In the case of interference, the vehicle canbe unlocked and locked from the outsidewith the integrated key, refer to page 66.

Starting the engine via emergencydetection of the Vehicle key

It is not possible to start the engine if thevehicle key has not been detected.

Proceed as follows in this case:

1. Hold the vehicle key against the markon the steering column as shown. Payattention to the display in the instru-ment cluster.

2. If the vehicle key is detected:

Start the engine within 10 seconds.

If the vehicle key is not recognized, slightlychange the position of the vehicle key andrepeat the procedure.

Frequently Asked QuestionsWhat precautions can be taken to be able toopen a vehicle with an accidentally lockedin vehicle key?

– The options provided by the RemoteServices of the MINI Connected app in-clude the ability to lock and unlock a ve-hicle.

This requires an active MINI Connectedcontract and the MINI Connected appmust be installed on a smartphone.

– Unlocking the vehicle can be requestedvia the MINI Connected Call Center.

An active MINI Connected contract isrequired.

Integrated key

General informationThe driver's door can be locked and un-locked without the vehicle key using theintegrated key.

Safety information

Warning

Unlocking from the inside is only possiblewith special knowledge.

Seite 66



Persons who spend a lengthy time in thevehicle while being exposed to extremetemperatures are at risk of injury or death.Do not lock the vehicle from the outsidewhen there are people in it.

NOTICE

The door lock is permanently joined withthe door. The door handle can be moved.When pulling the door handle with theintegrated key inserted, paint or theintegrated key can be damaged. There is arisk of damage to property. Remove theintegrated key before pulling the outsidedoor handle.

Removing

Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out theintegrated key, arrow 2.

Locking/unlocking via the doorlock1. Remove lid on the door lock.

To do this, slide the integrated key intothe opening from below and remove thelid.

2. Unlock or lock the door lock using theintegrated key.

The other doors must be unlocked or lockedfrom the inside.

Alarm systemThe alarm system is not switched on if thevehicle is locked with the integrated key.

The alarm system is triggered when thedoor is opened, if the vehicle has been un-locked via the door lock.

Buttons for the central lockingsystem

General informationIn the event of a severe accident, the vehi-cle is automatically unlocked. The hazardwarning system and interior lights come on.

Seite 67



Overview

Buttons for the central locking system.

LockingPress the button with the frontdoors closed.

– The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.

– The vehicle is not secured against theftwhen locking.

UnlockingPress the button.

Opening

– Press button to unlock the doorstogether, and then pull the door handleabove the armrest.

– Front doors: pull the door handle on thedoor to open the door. The other doorsremain locked.

– Back doors: pull twice on the door han-dle on the door to be opened; the firsttime unlocks the door, the second timeopens it. The other doors remain locked.

Comfort Access

ConceptThe vehicle can be accessed without operat-ing the vehicle key.

Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., inyour pants pocket, is sufficient.

The vehicle automatically detects the vehi-cle key when it is in close proximity or inthe car's interior.

General informationComfort Access supports the followingfunctions:

– Unlocking and locking the vehicle.

– Convenient closing.

– Open the tailgate.

Functional requirements– To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must

be outside of the vehicle near the doors.

– The next unlocking and locking cycle isnot possible until after approx. 2 sec-onds.

Unlocking

On the driver's or front passenger's outerdoor handle, press the button.

Depending on the settings, refer topage 74, only the driver's door and thefuel filler flap may be unlocked. Unlikewhen unlocking using the vehicle key,

Seite 68



pressing the button on the outer door han-dle again does not unlock the other vehicleaccess points. Rather, the vehicle is lockedagain.

If the vehicle was locked automatically afterdriving off or with the button of the centrallocking system from the inside, note the fol-lowing: if a door on a locked vehicle isopened from the inside with the dooropener, pressing the button on the outerdoor handle will first lock the vehicle again.To unlock, the button on the outer door han-dle must be pressed again.

Locking

On the driver's or front passenger's outerdoor handle, press the button.

Convenient closing

Safety information

Warning

With convenient closing, body parts canbe jammed. There is a risk of injury. Makesure that the area of movement of thedoors is clear during convenient closing.

Closing

Press and hold down the button on the driv-er's or front passenger's outer door handle.

In addition to locking, the windows andglass sunroof will be closed.

The exterior mirrors are folded in.

To open the tailgate

General informationIf the tailgate is opened via Comfort Access,locked doors are not unlocked.

To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi-cle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargoarea.

Safety information

Warning


NOTICE


Seite 69



NOTICE


Opening

Press button next on tailgate.


MalfunctionVehicle key recognition by the vehicle maymalfunction under the following circum-stances:

– The battery of the vehicle key is dis-charged. For replacing the battery, referto page 65.

– Interference of the radio connectionfrom transmission towers or otherequipment with high transmittingpower.

– Shielding of the vehicle key due to metalobjects.

Do not transport the vehicle key to-gether with metal objects.

– Interference of the radio connectionfrom mobile phones or other electronicdevices in direct proximity to the vehi-cle key.

Do not transport the vehicle key to-gether with electronic devices.

Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt thelocking request recognition function on thedoor handles.

In the case of a malfunction, unlock andlock the vehicle using the buttons of the ve-hicle key or use the integrated key, refer topage 66.

Tailgate

General informationTo avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi-cle, do not place the remote control in thecargo area.

Depending on the vehicle equipment andcountry version, it is possible to specifywhether the tailgate can be unlocked withthe vehicle key and how the vehicle doorswill respond to this. To perform settings, re-fer to page 74.

Safety information

Warning


NOTICE


Seite 70



NOTICE


Opening and closing

Opening from the outside

– Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.

With Comfort Access: unlock the vehi-cle or have the vehicle key with you.

Press button next on tailgate.

– Press and hold the button on thevehicle key for approx. 1 second.

Depending on the setting, the doors mayalso be unlocked. Unlocking with the ve-hicle key, refer to page 64.


Opening from the inside

With Steptronic transmission:

With the vehicle stationary, pressthe button in the driver's floor area.

If the vehicle is locked, selector lever posi-tion P must be engaged first.

With manual transmission:

With the vehicle stationary, press the but-ton in the driver's floor area twice in quicksuccession.

Closing

Recessed grips on the interior trim of thetailgate can be used to conveniently pulldown the tailgate.

Driver profiles

ConceptIn the driver profiles, individual settings forseveral drivers can be stored and called upagain when required.

General informationThere are three driver profiles with whichpersonal vehicle settings can be stored. Ev-ery vehicle key has been assigned one ofthese driver profiles.

If the vehicle is unlocked using the vehiclekey, the assigned personal driver profile willbe activated. All settings stored in thedriver profile are automatically applied.

If several drivers use their own vehiclekeys, the vehicle will apply the personal set-tings as it is being unlocked. These settingsare also restored, if the vehicle has beenused in the meantime by a person with adifferent vehicle key.

Seite 71



Changes to the settings are automaticallystored in the driver profile currently acti-vated.

If another driver profile is selected via theCentral Information Display (CID), the set-tings stored in it will be applied automati-cally. The new driver profile is assigned tothe vehicle key that is currently in use.

There is an additional guest profile availablethat is not assigned to any vehicle key: itcan be used to apply settings in the vehiclewithout changing the personal driver pro-files.

Functional requirementsFor the system to be able to identify thedriver profile associated to a particulardriver, the detected vehicle key must beclearly allocated to the driver.

This is the case when:

– The driver is only carrying his or herown vehicle key.

– The driver unlocks the vehicle.

– The driver gets into the vehicle throughthe driver's door.

AdjustingThe settings for the following systems andfunctions are stored in the active profile.The scope of storable settings depends oncountry and equipment.

– Unlocking and locking.

– Lights.

– Radio.

– Instrument cluster.

– Programmable memory buttons.

– Volumes, tone.

– Control Display.

– Climate control.

– Navigation.

– PDC Park Distance Control.

– Rearview camera.

– Head-up Display.

– MINI Driving Modes.

– Intelligent Safety.

Profile management

Selecting a driver profileRegardless of the vehicle key in use, a dif-ferent driver profile may be activated. Thisallows you to call up personal vehicle set-tings, even if you did not unlock the vehiclewith your own vehicle key.


1. "My MINI"

2. "Driver profiles"

3. Select driver profile.

4. "OK"

– All settings stored in the selected driverprofile are automatically applied.

– The called-up driver profile is assignedto the vehicle key being used at thetime.

– If the driver profile is already assignedto a different vehicle key, this driverprofile will apply to both vehicle keys.

Using a guest profileThe guest profile is for individual settingsthat are stored in none of the three personaldriver profiles.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Drive off (guest)"

4. "OK"

The guest profile cannot be renamed. It isassigned to the vehicle key that is not usedat the time.

Seite 72



Renaming a driver profileA personal name can be assigned to the ac-tive driver profile to avoid confusion be-tween the driver profiles.


1. "My MINI"



The driver profile marked with thissymbol can be renamed.

4. "Change driver profile name"

5. Enter profile name.


Resetting a driver profileThe settings of the driver profile currentlyin use are reset to their factory settings.


1. "My MINI"



The driver profile marked with thissymbol can be reset.

4. "Reset driver profile"

5. "OK"

Exporting driver profilesMost settings of the active driver profilecan be exported.

Exporting is helpful when storing and re-trieving personal settings, for instance be-fore delivering the vehicle to a workshop.The stored driver profiles can be taken intoanother vehicle.


1. "My MINI"



The driver profile marked with thissymbol can be exported.

4. "Export driver profile (USB)"

Select USB storage device as needed.

Importing driver profilesProfiles stored on a USB storage device canbe imported via the USB port.

The existing settings of the active driverprofile are overwritten with the settings ofthe imported driver profile.


1. "My MINI"


3. Select the driver profile to overwrite.

The driver profile marked with thissymbol can be overwritten.

4. "Import driver profile (USB)"

Select USB storage device as needed.

5. Select the driver profile to be imported.

Displaying driver profiles during startThe driver profiles can be displayed at eachstartup to select the desired profile.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Show driver profiles at startup"

System limitsA clear assignment between the vehicle keyand driver may not be possible in the fol-lowing cases, for example.

– The passenger unlocks the vehicle withhis or her own vehicle key, but anotherperson is driving.

– The driver unlocks the vehicle via Com-fort Access and has multiple vehiclekeys with him or her.

Seite 73



– The driver changes, but the vehicle isnot locked and unlocked.

– Multiple vehicle keys are located out-side of the vehicle.

Adjusting

General informationDepending on the package and country ver-sion, various settings are available for thevehicle key functions.

These settings are stored for the driver pro-file, refer to page 71, currently used.

Unlocking

DoorsVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Doors/Key"

4. "Driver's door" or "All doors"


– "Driver's door only"

Only the driver's door and the fuelfiller flap are unlocked. Pressingagain unlocks the entire vehicle.

– "All doors"

The entire vehicle is unlocked.

TailgateVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Doors/Key"

4.

The text next to the symbol indicatesthe current setting.


– "Tailgate"

Only the tailgate is unlocked.

– "Tailgate and door(s)"

The tailgate and the doors are un-locked.

– "Tailgate opens after unlocking"

The vehicle must be unlocked beforethe tailgate can be used with the ve-hicle key.

– "Button lock"

It is not possible to use the tailgatevia the vehicle key.

Depending on the vehicle equipment andcountry version, this setting may not be of-fered.

Automatic lockingVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Doors/Key"


– "Lock automatically"

The vehicle locks automatically aftera while if no door is opened after un-locking.

– "Lock after starting to drive"

The vehicle locks automatically afteryou drive off.

Automatic unlockingVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


Seite 74



3. "Doors/Key"

4. "Unlock at end of trip"

After the engine is switched off bypressing the Start/Stop button, thelocked vehicle is automatically un-locked.

Confirmation signals from thevehicleVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Doors/Key"

4. Deactivate or activate the desired con-firmation signals.

– "Flash for lock/unlock"

Unlocking is signaled by two flashes,locking by one.

– With alarm system:

"Acoustic signal for lock/unlock"

Unlocking is signaled by one honk ofthe horn.

Alarm system

General informationWhen the vehicle is locked, the vehiclealarm system reacts to the followingchanges:

– Unauthorized opening of a door, thehood or the tailgate.

– Movements in the car's interior.

– Changes in the vehicle tilt, for instance,during attempts at stealing a wheel orwhen towing the vehicle.

– Disconnected battery voltage.

– Improper use of the socket for OnboardDiagnosis.

– Locking the vehicle while a device isconnected to the socket for the OBD On-board-Diagnosis. For socket for the OBDOnboard Diagnosis, refer to page 282.

The alarm system signals these changes vis-ually and acoustically:

– Acoustic alarm:

Depending on local regulations, theacoustic alarm may be suppressed.

– Visual alarm:

By flashing of the hazard warning sys-tem and headlights, where required.

Do not modify the system to ensure func-tion of the alarm system.

Overview

Indicator light on the interior mirror.

Switching on/offThe alarm system is switched on or off assoon as the vehicle is locked with the vehi-cle key or unlocked or locked via ComfortAccess.

Opening the doors with the alarmsystem switched onThe alarm system is triggered when a dooris opened if the door was unlocked usingthe integrated key in the door lock.

Switching off the alarm, refer to page 77.

Seite 75



Opening the tailgate with the alarmsystem switched onThe tailgate can be opened even when thealarm system is switched on.

After the tailgate is closed, it is locked andmonitored again provided the doors arelocked. The hazard warning system flashesonce.


– Press the button on the vehiclekey and hold for at least 3 sec-onds.

– Briefly press the button on the vehiclekey three times in succession.


Signals of the indicator light– The indicator light flashes briefly every

2 seconds:

The alarm system is switched on.

– Indicator light flashes for approx.10 seconds, then it flashes briefly every2 seconds:

Interior motion sensor and tilt alarmsensor are not active, as doors, hood, ortailgate are not correctly closed. Cor-rectly closed access points are secured.

When the still open access points areclosed, the interior motion sensor andtilt alarm sensor will be switched on.

– The indicator light goes out after un-locking:

The vehicle has not been tampered with.

– The indicator light flashes after unlock-ing until the engine ignition is switchedon, but no longer than approx. 5 mi-nutes:

An alarm has been triggered.

Tilt alarm sensorThe tilt of the vehicle is monitored.

The alarm system responds in situationssuch as attempts to steal a wheel or whenthe vehicle is towed.

Interior motion sensorThe windows and the glass sunroof must beclosed for the system to function properly.

Avoiding unintentional alarms

General informationThe tilt alarm sensor and interior motionsensor can trigger an alarm, although no un-authorized action occurred.

Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:

– In automatic vehicle washes.

– In duplex garages.

– During transport on trains carrying ve-hicles, at sea or on a trailer.

– With animals in the vehicle.

– When the vehicle is locked after start offueling.

The tilt alarm sensor and the interior mo-tion sensor can be switched off in such sit-uations.

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor andinterior motion sensor

Press the button on the vehicle keywithin 10 seconds as soon as thevehicle is locked.

The indicator light lights up for approx.2 seconds and then continues to flash.

The tilt alarm sensor and interior motionsensor are switched off until the vehicle islocked again.

Seite 76



Switching off the alarm– Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key.

– Unlock the vehicle with the integratedkey and switch on the ignition using theemergency detection of the vehicle key,refer to page 65.

– With Comfort Access: if you have thevehicle key with you, unlock the vehicleusing the button on the driver's side orpassenger side door.

Power windows

General informationIf an accident of a certain severity occurs,the windows are automatically closed ex-cept a gap.

Safety information

Warning

When operating the windows, body partsand objects can be jammed. There is a riskof injury or risk of damage to property.Make sure that the area of movement ofthe windows is clear during opening andclosing.

Overview

On 3-door models

Power windows

On 5-door models

Power windows

Safety switch

Opening

– Press the switch to the resistancepoint.

The window opens while the switch isbeing held.

– Press the switch beyond the resist-ance point.

The window opens automatically. Press-ing the switch again stops the motion.

Convenient opening with the vehicle key,refer to page 63.

Closing

– Pull the switch to the resistancepoint.

The window closes while the switch isbeing held.

– Pull the switch beyond the resist-ance point.

Seite 77



The window closes automatically if thedoor is closed. Pulling the switch againstops the motion.

Convenient closing with the vehicle key, re-fer to page 64.

Closing via Comfort Access, refer topage 69.

Jam protection system

ConceptThe jam protection prevents objects or bodyparts becoming jammed between the doorframe and window while a window is beingclosed.

General informationIf resistance or a blockage is detected whilea window is being closed, the closing actionis interrupted.

The window opens slightly.

Safety information

Warning

Accessories on the windows such as an-tennas can impact jam protection. There isa risk of injury. Do not install accessoriesin the area of movement of the windows.

Closing without the jam protectionsystemIn case of danger from the outside or if icemight prevent normal closing, proceed asfollows:

1. Pull the switch past the resistancepoint and hold it there.

The window closes with limited jam pro-tection. If the closing force exceeds aspecific threshold, closing is inter-rupted.

2. Pull the switch past the resistancepoint again within approx. 4 secondsand hold it there.

The window closes without jam protec-tion.

On 5-door models: safety switch

General informationThe safety switch can be used to preventchildren, for instance from opening andclosing the rear windows using theswitches in the rear.

If an accident of a certain severity occurs,the safety function is switched off automati-cally.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED lights up if the safety func-tion is switched on.

Malfunction

General informationIn certain situations a window can only beoperated to a limited extent.

– After a power failure during the openingor closing process, the a window canonly be operated to a limited extent. Thesystem must be initialized in this case.

– The power window motors are equippedwith overheating protection. If a win-dow is opened and closed several timeswithin a short period of time, the over-heating protection switches the motoroff temporarily. Depending on the de-gree of overheating, it may only be pos-sible to close the window or it may notbe possible to operate it at all.

In this case: allow the power windowmotor to cool down.

Seite 78



Initializing the systemThe system can be initialized when the ve-hicle is stationary and the engine is run-ning.

During initialization, the affected windowcloses without jam protection.

Warning

When operating the windows, body partsand objects can be jammed. There is a riskof injury or risk of damage to property.Make sure that the area of movement ofthe windows is clear during opening andclosing.

1. Open the affected window completely.

2. Pull the switch to the resistancepoint and hold.

The window closes.

3. Continue holding the switch pulledto the resistance point.

The window opens and closes once ortwice after approx. 15 seconds, depend-ing on the vehicle's equipment.

4. Release switch.

Panoramic glass sunroof

General informationIn the event of a severe accident, the glasssunroof is automatically closed.

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operatingthe glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that the area of movement ofthe glass sunroof is clear during openingand closing.

Overview

Tilting the glass sunroofPress back the switch up to orbeyond the resistance pointand release it.

The glass sunroof is raised.

Opening glass sunroof

When the glass sunroof is closed

Press the switch back beyondthe resistance point and re-lease it twice.

The glass sunroof is opened.

Pressing the switch againstops the motion.

Seite 79



With the glass sunroof completelyraised

– Slide switch back to the re-sistance point and hold.

The glass sunroof isopened as long as theswitch is pressed.

– Press the switch back beyond the resist-ance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is opened.

Pressing the switch again stops the mo-tion.

Comfort positionIn some models, the wind noises in the car'sinterior are lowest when the glass sunroofis not fully open. In these models, the auto-matic function initially only opens the glasssunroof up to this comfort position.

Pressing the switch again opens the glasssunroof fully.

Closing glass sunroof

With the glass sunroof open– Slide switch forward to the

resistance point and hold.

The glass sunroof is closedas long as the switch ispressed and stops in theraised position.

– Press the switch forward beyond the re-sistance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is closed and stops inthe raised position.


– Press the switch forward beyond the re-sistance point and release it twice.

The glass sunroof is closed.


With the glass sunroof completelyraised

Press the switch forward be-yond the resistance point andrelease it.

The glass sunroof is closed.

Jam protection system

ConceptThe jam protection prevents objects or bodyparts from becoming jammed between theroof and glass sunroof while the glass sun-roof is closing.

General informationIf resistance or a blockage is detected whilethe glass sunroof is being closed, the clos-ing action is interrupted.

The glass sunroof opens slightly.

Closing without the jam protectionsystemIf there is an external danger, proceed asfollows:

1. Push the switch forward past the resist-ance point and hold it.

The glass sunroof closes with limitedjam protection. If the closing force ex-ceeds a specific threshold, closing is in-terrupted.

2. Push the switch forward again past theresistance point and hold until the glass

Seite 80



sunroof closes without jam protection.Make sure that the closing area is clear.

Initializing after a powerinterruptionAfter a power failure during the opening orclosing process, the glass sunroof can onlybe operated to a limited extent. The systemmust be initialized in this case. MINI rec-ommends having this work performed onlyby a dealer's service center or another quali-fied service center or repair shop.

Seite 81



Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel



Sitting safely

An ideal seating position that meets theneeds of the occupants can make a vitalcontribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.

In the event of an accident, the correct seat-ing position plays an important role. Followthe information in the following chapters:

– Seats, refer to page 82.

– Safety belts, refer to page 84.

– Head restraints, refer to page 86.

– Airbags, refer to page 150.

Front seats

Safety information

Warning

Seat adjustments while driving can lead tounexpected movements of the seat. Vehi-cle control could be lost. There is a risk ofaccident. Only adjust the seat on the driv-er's side when the vehicle is stationary.

Warning

With a backrest inclined too far to therear, the efficacy of the safety belt can nolonger be ensured. There is a risk of slid-ing under the safety belt in an accident.There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.Adjust the seat prior to starting the trip.Adjust the backrest so that it is in themost upright position as possible and donot adjust again while driving.

Warning

There is a risk of jamming when movingthe seats. There is a risk of injury or riskof damage to property. Make sure that thearea of movement of the seat is clear priorto any adjustment.

Adjusting seats

Overview

1 Forward/backward

2 Thigh support

3 Height

4 Backrest tilt

Seite 82

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel


Forward/backward

Pull the lever and slide the seat in the de-sired direction.

After releasing the lever, move the seat for-ward or back slightly making sure it en-gages properly.

Height

Pull the lever up or press it down as often asneeded to reach the desired height.

Backrest tilt

Pull the lever, and apply your weight to thebackrest or lift it off, as necessary.

Lumbar supportThe curvature of the seat backrest can beadjusted in a way that it supports the lum-bar region of the spine. The lower back andthe spine are supported for upright posture.

Turn the wheel in order to increase or de-crease the curvature.

Thigh support

Pull the lever at the front of the seat and ad-just the thigh support.

In 3-door models: entering the rear

Safety information

Warning


Seite 83

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS


Warning

Unexpected movements of the rear seatbackrest while driving may occur if therear seat backrest is unlocked. Vehiclecontrol could be lost. There is a risk of in-jury. Fold back and lock the rear seat back-rests before driving.

Fold the seat backrest forward1. Pull lever up to the stop.

2. Fold the seat backrest forward.

3. Push the seat forward.

Original positionThe driver's seat features a mechanicalmemory function for forward/back andbackrest adjustment.

1. Push the seat back into the original po-sition.

2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.

If the backrest is folded back when the seatis not yet in the original position, the seatengages in the current position. In thiscase, manually adjust longitudinal direction,refer to page 83.

Front seat heating

Overview

Seat heating

Switching on

Press the button once for each tem-perature level.

The maximum temperature is reached whenthree LEDs are lit.

If the trip is continued within approx.15 minutes after a stop, seat heating is acti-vated automatically with the temperatureselected last.

When GREEN Mode is activated, refer topage 237, the heating output is reduced.

Switching off

Press and hold the button until theLEDs go out.

Safety belts

Number of safety belts and safetybelt bucklesThe vehicle is fitted with four or five safetybelts to ensure occupants' safety. However,they can only offer protection when ad-justed correctly.

Seite 84



The two outer safety belt buckles of the rearseat are intended for the persons sitting onthe left and right.

The center safety belt buckle of the rearseat is intended for the person sitting in themiddle.

General informationAlways make sure that safety belts are be-ing worn by all occupants before driving off.Although airbags enhance safety by provid-ing added protection, they are not a substi-tute for safety belts.

If needed, disengage the safety belt in therear from the belt buckle on the side.

The upper shoulder strap's anchorage pointwill be correct for adult seat occupants ofevery build if the seat is correctly adjusted.

Safety information

Warning

Use of a safety belt to buckle more thanone person will potentially defeat the abil-ity of the safety belt to serve its protectivefunction. There is a risk of injuries or dan-ger to life. Do not allow more than one per-son to wear a single safety belt. Infantsand children are not allowed on an occu-pant's lap, but must be transported and se-cured in designated child restraint sys-tems.

Warning

The efficacy of safety gear, includingsafety belts, can be limited or lost whensafety belts are fastened incorrectly. Anincorrectly fastened safety belt can causeadditional injuries, for instance in theevent of an accident, braking or evasivemaneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or

danger to life. Make sure that all occu-pants are wearing safety belts correctly.

Warning

With a rear backrest that is not locked, theprotective function of the middle safetybelt is not guaranteed. There is a risk ofinjuries or danger to life. If you are usingthe middle safety belt, lock the wider rearseat backrest.

Warning

The efficacy of safety gear, includingsafety belts, may not be fully functional orfail in the following situations:

– The safety belts or safety belt bucklesare damaged, soiled, or changed inany other way.

– Belt tensioners or belt retractorswere modified.

Safety belts can be imperceptibly damagedin the event of an accident. There is a riskof injuries or danger to life. Do not modifysafety belts, safety belt buckles, belt ten-sioners, belt retractors or belt anchors andkeep them clean. Have the safety beltschecked after an accident at the dealer’sservice center or another qualified servicecenter or repair shop.

Correct use of safety belts– Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight

to your body over your lap and should-ers.

– Wear the safety belt deep on your hipsover your lap. The safety belt may notpress on your stomach.

– Do not rub the safety belt against sharpedges, or guide it or jam it in acrosshard or fragile objects.

Seite 85



– Avoid thick clothing.

– Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up-ward around your upper body.

Buckling the safety belt1. Guide the safety belt slowly over

shoulder and hip to put it on.

2. Insert the tongue plate into the safetybelt buckle. The safety belt buckle mustengage audibly.

Unbuckling the safety belt1. Hold the safety belt firmly.

2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.

3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up mechanism.

Safety belt reminder for driver'sseat and front passenger seat

Display in the instrument cluster

The indicator light lights up and asignal sounds. Make sure that thesafety belts are positioned correctly.

The safety belt reminder can also be acti-vated if objects are placed on the front pas-senger seat.

Front head restraints

Safety information

Warning

A missing protective effect due to re-moved or not correctly adjusted head re-straints can cause injuries in the head andneck area. There is a risk of injury.

– Before driving, install the removedhead restraints on the occupied seats.

– Adjust the head restraint so its centersupports the back of the head at asclose to eye level as possible.

– Adjust the distance so that the headrestraint is as close as possible to theback of the head. Adjust the distancevia the backrest tilt as needed.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when movingthe head restraint. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that the area of movement isclear when moving the head restraint.

Warning

Objects on the head restraint reduce theprotective effect in the head and neckarea. There is a risk of injury.

– Do not use seat or head restraint cov-ers.

– Do not hang objects, for instanceclothes hangers, directly on the headrestraint.

– Only use accessories that have beendetermined to be safe for attachmentto a head restraint.

– Do not use any accessories, for in-stance pillows, while driving.

Seite 86



Adjusting the height: John CooperWorks sport seatThe height of the head restraints cannot beset.

Adjusting the height



After setting the height, make sure that thehead restraint engages correctly.

Removing: John Cooper Workssport seatThe head restraints cannot be removed.

RemovingOnly remove the head restraint if no onewill be sitting in the seat in question.

1. If necessary, fold the rear seat backrestforward.

2. Pull head restraint up as far as possible.

3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull thehead restraint out completely.

InstallingProceed in the reverse order to install thehead restraint.

Rear head restraints

Safety information

Warning

A missing protective effect due to re-moved or not correctly adjusted head re-straints can cause injuries in the head andneck area. There is a risk of injury.

– Before driving, install the removedhead restraints on the occupied seats.

– Adjust the head restraint so its centersupports the back of the head at asclose to eye level as possible.

– Adjust the distance so that the headrestraint is as close as possible to theback of the head. Adjust the distancevia the backrest tilt as needed.

Warning


Warning

Objects on the head restraint reduce theprotective effect in the head and neckarea. There is a risk of injury.

– Do not use seat or head restraint cov-ers.

Seite 87



– Do not hang objects, for instanceclothes hangers, directly on the headrestraint.

– Only use accessories that have beendetermined to be safe for attachmentto a head restraint.

– Do not use any accessories, for in-stance pillows, while driving.




After setting the height, make sure that thehead restraint engages correctly.

Fold down

– To fold down: press the button, arrow 1,and press down the head restraint, ar-row 2.

– Forward: fold the head restraint towardthe front as far as it will go. Make sure

that the head restraint engages cor-rectly.

RemovingOnly remove the head restraint if no onewill be sitting in the seat in question.

1. Fold down the rear seat backrest, referto page 226, in question.

2. Pull head restraint up against the resist-ance.

3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull thehead restraint out completely.

InstallingProceed in the reverse order to install thehead restraint.

Mirrors

Exterior mirrors

General informationThe mirror on the front passenger side ismore curved than the driver's side mirror.

Seite 88



Safety information

Warning

Objects reflected in the mirror are closerthan they appear. The distance to the traf-fic behind could be incorrectly estimated,for instance while changing lanes. There isa risk of accident. Estimate the distance tothe traffic behind by looking over yourshoulder.

Overview

1 Adjusting

2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Mon-itor

3 Folding in and out

Selecting a mirror

To change over to the other mirror:

Slide the switch.

Adjusting electrically

Press the button.

The mirror movement follows thebutton movement.

MalfunctionIn case of an electrical malfunction, adjustthe mirror by pressing the edges of the mir-ror glass.

Folding in and out

NOTICE

Depending on the vehicle width, the vehi-cle can be damaged in vehicle washes.There is a risk of damage to property. Be-fore washing, fold in the mirrors by handor with the button.

Press the button.

Folding is only possible up to a speed of ap-prox. 15 mph/20 km/h.

Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful inthe following situations:

– In vehicle washes.

– On narrow roads.

Mirrors that were folded in are folded outautomatically at a speed of approx.25 mph/40 km/h.

Automatic heatingBoth exterior mirrors are automaticallyheated as needed and when the ignition isswitched on.

Automatic dimming featureThe exterior mirror on the driver's side isautomatically dimmed. Photocells in thecar's interior mirror, refer to page 90, areused to control this.

Automatic Curb Monitor, exteriormirror

ConceptIf reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glasson the front passenger side is tilted down-ward. This improves your view of the curband other formatting issue - low-lying ob-stacles when parking, for instance.

Seite 89



Activating

1. slide the switch to the driver'sside mirror position.

2. Engage selector lever position R.

DeactivatingSlide the switch to the passenger's side mir-ror position.

Interior mirror, manually dimmable

Flip lever

To reduce the blinding effect of the interiormirror, flip the lever forward.

Turn knob

Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effectby the interior mirror.

Interior mirror, automatic dimmingfeature

Overview

Photocells are used for control:

– In the mirror glass.

– On the back of the mirror.

Functional requirements– Keep the photocells clean.

– Do not cover the area between the inte-rior mirror and the windshield.

Steering wheel

Safety information

Warning

Steering wheel adjustments while drivingcan lead to unexpected steering wheelmovements. Vehicle control could be lost.There is a risk of accident. Adjustng thesteering wheel while the vehicle is sta-tionary only.

Seite 90



Adjusting

1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the prefer-red height and angle to suit your seatingposition.

3. Fold the lever back up.

Seite 91



Transporting children safely



The right place for children

Safety information

Warning








Warning

A heated vehicle may result in death topersons, especially children, or animals.There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.Do not leave persons, especially children,or animals unattended in the vehicle.

Warning

Exposure to intense sunlight can causechild restraint systems and their compo-nents to become very hot. Persons maysustain burn injuries when touching thehot components. There is a risk of injury.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight or cover where necessary.If necessary, let the child restraint systemcool down before transporting a child. Donot leave children unattended in the vehi-cle.

Always transport children in therear seat

General informationAccident research shows that the safestplace for children is in the rear seat.

Transport children younger than 13 years ofage or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in therear seat in suitable child restraint systemsdesigned for the age, weight and size of thechild. Children 13 years of age or older mustwear a safety belt as soon as a suitable childrestraint system can no longer be used dueto their age, weight, or size.

Seite 92

CONTROLS Transporting children safely


Safety information

Warning

The safety belt cannot be fastened cor-rectly on children shorter than 5 ft,150 cm without suitable additional childrestraint systems. The efficacy of safetygear, including safety belts, can be limitedor lost when safety belts are fastened in-correctly. An incorrectly fastened safetybelt can cause additional injuries, for in-stance in the event of an accident, brakingor evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of in-juries or danger to life. Secure childrenshorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suitablechild restraint systems.

Children on the front passengerseat

General informationBefore using a child restraint system on thefront passenger seat, ensure that the front,knee, and side airbags on the front passen-ger side are deactivated. For automatic de-activation of front-seat passenger airbags,refer to page 152.

Safety information

Warning

Active front-seat passenger airbags can in-jure a child in a child restraint systemwhen the airbags are activated. There is arisk of injury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger airbags are deactivated andthat the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica-tor light lights up.

Warning

The stability of the child restraint systemis limited or compromised with incorrectseat adjustment or improper installation ofthe child seat. There is a risk of injuries ordanger to life. Make sure that the child re-straint system fits securely against thebackrest. If possible, adjust the backresttilt for all affected backrests and correctlyadjust the seats. Make sure that seats andbackrests are securely engaged or locked.If possible, adjust the height of the headrestraints or remove them.

Installing child restraint sys-tems

General informationPay attention to the specifications of thechild restraint system manufacturer whenselecting, installing, and using child re-straint systems.

In order to facilitate the installation of aback-facing child restraint system in therear:

Move the front passenger seat as far up aspossible before folding down the backrest.

Safety information

Warning

The protective effect of child restraint sys-tems and their fastening systems whichhave been damaged or exposed to an acci-dent can be limited or lost. A child cannotbe properly restrained in the event of anaccident, braking or evasive maneuvers.There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.

Seite 93

Transporting children safely CONTROLS


Do not use child restraint systems whichhave been damaged or exposed to an acci-dent.

If a child restraint system and its fasten-ing system has been damaged or exposedto an accident, have these systemschecked and replaced by the dealer's serv-ice center or another qualified service cen-ter or repair shop.

Warning

The stability of the child restraint systemis limited or compromised with incorrectseat adjustment or improper installation ofthe child seat. There is a risk of injuries ordanger to life. Make sure that the child re-straint system fits securely against thebackrest. If possible, adjust the backresttilt for all affected backrests and correctlyadjust the seats. Make sure that seats andbackrests are securely engaged or locked.If possible, adjust the height of the headrestraints or remove them.

On the rear seatsIn order to facilitate the installation of aback-facing child restraint system:

Move the front passenger seat as far up aspossible before folding down the backrest.

On the front passenger seat

Deactivating airbags

Warning

Active front-seat passenger airbags can in-jure a child in a child restraint systemwhen the airbags are activated. There is arisk of injury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger airbags are deactivated and

that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica-tor light lights up.

Before installing a child restraint system inthe front passenger seat, make sure that thefront, knee and side airbags on the frontpassenger side are deactivated.

Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbagsautomatically, refer to page 152.

Seat position and heightBefore installing a child restraint system,move the front passenger seat as far back aspossible and adjust its height to the highestand thus best possible position for the beltand to offer optimal protection in the eventof an accident.

If the upper anchorage of the safety belt islocated in front of the belt guide of the childseat, move the front passenger seat care-fully forward until the best possible beltguide position is reached.

Child seat security

The rear safety belts and the front passen-ger safety belt can be permanently locked tofasten child restraint systems.

John Cooper Works GP:

Seite 94



The front passenger safety belt can be per-manently locked to fasten child restraintsystems.

Locking the safety belt1. Pull out the belt strap completely.

2. Secure the child restraint system withthe safety belt.

3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in andpull it tight against the child restraintsystem. The safety belt is locked.

Unlocking the safety belt1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle.

2. Remove the child restraint system.

3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com-pletely.

LATCH child restraint fixingsystem

General informationLATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil-dren.

Pay attention to the operating and safety in-formation from the child restraint systemmanufacturer when installing and usingLATCH child restraint fixing systems.

Mounts for the lower LATCHanchorsThe lower anchors may be used to attachthe CRS to the vehicle seat up to a com-bined child and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kgwhen the child is restrained by the internalharnesses.

Safety information

Warning

If the LATCH child restraint fixing sys-tems are not correctly engaged, the protec-tive effect of the LATCH child restraintfixing system can be limited. There is arisk of injuries or danger to life. Make surethat the lower anchors are securely en-gaged and that the LATCH child restraintfixing system fits securely against thebackrest.

Position

Symbol Meaning

The corresponding symbolshows the mounts for thelower LATCH anchors.

Seats equipped with loweranchors are marked with apair, (2), of LATCH symbols.

For vehicles equipped witha middle seat:

It is not recommended touse the inner lower anchorsof standard outer LATCHpositions to fasten a childrestraint system on themiddle seat. Use the vehiclesafety belt instead for themiddle seat.

Seite 95



Before installing LATCH childrestraint fixing systemsPull the safety belt away from the area ofthe child restraint system.

Assembly of LATCH child restraintfixing systems1. Install child restraint system, see manu-

facturer's information.

2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors areproperly engaged.

Child restraint systems with tetherstrap

Safety information

Warning

If the upper retaining strap is incorrectlyused for the child restraint system, theprotective effect can be reduced. There isa risk of injury. Make sure that the upperretaining strap does not run over sharpedges and is not twisted as it passes theupper anchor.

Warning

If the rear backrest is not locked, the pro-tective effect of the child restraint systemis limited or there is none. In certain situa-tions, for instance braking maneuvers orin case of an accident, the rear backrestcan fold forward. There is a risk of injuriesor danger to life. Make sure that the rearbackrests are locked.

NOTICE

The anchors for the upper retaining strapsof child restraint systems are only pro-vided for these retaining straps. Whenother objects are mounted, the anchorscan be damaged. There is a risk of damageto property. Only mount child restraintsystems to the upper anchors.

Anchors

The respective symbol shows the an-chor for the upper retaining strap.Seats with an upper top tether are

marked with this symbol. It can be found onthe rear seat backrest or the rear windowshelf.


The anchor for the upper retainingstrap is marked with a top tethersymbol. It is located in the cargo

area on the passenger's side below the tail-gate.

Routing the retaining strap

1 Direction of travel

2 Head restraint

3 Hook for upper retaining strap

4 Anchor

5 Seat backrest

6 Upper retaining strap

Seite 96



Attaching the upper retaining strap tothe anchor1. Raise the head restraint, if needed.

2. On the rear seat: Guide the upper retain-ing strap between or along both sides ofthe supports of the head restraint to theanchor.

3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap tothe anchor on the rear seat.

4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling itdown.

John Cooper Works GP: guiding theretaining strap

1 Direction of travel

2 Head restraint

3 Hook for upper retaining strap

4 Anchor

5 Cargo floor panel

6 Seat backrest

7 Upper retaining strap

John Cooper Works GP: attaching theupper retaining strap to the anchor1. Guide the upper retaining strap cen-

tered over the head restraint.

2. Attach the upper retaining strap withthe hook at the anchor in the trunk.

3. Pull the retaining strap taut.

ON 5-door models: Lockingthe doors and windows

Doors

Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.

The door can now be opened from the out-side only.

Safety switch for the rearPress the button on the driver'sdoor if children are being trans-ported in the rear.

This locks various functions so that theycannot be operated from the rear: safetyswitch, refer to page 78.

Seite 97



Driving



Start/Stop button

ConceptPressing the Start/Stop buttonswitches the ignition on or offand starts the engine.

Steptronic transmission: theengine starts in selector lever

position P or N with the brake pedal pressedwhen you press the Start/Stop button.

Manual transmission: the engine starts withthe clutch pedal pressed when the Start/Stop button is pressed.

Ignition onManual transmission: press the Start/Stopbutton without stepping on the clutchpedal.

Steptronic transmission: press the Start/Stop button, but do not press on the brakepedal at the same time.

All vehicle systems are ready for operation.

Most of the indicator/warning lights in theinstrument cluster light up for a variedlength of time.

To save battery power when the engine isoff, switch off the ignition and any unneces-sary electronic systems/power consumers.

Ignition offManual transmission: press the Start/Stopbutton again without stepping on the clutchpedal.

Steptronic transmission: shift to selectorlever position P, press the Start/Stop buttonagain without stepping on the brake.

All indicator lights in the instrument clustergo out.

To save battery power when the engine isoff, switch off the ignition and any unneces-sary electronic systems/power consumers.

Safety measuresThe ignition is switched off automatically inthe following situations while the vehicle isstationary and the engine is off:

– When locking the vehicle, even if thelow beams are switched on.

– Shortly before the battery is dischargedcompletely, so that the engine can stillbe started. This function is only availa-ble when the low beams are switchedoff.

– When opening or closing the driverdoor, if the driver's safety belt is un-buckled and the low beams are switchedoff.

– While the driver's safety belt is unbuck-led with driver's door open and lowbeams off.

– When the front doors are opened ifthere is no other person sitting in thefront seats.

Seite 98

CONTROLS Driving


– The low beams switch to parking lightsafter some minutes of no use.

Steptronic transmission with a tap-operatedselector lever, refer to page 114: whenswitching off the ignition, the selector leverposition P is engaged automatically if theselector lever position R, D or M/S is en-gaged.

Radio-ready state

General informationIn the radio-ready state, certain power con-sumers remain ready for operation.

ActivatingWith the engine running, press the Start/Stop button.

If the engine is not running and the ignitionis switched on: the system automatically ac-tivates radio-ready state when the door isopened if the lights are switched off or thedaytime running lights are switched on.

Radio-ready state remains active if, for in-stance the ignition is automaticallyswitched off for the following reasons:

– Opening or closing the driver's door.

– Unfastening of the driver's safety belt.

– When automatically switching from lowbeams to parking lights.

Switching off automaticallyThe radio-ready state is switched off auto-matically in the following situations:

– If the driver's or front passenger door isopened when exiting the vehicle, withthe engine switched off manually.

– If the ignition is switched off manuallywith the Start/Stop button.

– After approx. 8 minutes.

– When the vehicle is locked using thecentral locking system.

– Shortly before the battery is dischargedcompletely, so that the engine can stillbe started.

Starting the engine

Safety information

DANGER

If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila-tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gasescan enter into the vehicle. The exhaustgases contain pollutants which are color-less and odorless. In enclosed areas, ex-haust gases can also accumulate outside ofthe vehicle. There is danger to life. Keepthe exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficientventilation.

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to moveand possibly roll away. There is a risk ofaccident. Before exiting, secure the vehi-cle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-cured against rolling away, follow the fol-lowing:

– Set the parking brake.

– On uphill grades or on a downhillslope, turn the front wheels in the di-rection of the curb.

– On uphill grades or on a downhillslope, also secure the vehicle, for in-stance with a wheel chock.

NOTICE

In the case of repeated starting attemptsor repeated starting in quick succession,the fuel is not burned or is inadequatelyburned. The catalytic converter can over-

Seite 99

Driving CONTROLS


heat. There is a risk of damage to property.Avoid repeated starting in quick succes-sion.

Gasoline engineDepending on the motorization, the fulldrive power may not be available for ap-proximately 30 seconds after starting theengine. In this case, the vehicle will not ac-celerate as usual.


Starting the engine1. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Engage selector lever position P or N.


The ignition is activated automatically for abrief time and is stopped as soon as the en-gine starts.

Manual transmission

Starting the engine1. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift toneutral.


The ignition is activated automatically for abrief time and is stopped as soon as the en-gine starts.

Engine stop

Safety information

Warning








Warning






Seite 100

CONTROLS Driving



Switching off the engine1. When the vehicle is stationary, apply

the parking brake.



The engine is switched off.

The radio-ready state is switched on.

Manual transmission

Switching off the engine1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press

the Start/Stop button.

The engine is switched off.

The radio-ready state is switched on.



Auto Start/Stop function

ConceptThe Auto Start/Stop function helps savefuel. The system switches off the engineduring a stop, for instance in traffic conges-tion or at traffic lights. The ignition remainsswitched on. The engine starts automati-cally for driving off.

After each engine start using the Start/Stopbutton, the Auto Start/Stop function isready and is activated at speeds faster thanabout 3 mph/5 km/h.

Depending on the selected driving mode, re-fer to page 176, the system is automaticallyactivated or deactivated.

Engine stop

Functional requirementsThe engine is switched off automaticallyduring a stop under the following condi-tions:

Manual transmission:

– Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedalis not pressed.

– The driver's safety belt is buckled or thedriver's door is closed.

Steptronic transmission:

– The selector lever is in selector lever po-sition D.

– The brake pedal remains depressedwhile the vehicle is stopped.

– The driver's safety belt is buckled or thedriver's door is closed.

In order to be able to release the brakepedal, engage the selector lever in positionP. The engine remains off.

To continue driving depress the brakepedal. When a gear is engaged, the enginestarts automatically.

The air flow from the air conditioner is re-duced when the engine is switched off.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Instrument cluster without enhancedfeatures: display

The display indicates that theAuto Start/Stop function isready for an Automatic enginestart.

The display indicates that theconditions for an automaticengine stop have not beenmet.

Seite 101

Driving CONTROLS


Instrument cluster with enhancedfeatures: display

The display indicates that theAuto Start/Stop function isready for an Automatic enginestart.

The display indicates that theconditions for an automaticengine stop have not beenmet.

Functional limitationsThe engine is not switched off automaticallyin the following situations:

– External temperature too low.

– The external temperature is high and au-tomatic climate control is running.

– The car's interior has not yet beenheated or cooled to the required level.

– The engine is not yet at operating tem-perature.

– The wheels are at a sharp angle or thesteering wheel is being turned.

– After driving in reverse.

– Fogging of the windows when the auto-matic climate control is switched on.

– The vehicle battery charge is very low.

– At higher elevations.

– The hood is unlocked.

– The parking assistant is activated.

– Stop-and-go traffic.

– Selector lever in selector lever positionR, N or M/S.

Starting the engineThe engine starts automatically under thefollowing conditions:

– Manual transmission: clutch pedal ispressed.

– Steptronic transmission: by releasingthe brake pedal.

After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.

Safety modeAfter the engine switches off automatically,it will not start again automatically if anyone of the following conditions are met:

– The driver's safety belt is unbuckled andthe driver's door is open.

– The hood was unlocked.

Some indicator lights light up for a variedlength of time.

The engine can only be started via theStart/Stop button.

Functional limitationsEven if driving off was not intended, the de-activated engine starts up automatically inthe following situations:

– Excessive warming of the car's interiorwhen the air conditioning is switchedon.

– When the steering wheel is turned.

– Steptronic transmission: change fromselector lever position D to R, N or M/S.

– Steptronic transmission: change fromselector lever position P to R, N, D orM/S.

– The vehicle begins rolling.

– Fogging of the windows when the auto-matic climate control is switched on.

– The vehicle battery charge is very low.

– Excessive cooling of the car's interiorwhen the heating is switched on.

– Manual transmission: low brake vacuumpressure; this can occur, for instance ifthe brake pedal is depressed a numberof times in succession.

Seite 102

CONTROLS Driving


Additional Auto Start/StopfunctionDepending on the vehicle equipment andcountry-specific version, the vehicle fea-tures a variety of sensors for assessing thetraffic situation. The Auto Start/Stop func-tion uses this information to adapt to vari-ous traffic situations in a proactive manner.

For instance, this applies to the followingsituations:

– When a situation is detected in whichthe stopping time is expected to be veryshort, the engine is not switched off au-tomatically. A message appears on theControl Display, depending on the situa-tion.

– When a situation is detected in whichthe vehicle needs to drive off immedi-ately, the engine is started automati-cally.

The function may be restricted if the navi-gation data is invalid, outdated or not avail-able, for example.

Switching the system on/off

Using the button

Press the button.

– LED comes on: auto Start/Stop functionis deactivated.

The engine is started during an auto-matic engine stop.

The engine can only be stopped orstarted via the Start/Stop button.

– LED goes out: auto Start/Stop functionis activated.

Switching off the vehicle during anautomatic engine stopDuring an automatic engine stop, the vehi-cle can be switched off permanently, for in-stance when leaving it.



2. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignitionis switched off. The Auto Start/Stopfunction is deactivated.



1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignitionis switched off. The Auto Start/Stopfunction is deactivated.



Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.

Automatic deactivationIn certain situations, the Auto Start/Stopfunction is deactivated automatically forsafety reasons, for instance if no driver isdetected.

MalfunctionThe Auto Start/Stop function no longerswitches off the engine automatically. ACheck Control message is displayed. It ispossible to continue driving. Have the sys-tem checked by a dealer's service center oranother qualified service center or repairshop.

Seite 103

Driving CONTROLS


Parking brake

Safety information

Warning






ApplyingThe lever automatically engages after beingpulled up.

The indicator light lights up red. Theparking brake is set.

Lower light: indicator light in Cana-dian models

If for once use during driving is required,engage the parking brake slightly and holdthe button down.

To prevent corrosion and one-sided brakeaction, lightly apply the parking brake peri-odically while coasting, if traffic conditionspermit.

The brake lights will not light up if the park-ing brake is set.

Releasing

Raise lever slightly, press the button andguide the lever down.

Turn signal, high beams, head-light flasher

Turn signal

Using turn signals

Press the lever past the resistance point.

Canada: the lever returns into its startingposition after actuation. To switch off man-ually, slightly tap the lever to the resistancepoint.

Triple turn signal activationLightly tap the lever up or down.

The triple turn signal duration can be ad-justed.

Seite 104

CONTROLS Driving



1. "My MINI"


3. "Lighting"

4. "Exterior lighting"

5. "One-touch turn signal"


Settings are stored for the profile currentlyused.

Signaling brieflyPress the lever to the resistance point andhold it there for as long as you want theturn signal to flash.

MalfunctionUnusually rapid flashing of the indicatorlight indicates that a turn signal bulb hasfailed.

High beams, headlight flasherPush the lever forward or pull it backward.

– High beams on, arrow 1.

The high beams light up when the lowbeams are switched on.

– High beams off/headlight flasher, ar-row 2.

Wiper system

General informationDo not use the wipers if the windshield isdry, as this may damage the wiper blades orcause them to become worn more quickly.

Safety information

Warning

If the wipers start moving in the foldedaway state, body parts can be jammed ordamage may occur to parts of the vehicle.There is a risk of injury or risk of damageto property. Make sure that the vehicle isswitched off when the wipers are in thefolded away state and the wipers arefolded in when switching on.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,the wiper blades can be torn off and thewiper motor can overheat when switchingon. There is a risk of damage to property.Defrost the windshield prior to switchingthe wipers on.

Switching on

Press the lever up until the desired positionis reached.

Seite 105

Driving CONTROLS


– Resting position of the wipers, posi-tion 0.

– Intermittent operation or rain sensor,position 1.

– Normal wiper speed, position 2.

– Fast wiper speed, position 3.

When travel is interrupted with the wipersystem switched on: when travel continues,the wipers resume at their previous speed.

Switching off and brief wipe


– Switching off: press the lever down untilit reaches its standard position.

– Brief wipe: press the lever down fromthe standard position.

The lever automatically returns to its in-itial position when released.

Interval mode or rain sensor

ConceptThe rain sensor automatically controls thetime between wipes depending on the in-tensity of the rainfall.

General informationThe sensor is located on the windshield, di-rectly in front of the interior mirror. With-out the rain sensor, the frequency of thewiper operation is preset.

Safety information

NOTICE

If the rain sensor is activated, the wiperscan accidentally start moving in vehiclewashes. There is a risk of damage to prop-erty. Deactivate the rain sensor in vehiclewashes.

Activating

Press the lever up once from its standardposition, arrow 1.

Wiping is started.

The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.

In frosty conditions, wiper operation maynot start.

DeactivatingPress the lever back into the standard posi-tion.

Seite 106

CONTROLS Driving


Setting the frequency or sensitivity ofthe rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel.

With deactivated rain sensor: set the inter-val.

With activated rain sensor: set the rain sen-sor sensitivity.

Up: short interval or high sensitivity of therain sensor.

Down: long interval or low sensitivity of therain sensor.

Windshield washer system

Safety information

Warning

The washer fluid can freeze onto the win-dow at low temperatures and obstruct theview. There is a risk of accident. Only usethe washer systems, if the washer fluidcannot freeze. Use washer fluid with anti-freeze, if needed.

NOTICE

When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,the wash pump cannot work as intended.There is a risk of damage to property. Donot use the washer system when thewasher fluid reservoir is empty.


Pull the lever.

The system sprays washer fluid on thewindshield and activates the wipers briefly.

Windshield washer nozzlesThe washer jets are automatically heatedwhenever the ignition is switched on.

Rear window wiper

Overview

Switching onTurn the outer switch upward.

– Resting position of the wiper, posi-tion 0.

– Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When re-verse gear is engaged, the systemswitches to continuous operation.

Clean the rear windowTurn the outer switch in the desired direc-tion.

Seite 107

Driving CONTROLS


– In resting position: turn the switchdownward, arrow 3. The switch auto-matically returns to its idle positionwhen released.

– In intermittent mode: turn the switchfurther, arrow 2. The switch automati-cally returns to its interval positionwhen released.

The function is deactivated if the washerfluid reservoir level is low.

Fold-away position of the wipers

ConceptThe fold-away position enables the wipersto be folded away from the windshield.

General informationHelpful when changing the wiper blades orunder frosty conditions, for instance.

Safety information

Warning


NOTICE


Folding away the wipers1. Switch the ignition on and off again.

2. Press and hold the wiper lever down, un-til the wipers stop in a close to verticalposition.

3. Fold the wipers all the way away fromthe windshield.

Folding down the wipersAfter the wipers are folded back down, thewiper system must be reactivated.

1. Fold the wipers back down onto thewindshield.

2. Switch on the ignition.

3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers returnto their resting position and are readyagain for operation.

Seite 108

CONTROLS Driving


Canada: wiper system

General informationDo not use the wipers if the windshield isdry, as this may damage the wiper blades orcause them to become worn more quickly.

Safety information

Warning


NOTICE


Switching on

Tap up the lever or press it past the resist-ance point.

– Normal wiper speed: tap up once.

– Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or taponce beyond the resistance point.

The lever automatically returns to its initialposition when released.

Switching off and brief wipe


– To switch off from fast wiper speed:press down twice.

– To switch off from normal wiper speed:press down once.

– Brief wipe: press down once.

The lever automatically returns to its initialposition when released.

Interval mode or rain sensor

ConceptThe rain sensor automatically controls thetime between wipes depending on the in-tensity of the rainfall.

General informationThe sensor is located on the windshield, di-rectly in front of the interior mirror. With-out the rain sensor, the frequency of thewiper operation is preset.

Seite 109

Driving CONTROLS


Safety information

NOTICE

If the rain sensor is activated, the wiperscan accidentally start moving in vehiclewashes. There is a risk of damage to prop-erty. Deactivate the rain sensor in vehiclewashes.


Press the button on the wiper lever.

Wiping is started.

If the vehicle is equipped with a rain sensor:the LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.

In frosty conditions, wiper operation maynot start.

If a journey is interrupted with the rain sen-sor switched on: if the trip is resumedwithin approx. 15 minutes, the rain sensoris automatically activated again.

Setting the frequency or sensitivity ofthe rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel.

With deactivated rain sensor: set the inter-val.

With activated rain sensor: set the rain sen-sor sensitivity.

Up: short interval or high sensitivity of therain sensor.

Down: long interval or low sensitivity of therain sensor.

Windshield washer system

Safety information

Warning

The washer fluid can freeze onto the win-dow at low temperatures and obstruct theview. There is a risk of accident. Only usethe washer systems, if the washer fluidcannot freeze. Use washer fluid with anti-freeze, if needed.

NOTICE

When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,the wash pump cannot work as intended.There is a risk of damage to property. Donot use the washer system when thewasher fluid reservoir is empty.

Seite 110

CONTROLS Driving



Pull the lever.

The system sprays washer fluid on thewindshield and activates the wipers briefly.

Windshield washer nozzlesThe washer jets are automatically heatedwhenever the ignition is switched on.

Rear window wiper

Overview

Switching onTurn the outer switch upward.

– Resting position of the wiper, posi-tion 0.

– Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When re-verse gear is engaged, the systemswitches to continuous operation.

Clean the rear windowTurn the outer switch in the desired direc-tion.

– In resting position: turn the switchdownward, arrow 3. The switch auto-matically returns to its idle positionwhen released.

– In intermittent mode: turn the switchfurther, arrow 2. The switch automati-cally returns to its interval positionwhen released.

The function is deactivated if the washerfluid reservoir level is low.

Fold-away position of the wipers

ConceptThe fold-away position enables the wipersto be folded away from the windshield.

General informationHelpful when changing the wiper blades orunder frosty conditions, for instance.

Safety information

Warning


NOTICE


Seite 111

Driving CONTROLS


Folding away the wipers1. Switch the ignition on and off again.

2. Press the wiper lever up past the pointof resistance and hold it for approx.3 seconds, until the wipers remain in anearly vertical position.

3. Fold the wipers all the way away fromthe windshield.

Folding down the wipersAfter the wipers are folded back down, thewiper system must be reactivated.

1. Fold the wipers back down onto thewindshield.


3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers returnto their resting position and are readyagain for operation.

Washer fluid

General informationAll washer nozzles are supplied from onereservoir.

Use a mixture of tap water and windshieldwasher concentrate. If desired, a windshieldwasher concentrate containing antifreezecan be used.

Recommended minimum fill quantity:0.2 US gal/1 liter.

Safety information

Warning

Some antifreeze agents can contain harm-ful substances and are flammable. There isa risk of fire and a risk of injury. Followthe instructions on the containers. Keepantifreeze away from ignition sources. Donot refill operating materials into differentbottles. Store operating materials out ofreach of children.

United States: the washer fluid mixture ra-tio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and manyindividual states; do not exceed the allow-able washer fluid dilution ratio limits thatapply. Follow the usage instructions on thewasher fluid container.

Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Con-centrate or the equivalent is recom-mended.

Warning

Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire oncontact with hot engine parts. There is arisk of injury or risk of damage to prop-erty. Only add washer fluid when the en-gine is cooled down. Next, fully close thelid of the washer fluid reservoir.

Seite 112

CONTROLS Driving


NOTICE

Silicon-containing additives in the washerfluid for the water-repelling effect on thewindows can lead to damage to the wash-ing system. There is a risk of damage toproperty. Do not add silicon-containing ad-ditives to the washer fluid.

NOTICE

Mixing different windshield washer con-centrates or antifreeze can damage thewashing system. There is a risk of damageto property. Do not mix different wind-shield washer concentrates or antifreeze.Follow the information and mixing ratiosprovided on the containers.

Overview

The washer fluid reservoir is located in theengine compartment.

MalfunctionThe use of undiluted windshield washerconcentrate or alcohol-based antifreeze canlead to incorrect readings at temperaturesbelow +5 ℉/-15 ℃.

Manual transmission

Safety information

Warning






NOTICE

When shifting to a lower gear, excessivespeeds can damage the engine. There is arisk of damage to property. When shiftinginto 5th or 6th gear, press the gearshiftlever to the right.

Schematic diagram

– 1–6: forward gears.

– R: reverse gear.

Seite 113

Driving CONTROLS


Shifting

General informationDepending on the engine installation, theengine speed during a shifting operation isadjusted automatically as required for har-monious and dynamic gear shifting.

Reverse gearSelect only when the vehicle is stationary.

To overcome the resistance push the gear-shift lever dynamically to the left and en-gage reverse gear with a forward shiftingmovement.

Rolling or pushing the vehicleIn some situations, the vehicle is to rollwithout its own power, for instance in a carwash, or be pushed.


2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift outof a forward gear or reverse.

3. Release the parking brake.


ConceptThe Steptronic transmission combines thefunctions of an automatic transmission withthe possibility of manual shifting, if needed.

Safety information

Warning






Selector lever version

General informationDepending on the vehicle equipment, atransmission with either a latching selectorlever or a tap-operated selector lever is in-stalled.

Transmission with a latching selectorlever

The selector lever positions P, R, N, and Dare selected by moving the selector leverinto the respective selector lever position.The selector lever engages in the selectorlever positions.

Seite 114

CONTROLS Driving


Transmission with a tap-operatedselector lever

The selector lever positions R, N, and D areselected by tapping the selector lever for-ward or back. The selector lever automati-cally returns to the center position when re-leased.

The selector lever position P is engaged bypressing the P button on the selector leveror, in certain situations, automatically, referto page 115.

Selector lever positions

Drive mode DSelector lever position for normal vehicleoperation. All gears for forward travel areactivated automatically.

R is reverseEngage selector lever position R only whenthe vehicle is stationary.

Neutral NThe vehicle may be pushed or roll withoutengine power in selector lever position N,for instance in vehicle washes, refer topage 117.

Parking position P

General information

Selector lever position, for instance forparking the vehicle.

The transmission blocks the drive wheels inselector lever position P.

Engage selector lever position P only whenthe vehicle is stationary.

Before exiting the vehicle, make sure thatselector lever position P is set. Otherwise,the vehicle may begin to move.

Automatic parking position for atransmission with a tap-operated selectorlever

Selector lever position P is engaged auto-matically in situations such as the follow-ing:

– After the engine is switched off whenthe vehicle is in the radio-ready state,refer to page 99, or when the ignition isswitched off, refer to page 98, while se-lector lever position R, D or M/S is en-gaged.

– If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled,the driver's door is opened, and thebrake pedal is not pressed while the ve-hicle is stationary and selector lever po-sition D, M/S or R is engaged.

– After the ignition has been switched offwhile selector lever position N is en-gaged.

Engaging selector lever positions:with a latching selector lever

General informationTo prevent the vehicle from creeping afteryou select a drive mode, maintain pressureon the brake pedal until you are ready tostart.

Functional requirementsThe selector lever can only be taken out ofselector lever position P if the ignition is onor the engine is running.

Seite 115

Driving CONTROLS


Engaging selector lever position D, N,R, or PWith the vehicle stationary, depress thebrake pedal before shifting out of selectorlever position P or N; otherwise, the shiftblock will not be deactivated and the shiftcommand will not be executed.

A selector lever lock prevents the followingfaulty operation:

– Unintentional shifting into selectorlever position P or R.

– Unintentional shifting from selectorlever position P into another selectorlever position.

1. To release the selector lever lock: withthe brake pedal depressed, press thebutton on the front of the selector lever.

2. Move the selector lever into the desiredposition.

Engaging selector lever positions:with a tap-operated selector lever

General informationTo prevent the vehicle from creeping afteryou select a drive mode, maintain pressureon the brake pedal until you are ready tostart.

Functional requirementsOnly when the brake pedal is depressed is itpossible to change from selector lever posi-tion P to another selector lever position.

Depending on the transmission version, theengine may have to be running too.

The selection lever position P cannot bechanged until all technical requirements aremet.

Engaging selector lever position D, N,RA selector lever lock prevents the followingfaulty operation:

– Unintentional shifting into selectorlever position R.

– Unintentional shifting from selectorlever position P into another selectorlever position.

1. Press and hold the button to release theselector lever lock.

2. With the driver's safety belt fastened,briefly push the selector lever in the de-sired direction, past a resistance point,

Seite 116

CONTROLS Driving


if needed. The selector lever automati-cally returns to the center position whenreleased.

Engaging selector lever position P

Press button P.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle

General informationIn some situations, the vehicle is to rollwithout its own power for a short distance,for instance in a car wash, or be pushed.

Engaging selector lever position N:with a latching selector lever1. Switch on the ignition.

2. If necessary, release the parking brake.


4. Touch the selector lever lock and en-gage selector lever position N.

5. Release brake.

The vehicle can roll.

If there is a malfunction, you may not beable to change the selector lever position.

Manually unlock the transmission lock, ifneeded, refer to page 120.

Engaging selector lever position N:with a tap-operated selector lever1. Start the engine while pressing on the

brake pedal.

2. If necessary, release the parking brake.


4. Touch the selector lever lock and en-gage selector lever position N.

5. Switch the engine off.

In this way, the ignition remainsswitched on, and a Check Control mes-sage is displayed.

The vehicle can roll.

NOTICE

Selector lever position P is automaticallyengaged when the ignition is switched off.There is a risk of damage to property. Donot switch ignition off in vehicle washes.

Irrespective of the ignition, the selectorlever position P is automatically engaged af-ter approx. 15 minutes.

If there is a malfunction, you may not beable to change the selector lever position.

Electronically unlock the transmission lock,if needed, refer to page 120.

KickdownKickdown is used to achieve maximum driv-ing performance. Step on the acceleratorpedal beyond the resistance point at the fullthrottle position.

Seite 117

Driving CONTROLS


Sport program M/S

ConceptThe shifting points and shifting times in theSport program are designed for a sportierdriving style. The transmission, for instanceshifts up later and the shifting times areshorter.

Activating the Sport program

Press the selector lever to the left from se-lector lever position D.

The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-ment cluster, for instance S1.

The sport program of the transmission is ac-tivated.

Ending the Sport programPush the selector lever to the right.

D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Manual mode M/S

ConceptManual gear-shifting is possible in manualmode.

Activating manual mode1. Press the selector lever to the left from

selector lever position D, arrow 1.

2. Push the selector lever forward or pull itbackward, arrows 2.

Manual mode M/S becomes active and thegear is changed.

The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-ment cluster, for instance M1.

Shifting– To shift down: press the selector lever

forward.

– To shift up: pull the selector lever rear-wards.

The Steptronic transmission continuesshifting automatically in certain situations,for instance when certain engine speed lim-its are reached.

With a tap-operated selector lever: whenM2 is set manually while the vehicle is sta-tionary, the transmission will no longershift back to M1. This shifting behavior isretained until you engage M1 manually orexit M.

Avoiding automatic upshiftingOnce a particular engine speed is attained,M/S manual mode is automatically up-shifted as needed.

John Cooper Works: once particular enginespeeds are attained, upshifting is not auto-matically performed in M/S manual mode.

Seite 118

CONTROLS Driving


For vehicles with Steptronic Sport transmis-sion, automatic shift operations are not per-formed if one of the following conditions ismet:

– DSC is deactivated.

– TRACTION is activated.

– John Cooper Works GP: GP MODE is ac-tivated.

In addition, there is no downshifting forkickdown.

With the appropriate transmission version,the lowest possible gear can be selected bysimultaneously activating kickdown and op-erating the left shift paddles. This is notpossible by switching briefly via the shiftpaddles from selector lever position D tomanual mode M/S.

Ending the manual modePush the selector lever to the right.

D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Shift paddles for Steptronic Sporttransmission

ConceptThe shift paddles on the steering wheel al-low you to shift gears quickly while keepingboth hands on the steering wheel.

General information

Shifting

Gears will only be shifted at appropriate en-gine and road speeds, for instance down-shifting is not possible if the engine speedis too high.

Short-term manual mode

In selector lever position D, actuating ashift paddle switches into manual modetemporarily.

After conservative driving in manual modewithout acceleration or shifting via the shiftpaddles for a certain amount of time, thetransmission switches back to automaticmode.

It is possible to switch into automatic modeas follows:

– Keep the right shift paddle pulled untilD is displayed in the instrument cluster.

– In addition to the pulled right shift pad-dle, pull the left shift paddle.

Continuous manual mode

In selector lever position S, actuating a shiftpaddle switches into manual mode perma-nently.

Shifting

– Shifting up: pull the right shift paddle.

– Shifting down: pull left shift paddle.

– Downshifting to the lowest possiblegear: keep the left shift paddle pulled.

The selected gear is briefly displayed in theinstrument cluster, followed by the currentgear.

Displays in the instrument clusterThe selector lever position isdisplayed, for example P.

Seite 119

Driving CONTROLS


Releasing the transmission lockmanually: with a latching selectorleverIf the selector lever is locked in selectorlever position P despite the ignition beingswitched on, the brake pedal being de-pressed and the button on the selector leverbeing pressed, the transmission lock can beunlocked manually:

Before unlocking the transmission lockmanually, engage the parking brake force-fully to prevent the vehicle from rollingaway.

1. Loosen the selector lever sleeve, to-gether with the lower retaining ring,from the center console. To do so, pullthe retaining ring upward at the rearedge.

2. Lift the sleeve. Unplug the cable connec-tor, if needed.

3. Using the screwdriver from the onboardvehicle tool kit, refer to page 283, pressthe yellow release lever downward, seearrow.

4. Press the button on the front of the se-lector lever and move the selector leverback slightly.

Release the release lever.

5. Bring the selector lever into the desiredposition.

For additional information, see the chapteron tow-starting and towing.

Releasing the transmission lockelectronically: with a tap-operatedselector lever

General informationElectronically unlock the transmission lockto maneuver vehicle from a danger area.

Before unlocking the transmission lock, setthe parking brake to prevent the vehiclefrom rolling away.

Engaging selector lever position NUnlocking is possible, if the starter can spinthe engine.

1. Press and hold down brake pedal.

2. Press the Start/Stop button. The startermust audibly start.

3. Press the button on the selector lever,arrow 1, and press and hold the selectorlever into selector lever position N, ar-row N, until selector lever position N isdisplayed in the instrument cluster.

A Check Control message is displayed.

Seite 120

CONTROLS Driving


4. Release the selector lever.

5. Release brake, as soon as the starterstops.

6. Maneuver the vehicle from the dangerarea and secure it against moving on itsown.

For additional information, see the chapteron tow-starting and towing.

Steptronic Sport transmission:Launch Control

ConceptLaunch Control enables optimum accelera-tion on surfaces with good traction underdry surrounding conditions.

General informationThe use of Launch Control causes prema-ture component wear since this functionrepresents a very heavy load for the vehicle.

Do not use Launch Control during thebreak-in, refer to page 230, period.

Do not turn the steering wheel when driv-ing away with Launch Control.

Functional requirementsLaunch Control is available as soon as theengine and transmission are at operatingtemperature.

Depending on the external temperature anddriving style, the engine and transmissionrequire an interrupted trip of up to30 miles/50 km in order to reach the oper-ating temperature needed for Launch Con-trol.

Start with launch controlWhile the engine is running:

1. Press button and select SPORTwith the MINI Driving Modes switch.

The instrument cluster displays TRAC-TION in combination with SPORT. TheDSC OFF indicator light lights up.

John Cooper Works GP: press button toactivate GP MODE. GP MODE is dis-played in the instrument cluster. TheDSC OFF indicator light lights up.

2. Engage selector lever position S.

3. With the left foot, forcefully press downon the brake.

4. Press and hold down the acceleratorpedal beyond the resistance point at thefull throttle position, kickdown.

A flag symbol is displayed in the instru-ment cluster.

5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Waitbriefly until the engine speed is con-stant. Keep accelerator pedal in this po-sition.

6. Release the brake within 3 seconds afterthe flag symbol illuminates.

The vehicle accelerates.

Upshifting occurs automatically as longas the flag symbol is displayed and theaccelerator pedal is not released.

Repeated use during a tripAfter Launch Control has been used, thetransmission must cool down for approx.5 minutes before Launch Control can beused again.

After using Launch ControlTo increase vehicle stability, activate DSCDynamic Stability Control again.

System limitsAn experienced driver may be able to ach-ieve better acceleration values in DSC OFFmode.

Seite 121

Driving CONTROLS


Displays




Instrument cluster

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: overview

1 Tachometer 130

2 Indicator/warning lights

3 Speedometer

4 Fuel gauge 129

5 Display/reset miles 130

6 Electronic displays 124

Seite 122

CONTROLS Displays


Instrument cluster with enhanced features: overview

1 Tachometer 130

2 Display/reset miles 130

3 Electronic displays 125

4 Vehicle speed

5 Indicator/warning lights

6 Fuel gauge 129

Seite 123

Displays CONTROLS


Instrument cluster without additional functions: electronic displays

1 Driver assistance systems

Messages, for instance Check Control

Time 130

External temperature 130

Selection lists 134

Total miles/trip odometer 130


2 Selector lever position 114

Gear shift indicator 132

3 MINI Driving Modes switch sta-tus 176

Seite 124

CONTROLS Displays


Instrument cluster with enhanced features: electronic displays

1 Selector lever position 114

Gear shift indicator 132

2 Time 130

MINI Driving Modes switch sta-tus 176

John Cooper Works GP: GP MODE 175

3 Driver assistance systems

4 External temperature 130

Range 131

5 Messages, for instance Check Control

Selection lists 134

Navigation instructions

6 Total miles/trip odometer 130


Check Control

ConceptThe Check Control system monitors func-tions in the vehicle and notifies you of mal-functions in the monitored systems.

General informationA Check Control message is displayed as acombination of indicator or warning lightsand text messages in the instrument clusterand in the Head-up Display.

In addition, an acoustic signal may be out-put and a SMS text message may appear onthe Control Display.


General informationThe indicator/warning lights can light up ina variety of combinations and colors.

Several of the lights are checked for properfunctioning and light up temporarily whenthe engine is started or the ignition isswitched on.

Seite 125

Displays CONTROLS


Red lights

Safety belt reminder

Indicator light flashes or is illumi-nated: safety belt on the driver orpassenger side is not buckled. The

safety belt reminder can also be activated ifobjects are placed on the front passengerseat.

Make sure that the safety belts are posi-tioned correctly.

Airbag system

Airbag system and belt tensionermay not be working.

Have the vehicle checked immedi-ately by a dealer's service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop.

Parking brake

The parking brake is set.

For releasing the parking brake, re-fer to page 104.

Approach control warning

Indicator light illuminates: advancewarning is issued, for example whenthere is the impending danger of a

collision or the distance to the vehicleahead is too small.

Increase the distance.

Indicator light flashes: acute warning of theimminent danger of a collision when the ve-hicle approaches another vehicle at a rela-tively high differential speed.

Intervene by braking or make an evasivemaneuver.

Person warning

If a collision with a detected personis imminent, the symbol lights upand a signal sounds.

Instrument cluster without enhancedfeatures: orange lights

Active Cruise Control

The number bars shows the selecteddistance from the vehicle drivingahead.

Camera-based cruise control, refer topage 178.

Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control

Indicator light illuminates: a vehiclehas been detected ahead of you.

Indicator light flashes: the condi-tions are not adequate for the system towork.

The system was deactivated but applies thebrakes until the driver actively resumescontrol of the vehicle by pressing on thebrake pedal or accelerator pedal.

Yellow lights

Antilock Braking System ABS

The Brake Assistant function maynot activate. Avoid abrupt braking.Take the longer braking distanceinto account.

Have the system immediatelychecked by a dealer's service center

or another qualified service center or repairshop.

Seite 126

CONTROLS Displays


DSC Dynamic Stability Control

The indicator light flashes: DSC con-trols the drive and braking forces.The vehicle is stabilized. Reduce

speed and modify your driving style to thedriving circumstances.

The indicator light lights up: DSC has mal-functioned.

Have the system checked by a dealer's serv-ice center or another qualified service cen-ter or repair shop.

DSC, refer to page 173.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control isdeactivated or DTC Dynamic TractionControl is activated

DSC is deactivated or DTC is acti-vated.

DSC, refer to page 173, and DTC, re-fer to page 174.

John Cooper Works GP: Dynamic StabilityControl DSC deactivated or GP MODEactivated

DSC is deactivated or GP MODE isactivated.

DSC, refer to page 173, andGP MODE, refer to page 175.

Flat Tire Monitor FTM

The FTM signals a loss of tire infla-tion pressure in a tire.

Reduce your speed and stop cau-tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steeringmaneuvers.

Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 159.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM

The indicator light illuminates: theTire Pressure Monitor reports a lowtire inflation pressure or a flat tire.

Follow the information in the Check Controlmessage.

The indicator light flashes and is then illu-minated continuously: flat tires or tire pres-sure losses cannot be detected.

– Interference caused by systems or devi-ces with the same radio frequency: afterleaving the area of the interference, thesystem automatically becomes activeagain.

– TPM was unable to complete the reset.Reset the system again.

– A wheel without TPM wheel electronicsis mounted: have it checked by a deal-er’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop as needed.

– Malfunction: have the system checkedby a dealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop.

Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 154.

Steering system

Steering system may not be working.

Have the system checked by a deal-er's service center or another quali-

fied service center or repair shop.

Emissions

– The warning light lights up:

Emissions are deteriorating.Have the vehicle checked as soonas possible.

– The warning light flashes under certaincircumstances:

This indicates that there is excessivemisfiring in the engine.

Seite 127

Displays CONTROLS


Reduce the vehicle speed and have thesystem checked immediately; otherwise,serious engine misfiring within a briefperiod can seriously damage emissioncontrol components, in particular thecatalytic converter.

Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer topage 282.

Green lights

Turn signal

Turn signal switched on.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indi-cator light indicates that a turn sig-

nal bulb has failed.

Turn signal, refer to page 104.

Parking lights, headlight

Parking lights or headlights areswitched on.

Parking lights/low beams, headlightcontrol, refer to page 144.

Front fog lights

Front fog lights are switched on.

Front fog lights, refer to page 147.

High-beam Assistant

High-beam Assistant is switched on.

High beams are switched on and offautomatically depending on the traf-

fic situation.

High-beam Assistant, refer to page 146.

Cruise control

The system is switched on. It main-tains the speed that was set using

the control elements on the steering wheel.

Blue lights

High beams

High beams are switched on.

High beams, refer to page 105.

Hiding Check Control messages

Press the button on the turn signal lever.

Continuous displaySome Check Control messages are displayedcontinuously and are not cleared until themalfunction is eliminated. If several mal-functions occur at once, the messages aredisplayed consecutively.

The messages can be hidden for approx.8 seconds. After this time, they are dis-played again automatically.

Temporary displaySome Check Control messages are hiddenautomatically after approx. 20 seconds. TheCheck Control messages are stored and canbe displayed again later.

Seite 128

CONTROLS Displays


Displaying stored Check ControlmessagesVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Check Control"

4. Select the SMS text message.

Display

Check Control

At least one Check Control messageis displayed or stored.

SMS text messagesSMS text messages in combination with asymbol in the instrument cluster explain aCheck Control message and the meaning ofthe indicator/warning lights.

Supplementary SMS text messagesAdditional information, such as on thecause of an error or the required action, canbe called up via Check Control.

With urgent messages the added text willbe automatically displayed on the ControlDisplay.

Depending on the Check Control message,further help can be selected.


1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Check Control"

4. Select the desired text message.


Messages after trip completionCertain messages displayed while drivingare displayed again after the ignition isswitched off.

Fuel gauge

ConceptThe current fill level of the fuel tank is dis-played.

General informationVehicle tilt position may cause the displayto vary.

Information on refueling, refer to page 244.

Instrument cluster withoutenhanced features: display

The arrow beside the fuelpump symbol shows whichside of the vehicle the fuelfiller flap is on.


The arrow beside the fuelpump symbol shows whichside of the vehicle the fuelfiller flap is on.

Indicator light in the instrumentcluster

The yellow indicator light illumi-nates, once the fuel reserve isreached.

Seite 129

Displays CONTROLS


Tachometer

Always avoid engine speeds in the redwarning field. In this range, the fuel supplyis reduced to protect the engine.

Odometer and trip odometer

ConceptThe total mileage driven and the mileagedriven since the last reset are displayed inthe instrument cluster.

Instrument cluster withoutadditional functions: reset tripdistance

Press the button.

– The odometer is displayedwhen the ignition isswitched off.

– When the ignition isswitched on, the trip od-ometer is reset.

Instrument cluster with enhancedfeatures: reset trip distance

Press the button.

– The odometer is displayedwhen the ignition isswitched off.

– When the ignition isswitched on, the trip od-ometer is reset.

External temperature

General informationIf the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃, a sig-nal sounds.


There is an increased risk of ice on roads.

Safety information

Warning

Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃there can be a risk of icy roads, for in-stance on bridges or shady sections of theroad. There is a risk of accident. Modifyyour driving style to the weather condi-tions at low temperatures.

DisplayThe external temperature isdisplayed in the instrumentcluster.

Time

The time is displayed in theinstrument cluster.

Set the time on the Central In-formation Display (CID), referto page 48.

Seite 130

CONTROLS Displays


Date

The date is displayed in the in-strument cluster.

Set the date on the Central In-formation Display (CID), referto page 49.

Range

General informationWhen the remaining range is low:

– A Check Control message is displayedbriefly.

– The remaining range is shown on theOnboard Computer.

– With a dynamic driving style, for in-stance fast cornering, the engine func-tion is not always ensured.

The Check Control message appears contin-uously below a range of approx.30 miles/50 km.

Safety information

NOTICE

With a driving range of less than30 miles/50 km the engine may no longerhave sufficient fuel. Engine functions arenot ensured anymore. There is a risk ofdamage to property. Refuel promptly.

DisplayThe current range is displayedin the instrument cluster.

Displaying the cruising rangeVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"

4. "Instrument panel"

5. "Range"

Current consumption

ConceptDisplays the current fuel consumption.Check whether you are currently driving inan efficient and environmentally-friendlymanner.

Displaying the currentconsumptionVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"


5. "Current consumption"

Service notifications

ConceptThe function displays the service notifica-tions and the corresponding maintenancescopes.

General informationAfter the ignition is switched on the instru-ment cluster briefly displays available driv-

Seite 131

Displays CONTROLS


ing distance or time to the next scheduledmaintenance.

A service advisor can read out the currentservice notifications from your vehicle key.

Display

Detailed information on servicenotificationsMore information on the type of service re-quired may be displayed on the Control Dis-play.


1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Service required"

Maintenance and service measures andlegally mandated inspections are dis-played.

4. Select an entry to call up detailed infor-mation.

Symbols

Symbols Description

No service is currently re-quired.

The deadline for scheduledmaintenance or a legallymandated inspection is ap-proaching.

The service deadline has al-ready passed.

Entering appointment datesEnter the dates for the mandatory vehicleinspections.

Make sure that the vehicle's date and timeare set correctly.


1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Service required"

4. "Vehicle inspection"

5. "Date:"


Automatic Service RequestData regarding the service status or legallymandated vehicle inspections is automati-cally transmitted to your dealer’s servicecenter before your vehicle is due for serv-ice.

You can check when your dealer’s servicecenter was notified.


1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"


4. "Teleservice Call"

Gear shift indicator

ConceptThe system recommends the most efficientgear for the current driving situation.

General informationDepending on the vehicle equipment andcountry version, the gear shift indicator isactive in the manual mode of the Steptronictransmission and with manual transmission.

Suggestions to shift up or down are dis-played in the instrument cluster.

Seite 132

CONTROLS Displays


Manual transmission: displaying

Example Description

Efficient gear is set.

Depending on the equipmentversion, shift to a more effi-cient gear.

Steptronic transmission: displaying

Example Description

Efficient gear is set.

Depending on the equipmentversion, shift to a more effi-cient gear.

Speed Limit Info

Speed Limit Info

ConceptSpeed Limit Info shows the current maxi-mum permitted speed in the instrumentcluster.

General informationThe camera at the base of the interior mir-ror detects traffic signs at the edge of theroad as well as overhead sign posts. Trafficsigns with extra symbols for wet road con-ditions, etc., are also detected and comparedwith the vehicle's onboard data, such as

from the rain sensor, and will be displayeddepending on the situation.

With the navigation system, the systemtakes into account the information stored inthe navigation data and also displays speedlimits present on routes without signs.

Speed limits when towing a trailer are notshown.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitutefor the driver’s personal judgment in as-sessing visibility and traffic situation.There is a risk of accident. Adjust drivingstyle to traffic conditions. Watch trafficclosely and actively intervene where ap-propriate.

Overview

Camera

The camera is installed near the interiormirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interiormirror clean and clear.

DisplayDepending on the vehicle equipment, SpeedLimit Info is displayed permanently in the

Seite 133

Displays CONTROLS


instrument cluster or via the Onboard Com-puter.

Press button on the turn signal lever severaltimes, if needed.

Speed Limit Info is displayed in the instru-ment cluster.

Speed Limit Info

The last speed limit detected.

With navigation system:Speed Limit Info is not availa-ble.

Speed Limit Info can also be displayed inthe Head-up Display.

System limitsThe system may not be fully functional andmay provide incorrect information in thefollowing situations:

– In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-fall.

– When traffic signs are fully or partiallyconcealed by objects, stickers or paint.

– When driving very close to the vehiclein front of you.

– When driving toward bright lights orstrong reflections.

– When the windshield in front of the in-terior mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov-ered by a sticker, etc.

– In the event of incorrect detection bythe camera.

– If the speed limits stored in the naviga-tion system are incorrect.

– In areas not covered by the navigationsystem.

– When roads differ from the navigation,such as due to changes in road routing.

– When passing buses or trucks with aspeed sticker.

– If the traffic signs are non-conforming.

– When traffic signs that are valid for aparallel road are detected.

– During calibration of the camera imme-diately after vehicle delivery.

Selection lists

General informationDepending on the vehicle equipment, thebuttons on the steering wheel and the dis-play in the instrument cluster can be usedto display or use the following:

– Current audio source.

– Phone redial.

– Turn on voice activation system.

Seite 134

CONTROLS Displays


Activating a list and adjusting thesetting

Button on thesteering wheel

Function

Move selection up.

Move selectiondown.

Confirm the selec-tion.

Instrument cluster withoutenhanced features: display


Onboard Computer

ConceptThe Onboard Computer displays differentvehicle data in the instrument cluster, suchas average values.

Calling up information


Information is displayed in the instrumentcluster.

Information at a glanceRepeatedly pressing the but-ton on the turn signal levercalls up the following informa-tion:

– Range.

– GREEN Info.

When GREEN Mode is activated.

– Average consumption, fuel.

– Average consumption since deliveryfrom the factory.

– Current consumption, fuel.

– Average speed.

– Date.

– Engine temperature display.

– With equipment version with Head-upDisplay and navigation:

Seite 135

Displays CONTROLS


Distance to destination.

When destination guidance is activatedin the navigation system.

– With equipment version with Head-upDisplay and navigation:

Time of arrival.

When destination guidance is activatedin the navigation system.

– Instrument cluster without enhancedfeatures:

Speed Limit Info.

– Vehicle speed.

– Trip odometer.

The unit of some information can bechanged.

Setting units, refer to page 49.

Selecting informationDepending on the vehicle equipment, youcan select what information from the On-board Computer can be accessed in the in-strument cluster.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"




Information in detail

RangeDisplays the estimated cruising range avail-able with the remaining fuel.

The range is calculated based on your driv-ing style over the last 20 miles/30 km.

GREEN infoThe achieved range extension may be dis-played as a bonus range.

Average consumptionThe average consumption is calculated forthe period while the engine is running.

The average consumption is calculated forthe distance traveled since the last reset bythe Onboard Computer.

Average speedPeriods in which the vehicle is parked withthe engine manually stopped are not in-cluded in the calculation of the averagespeed.

Resetting average values

Press and hold the button on the turn signallever.

Engine temperature display

Concept

The current engine temperature, based on acombination of coolant and engine oil tem-perature is displayed. As soon as the opti-mum operating temperature has been at-tained, the indicator is in the centerposition.

Seite 136

CONTROLS Displays


General information

If the engine oil or coolant, and thus the en-gine, become too hot, a Check Control mes-sage is displayed too.

When the engine temperature is toohigh, a red indicator light is dis-played.

When the engine oil temperature istoo high, a red indicator light is dis-played.

To check the coolant level, refer topage 279.



Distance to destinationDepending on the vehicle equipment, thedistance remaining to the destination is dis-played if a destination is entered in the nav-igation system before the trip is started.

The distance to the destination is adoptedautomatically.

Time of arrivalDepending on the vehicle equipment, theestimated time of arrival is displayed if adestination is entered in the navigation sys-tem before the trip is started.

The time must be correctly set.

Instrument cluster without additionalfunctions: Speed Limit InfoSpeed Limit Info shows the current maxi-mum permitted speed in the instrumentcluster.

Onboard Computer on the ControlDisplay

ConceptThe Onboard Computer displays differentvehicle data on the Control Display, such asaverage values.

General informationTwo types of Onboard Computers are availa-ble on the Control Display:

– "Onboard info": average values, such asthe consumption, are displayed. The val-ues can be reset individually.

– "Trip computer": the values deliver anoverview of a specific route and can bereset as often as necessary.

Calling up the Onboard Computer ortrip computerVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driving information"

3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

Seite 137

Displays CONTROLS


Resetting the Onboard ComputerVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Onboard info"

4. "Consumption" or "Speed"

5. "OK"

Resetting the trip computerVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Trip computer"

4. Move the Controller to the left, ifneeded.

– "Reset": all values are reset.

– "Automatic reset": all values arereset approx. 4 hours after the vehi-cle has come to a standstill.

5. If necessary, "OK"

Driving Excitement

ConceptOn the Control Display, sport instrumentscan be displayed, and the vehicle state canbe checked before the use of the SPORTprogram.

Sport instruments

General informationOn the Control Display, values for powerand torque are displayed.

Displaying sport instrumentsVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Technology in action"

3. "Sport displays"

4. "Sports instruments"

Via MINI Driving Modes switch:

1. Activate SPORT.

2. "Sport displays"

3. "Sports instruments"

Vehicle state

General informationThe following vehicle and surrounding areadata is automatically checked and evaluatedin succession:

– Range.

– Engine temperature.

– External temperature.

– SPORT program state.

Finally, a total evaluation of the vehiclestate is displayed.

Checking vehicle stateVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Sport displays"

4. "Vehicle and surroundings"

Via the MINI Driving Modes switch:

1. Activate SPORT.

2. "Sport displays"

3. "Vehicle and surroundings"

Seite 138

CONTROLS Displays


Speed warning

ConceptA speed limit can be set that when reachedwill cause a warning to be issued.

General informationThe warning is repeated if the vehicle speedexceeds the set speed limit again, after ithas dropped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.

AdjustingVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Speed warning"

4. "Warning at:"

5. Turn the Controller until the desiredspeed is displayed.



1. "My MINI"


3. "Speed warning"

4. "Speed warning"

Setting your current speed as thespeed warningVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Speed warning"

4. "Select current speed"

LED ring on the central in-strument cluster

ConceptThe LED ring displays light animations torepresent specific functions.

Basic displaysBasic functions, for instance the tachome-ter, can be set to be displayed continually ifso desired.

John Cooper Works GP: the accelerationforce can be set as basic display of the LEDring.

Event displaysFunctions that are only displayed tempora-rily, for instance the volume or temperaturesettings, can be set as event displays.

Several vehicle assistance functions canalso be displayed on the LED ring. This dis-play corresponds with the displays of thefunction in the respective display.

Example: tachometerLike the tachometer in the instrument clus-ter, the light animations of the tachometer'sbasic display show the current RPMs andthe respective RPM warning thresholds.

Display

– Arrow 1: current RPM.

Seite 139

Displays CONTROLS


– Arrow 2: prewarning field.

– Arrow 3: warning field.

Switching on/off LED ringVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"

4. "Center Instrument"


Adjusting the LED ringVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"


5. "Basic display" or "Event display"


Setting the brightnessThe brightness can be adjusted when nightlighting is active in the instrument cluster.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"


5. "Brightness at night"




Head-up Display

ConceptThis system projects important informationinto the driver's field of vision, for instancethe speed.

The driver can get information withoutaverting his or her eyes from the road.

General informationFollow the instructions for cleaning theHead-up Display. For additional informa-tion, see the chapter on care.

Safety information

Warning

When extending and retracting the projec-tion screen of the Head-up Display, bodyparts can be jammed. There is a risk of in-jury. Make sure that the area of movementof the projection screen is clear duringopening and closing.

NOTICE

The Head-up Display consists of sensitivecomponents that can easily be scraped ordamaged. There is a risk of damage toproperty. Do not place any objects on theHead-up Display, attach to system compo-nents or plug into the system. Do notmove the moving parts manually.

Seite 140

CONTROLS Displays


Overview

Switching the Head-up Displayon/offWhen switching on, the projection lens ofthe Head-up Display is extended. Whenswitching off, the projection lens of theHead-up Display is retracted again.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"

4. "Head-Up Display"


Display

OverviewThe following information is displayed onthe Head-up Display:

– Vehicle speed.

– Navigation instructions.

– Check Control messages.

– Selection list from the instrument clus-ter.

– Driver assistance systems.

Some of this information is only displayedbriefly as needed.

Selecting displays in the Head-upDisplayVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"


5. "Displayed information"

6. Select the desired displays in the Head-up Display.


Setting the brightnessThe brightness is automatically adjusted tothe ambient brightness.

The basic setting can be adjusted manually.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"


5. "Brightness"



When the low beams are switched on, thebrightness of the Head-up Display can beadditionally influenced using the instru-ment lighting, refer to page 148.


Adjusting the heightVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


Seite 141

Displays CONTROLS


3. "Displays"


5. "Height"

6. Turn the Controller until the desiredheight is reached.



Setting the rotationThe screen of the Head-up Display can berotated around its own axis.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"


5. "Rotation"

6. Turn the Controller until the desired set-ting is selected.



Display visibilityThe visibility of the displays in the Head-upDisplay is influenced by the following fac-tors:

– Certain sitting positions.

– Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis-play.

– Sunglasses with certain polarization fil-ters.

– Wet roads.

– Unfavorable light conditions.

John Cooper Works: sport dis-plays in the Head-up Display

General informationThe sport displays in the Head-up Displayassist with a sporty driving style.

Switching onVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"


5. "Displayed information"

6. "Sport displays"

With navigation system: if the sport dis-plays are switched on, no navigation con-tent will be displayed on the Head-up Dis-play.

Display

1 Vehicle speed

2 Shift point indicator

3 Gear display

4 Current engine speed

5 Warning field, speed

Seite 142

CONTROLS Displays


Shift point indicator

ConceptThe shift point indicator in the Head-upDisplay indicates the optimum shiftingpoint. Thus, with a sporty driving style, thebest possible vehicle acceleration is ach-ieved.

Functional requirements– Steptronic Sport transmission:

Manual mode M/S and, if necessary, Dy-namic Traction Control DTC are acti-vated.

– Press the accelerator pedal all the waydown.

DisplaySuccessive gray illuminated fields indicatethe upcoming shift moment.

Shift up immediately when the red fieldslight up.

When the maximum speed is reached, theentire display flashes red and the supply offuel is interrupted in order to protect theengine.

Vehicle status

General informationThe status can be displayed and actions per-formed for several systems.

Opening the vehicle statusVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

Information at a glance

Symbols Description

"Flat Tire Monitor": status ofthe run-flat tires, refer topage 159.

"Tire Pressure Monitor": sta-tus of the Tire PressureMonitor TPM, refer topage 154.

"Engine oil level": Electronicengine oil level check, referto page 275.

"Check Control": Check Con-trol messages are stored inthe background and can bedisplayed on the ControlDisplay. Displaying storedCheck Control messages, re-fer to page 129.

"Service required": display-ing service notifications, re-fer to page 131.

"Teleservice Call": Serv-ice Request.

Seite 143

Displays CONTROLS


Lights



Overview

Switches in the vehicle

The light switch element is located next tothe steering wheel.

Symbol Function

Front fog lights.

Automatic headlight control.

Cornering light.

Lights off.

Daytime running lights.

Symbol Function

Parking lights.

Low beams.

Instrument lighting.

Parking lights, low beams androadside parking lights

General informationPosition of switch: , ,

If the driver's door is opened when the igni-tion is switched off, the exterior lighting isautomatically switched off.

Parking lightsPosition of switch:

The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.

Do not use the parking lights for extendedperiods; otherwise, the battery may becomedischarged and it would then be impossibleto start the engine.

When parking, switch on the one-sidedroadside parking light, refer to page 145.

Low beamsPosition of switch:

The low beams light up when the ignition isswitched on.

Seite 144

CONTROLS Lights


Canada: roadside parking light

ConceptThe vehicle can be illuminated on one side.

Switching on

With radio-ready state switched off, pressthe lever either up or down past the resist-ance point for approx. 2 seconds.

Switching offBriefly press the lever to the resistancepoint in the opposite direction.

Welcome lights and pathwaylighting

Welcome lights

General informationDepending on the vehicle equipment andthe ambient brightness, individual lightfunctions may be switched on briefly whenthe vehicle is unlocked.

Activating/deactivatingPosition of switch: ,


1. "My MINI"


3. "Lighting"


5. "Welcome lights"


Pathway lighting

General informationThe low beams stay lit for a short while ifthe headlight flasher is switched on afterthe vehicle's radio-ready state is switchedoff.

Setting the durationVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Lighting"


5. "Pathway lighting"

6. Set length of time.


Automatic headlight control

ConceptThe low beams are switched on and off au-tomatically depending on the ambientbrightness, for example in tunnels, in twi-light or if there is precipitation.

General informationA blue sky with the sun low on the horizoncan cause the lights to be switched on.

ActivatingPosition of switch:

Seite 145

Lights CONTROLS


The indicator light in the instrument clusteris illuminated when the low beams areswitched on.

System limitsThe automatic headlight control cannotserve as a substitute for your personal judg-ment of lighting conditions.

For example, the sensors are unable to de-tect fog or hazy weather. In these situa-tions, switch the lights on manually.

Daytime running lights

General informationPosition of switch: , ,

The daytime running lights light up whenthe ignition is switched on. After the igni-tion is switched off, the parking lights lightup in position .

Activating/deactivatingIn some countries, daytime running lightsare mandatory, so it may not be possible todeactivate the daytime running lights.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Lighting"



Settings are stored for the currently usedvehicle key.

Cornering light

General informationPosition of switch:

In tight curves, for instance on mountain-ous roads or when turning, an additional,cornering light is switched on that lights upthe inside of the curve when the vehicle ismoving below a certain speed.

The cornering light is automaticallyswitched on depending on the steering an-gle or, where applicable, the use of turn sig-nals.

When driving in reverse, the corneringlights may be automatically switched on re-gardless of the steering angle.

Adaptive headlight range con-trol

The adaptive headlight range control fea-ture balances out acceleration and brakingprocesses as well as the vehicle load condi-tions in order to avoid dazzling oncomingtraffic. Illumination of the road is optimized.

High-beam Assistant

ConceptThe high-beam Assistant detects other traf-fic participants early on and automaticallyswitches the high beams on or off depend-ing on the traffic situation.

General informationThe high-beam Assistant ensures that thehigh beams are switched on, whenever thetraffic situation allows. In the low speedrange, the high beams are not switched onby the system.

The system responds to light from oncom-ing traffic and traffic driving ahead of you,and to ambient lighting, for instance intowns and cities.

Seite 146

CONTROLS Lights


The high beams can be switched on and offmanually at any time.


Position of switch, depending on the vehicleequipment: ,


The indicator light in the instrumentcluster is illuminated when the lowbeams are switched on.

The headlights are automatically switchedbetween low beams and high beams.

The blue indicator light in the instru-ment cluster lights up when the sys-tem switches on the high beams.

The high-beam Assistant is deactivatedwhen manually switching the high beamson and off, refer to page 105.

To reactivate the high-beam Assistant,press the button on the turn signal lever.

System limitsThe high-beam Assistant cannot serve as asubstitute for the driver's personal judg-ment of when to use the high beams. In sit-uation that require this, therefore switch offmanually.

The system is not fully functional in the fol-lowing situations, and driver interventionmay be necessary:

– In very unfavorable weather conditions,such as fog or heavy precipitation.

– When detecting poorly-lit road userssuch as pedestrians, cyclists, horsebackriders and wagons; when driving closeto train or ship traffic; or at animalcrossings.

– In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres-sions, in crossing traffic or half-ob-scured oncoming traffic on highways.

– In poorly-lit towns and cities or in thepresence of highly reflective signs.

– When the windshield in front of the in-terior mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov-ered with stickers, etc.

Fog lights

Front fog lights

ConceptThe front fog lights work alongside the lowbeams to illuminate a wider area of theroadway.

Functional requirementThe low beams must be switched on beforeswitching on the front fog lights.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The green indicator light lights up ifthe front fog lights are switched on.

If the automatic headlight control, refer topage 145, is activated, the low beams willcome on automatically when you switch onthe front fog lights.

When the high beams or headlight flasherare activated, the front fog lights are notswitched on.

Seite 147

Lights CONTROLS


Instrument lighting

Functional requirementThe parking lights or low beams must beswitched on to adjust the brightness.

AdjustingAdjust the brightness with thethumbwheel.

Interior lights

General informationDepending on the equipment, the interiorlights, footwell lights, entry lights, and cour-tesy lights are controlled automatically.

The thumbwheel for the instrument lightingcontrols brightness of some of these fea-tures.

Overview

1 Interior lights

2 Reading lights

3 Ambient light

Switching the interior lights on/offPress the button.

To switch off permanently: press the buttonand hold for approx. 3 seconds.

Switching the reading lights on andoff manually

Press the button.

The reading lights are located in the frontnext to the interior light.

Ambient light

General informationDepending on the equipment version, light-ing can be adjusted for some lights in thecar's interior.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Lighting"

4. "Interior lighting"

5. "Ambient lighting"



Changing color

Push the switch forward or back:manual color change.

Press the switch forward or back-ward and hold for approx. 3 seconds,until the ambient light illuminates

Seite 148

CONTROLS Lights


several times: automatic color change. Pushthe switch again to end color changes.

Setting the brightnessDepending on the equipment, the bright-ness of the ambient light can be adjustedvia the thumbwheel for the instrumentlighting or on the Control Display.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Lighting"

4. "Interior lighting"

5. "Brightness"

6. Adjust the brightness.

Seite 149

Lights CONTROLS


Safety




Airbags

1 Front airbag, driver

2 Front airbag, front passenger

3 Head airbag

4 Side airbag

5 Knee airbag

Front airbagsFront airbags help protect the driver andthe front passenger by responding to frontalimpacts in which safety belts alone wouldnot provide adequate protection.

Side airbagIn the event of a side impact, the side air-bag protects the side of the body in thechest and lap area.

Seite 150

CONTROLS Safety


Head airbagIn the event of a side impact, the head air-bag protects the head.

Ejection MitigationThe head airbag system is designed as anejection mitigation countermeasure to re-duce the likelihood of ejections of vehicleoccupants through side windows duringrollovers or side impact events.

Knee airbagThe knee airbag protects the legs in theevent of a frontal impact.

Protective effectAirbags are not triggered in every impactsituation, for instance in less severe acci-dents or rear-end collisions.

Information on optimum effect of theairbags

Warning

If the seat position is incorrect or the de-ployment area of the airbags is impaired,the airbag system cannot provide protec-tion as intended and may cause additionalinjuries due to triggering. There is a riskof injuries or danger to life. Follow the in-formation on achieving the optimum pro-tective effect of the airbag system.

– Keep a distance from the airbags.

– Always grasp the steering wheel on thesteering wheel rim. Hold your hands atthe 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, tokeep the risk of injury to your hands orarms as low as possible when the airbagis triggered.

– Make sure that the front passenger issitting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her

feet and legs in the floor area and doesnot support them on the dashboard.

– Make sure that occupants keep theirheads away from the side airbag.

– There should be no additional persons,animals or objects between an airbagand a person.

– Dashboard and windshield on the frontpassenger side must stay clear - do notattach adhesive labels or coverings anddo not attach brackets or cables, for in-stance for GPS devices or mobilephones.

– Do not apply adhesive materials to theairbag cover panels, do not cover themor modify them in any way.

– Do not use the cover of the front airbagon the front passenger side as a storagearea.

– Do not attach slip covers, seat cushionsor other objects to the front passengerseat that are not specifically suited forseats with integrated side airbags.

– Do not place seat cushions or other ob-jects on the front seats that are not spe-cifically suited for seats with integratedside airbags.

– Do not hang pieces of clothing, such asjackets, over the backrests.

– Never modify either the individual com-ponents or the wiring in the airbag sys-tem. This also applies to steering wheelcovers, the dashboard, and the seats.

– Do not remove the airbag system.

Even when you follow all instructions veryclosely, injury from contact with the airbagscannot be fully ruled out in certain situa-tions.

The ignition and inflation noise may lead toshort-term and, in most cases, temporaryhearing impairment in sensitive occupants.

Vehicle modifications for a person with dis-abilities may affect the air bag system; con-

Seite 151

Safety CONTROLS


tact MINI Customer Relations for further in-formation.

Warnings and information on the airbagsare also found on the sun visors.

Functional readiness of the airbagsystem

Safety information

Warning

Individual components can be hot aftertriggering of the airbag system. There is arisk of injury. Do not touch individualcomponents.

Warning

Improperly executed work can lead to fail-ure, malfunction or unintentional trigger-ing of the airbag system. In the case of amalfunction, the airbag system might nottrigger as intended despite the accidentseverity. There is a risk of injuries or dan-ger to life. Have the airbag systemchecked, repaired, dismantled and scrap-ped by a dealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop.

Correct function

When the ignition is switched on,the warning light in the instrumentcluster lights up briefly and thereby

indicates the operational readiness of theentire airbag system and the belt tensioner.

Airbag system malfunctioning– Warning light does not come on when

the ignition is switched on.

– The warning light lights up continu-ously.

Automatic deactivation of thefront-seat passenger airbags

ConceptThe system reads if the front passenger seatis occupied by measuring the human body'sresistance.

Front, knee, and side airbag on the frontpassenger's side are activated or deacti-vated.

General informationBefore transporting a child on the front pas-senger seat, refer to the safety informationand instructions for children on the frontpassenger seat, see Children.

Safety information

Warning

To ensure the front-seat passenger airbagfunction, the system must be able to de-tect whether a person is sitting in thefront passenger seat. The entire seat cush-ion area must be used for this purpose.There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.Make sure that the front passenger keepshis or her feet in the floor area.

Malfunction of the automaticdeactivation systemWhen transporting older children andadults, the front-seat passenger airbags maybe deactivated in certain sitting positions.In this case, the indicator light for the front-seat passenger airbags lights up.

In this case, change the sitting position sothat the front-seat passenger airbags are ac-tivated and the indicator light goes out.

If it is not possible to activate the airbags,have the person sit in the rear.

Seite 152

CONTROLS Safety


To enable correct recognition of the occu-pied seat cushion.

– Do not attach covers, cushions, ball matsor other items to the front passengerseat unless they are specifically deter-mined to be safe for use on the frontpassenger seat.

– Do not place any electronic devices onthe front passenger seat if a child re-straint system is to be installed on it.

– Do not place objects under the seat thatcould press against the seat from below.

– No moisture in or on the seat.

Indicator light for the front-seatpassenger airbags

The indicator light for the front-seat passen-ger airbags indicates the operating state ofthe front-seat passenger airbags.

The light indicates whether the airbags areeither activated or deactivated.

– The indicator light lightsup when a child is properlyseated in a child restraintsystem or when the seat isempty. The airbags on thefront passenger side arenot activated.

– The indicator light does not light upwhen, for instance a correctly seatedperson of sufficient size is detected onthe seat. The airbags on the front pas-senger side are activated.

Detected child restraint systemsThe system generally detects childrenseated in a child restraint system, particu-larly in child restraint systems required byNHTSA at the point in time when the vehi-cle was manufactured. After installing achild restraint system, make sure that theindicator light for the front-seat passengerairbags lights up. This indicates that thechild restraint system has been detectedand the front-seat passenger airbags are notactivated.

Strength of the driver's and front-seat passenger airbagThe explosive power that activates driver's/front-seat passenger airbags very much de-pends on the positions of the driver's/frontpassenger seat.

To maintain the accuracy of this functionover the long-term, calibrate the front seatsas soon as a relevant Check Control mes-sage is displayed. A message also appearson the Control Display.

Calibrating the front seats

Warning


An appropriate Check Control message isdisplayed.

1. Move the respective seat all the way for-ward.

2. Move the respective seat forward again.The seat moves forward briefly.

3. Readjust the seat to the desired posi-tion.

Seite 153

Safety CONTROLS


The calibration procedure is completedwhen the Check Control message disap-pears.

If the message continues to be displayed,repeat the calibration.

If the message does not disappear after a re-peat calibration, have the system checkedas soon as possible.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM

ConceptThe system monitors tire inflation pressurein the four mounted tires. The system warnsyou if there is a significant loss of pressurein one or more tires.

General informationSensors in the tire valves measure the tireinflation pressure and, depending on themodel, the tire temperature.

Further information and instructions on us-ing the system can also be found under Tireinflation pressure, refer to page 248.

Functional requirementsThe following conditions must be met forthe system; otherwise, reliable flagging of aloss of tire inflation pressure is not assured:

– After a tire or wheel replacement, a re-set was performed with the correct tireinflation pressure.

– After the tire inflation pressure was ad-justed to a new value, a reset was per-formed.

– Wheels with TPM wheel electronics.

Status display

Current statusThe system status can be displayed on theControl Display, e.g., whether or not the sys-tem is active.


1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"

The current status is displayed.

Tire conditions

General informationTire and system status are indicated by thecolor of the wheels and a SMS text messageon the Control Display.

All wheels greenSystem is active and will issue a warning re-lated to the tire inflation pressures storedduring the last reset.

One to four yellow wheelsA flat tire or major drop in the tire inflationpressure has occurred in the indicated tires.

Gray wheelsIt may not be possible to identify tire infla-tion pressure losses.

Possible causes:

– Malfunction.

– The system is being reset.

Additional informationThe status control display additionallyshows the current tire inflation pressures.The values shown are instantaneous meas-urements and may vary depending on driv-ing style or weather conditions.

Seite 154

CONTROLS Safety


Resetting the systemVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"

4. Start the engine but do not drive off.

5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Performreset".

6. Drive away.

The wheels are displayed in gray and thefollowing is displayed "Resetting TirePressure Monitor…".

After a travel time of several minutes, theset tire inflation pressures are accepted asreference values. The resetting process iscompleted automatically while driving.

After successful completion of the reset, thetires appear in green on the Control Displayand "Tire Pressure Monitor active. See labelfor recommended pressures." is displayed.

You may interrupt this trip at any time.When you continue the reset resumes auto-matically.

Messages

General informationA low tire inflation pressure may cause theDSC Dynamic Stability Control to beswitched on.

Safety information

Warning

A damaged regular tire with low or miss-ing tire inflation pressure impacts han-dling, such as steering and braking re-sponse. Run-flat tires can maintain limitedstability. There is a risk of accident. Do notcontinue driving if the vehicle is equippedwith normal tires. Follow the information

on run-flat tires and continued drivingwith these tires.

If a tire inflation pressure check isrequired

Message

A symbol with a Check Control message ap-pears on the Control Display.

Symbol Possible cause

The system has detected awheel change, but no reset wasdone.

No reset was performed for thesystem. The system issues awarning based on the tire infla-tion pressures stored during thelast reset.

Inflation was not carried out ac-cording to specifications.

The tire inflation pressure hasfallen below the level of the lastreset.

Measure

1. Check the tire pressure and correct asneeded.

2. Reset the system.

If the tire inflation pressure is too low

Message

A yellow warning light is illuminatedin the instrument cluster.

In addition, a symbol with a Check Controlmessage appears on the Control Display.

Seite 155

Safety CONTROLS



There is a tire inflation pressureloss.


Measure

1. Reduce your speed and drive moder-ately. Do not exceed a speed of80 mph/130 km/h.

2. At the next opportunity, for instance gasstation, check and correct the tire infla-tion pressure in all four tires, if neces-sary.

3. Reset the system.

If there is a significant loss of tireinflation pressure

Message


In addition, a symbol with the affected tireappears in a Check Control message on theControl Display.


There is a flat tire or a majorloss in tire inflation pressure.


Measure

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-neuvers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted withnormal tires or run-flat tires.

Run-flat tires, refer to page 259, are la-beled with a circular symbol containingthe letters RSC marked on the tire'ssidewall.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires1. Identify the damaged tire.

To do this, check the tire inflation pres-sure in all four tires, for instance usingthe tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit.

If the tire inflation pressure in all fourtires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni-tor may not have been reset. In thiscase, perform the reset.

If the tire inflation pressure in all fourtires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitormay not have been initialized. In thiscase, initialize the system.

If identification of flat tire damage isnot possible, please contact a dealer’sservice center or another qualified serv-ice center or repair shop.

2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tirekit or by changing the wheel.

Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tirekit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics.In this case, have the electronics checkedand replaced at the next opportunity.

Seite 156

CONTROLS Safety


Run-flat tires

Safety information

Warning

The vehicle handles differently when arun-flat tire has insufficient or no tirepressure; for instance, reduced lane stabil-ity when braking, braking distances arelonger and the self-steering properties willchange. There is a risk of accident. Drivemoderately and do not exceed a speed of50 mph/80 km/h.

Maximum speed

You may continue driving with a damagedtire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire

If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-neuvers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of50 mph/80 km/h.

3. Check the tire inflation pressure in allfour tires at the next opportunity.


Possible driving range with adepressurized tire

The distance for which it may be possible todrive safely varies depending on how thevehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, roadconditions, external temperature. The driv-ing range may be less but may also be moreif an economical driving style is used.

If the vehicle is loaded with an averageweight and used under favorable conditions,

the distance for which it may be safe todrive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.

Vehicle handling with damaged tires

Vehicles driven with a damaged tire willhandle differently, potentially leading toconditions such as the following:

– Greater likelihood of swerving offcourse.

– Longer braking distances.

– Changed self-steering properties.

Modify your driving style. Avoid abruptsteering maneuvers or driving over obsta-cles, for instance curbs or potholes.

Final tire failure

Vibrations or loud noises while driving canindicate the final failure of a tire.

Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces ofthe tire could come loose and cause an acci-dent.

Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’sservice center or another qualified servicecenter or repair shop.

System limits

TemperatureThe tire inflation pressure depends on thetire's temperature.

Driving or exposure to the sun will increasethe tire's temperature, thus increasing thetire inflation pressure.

The tire inflation pressure is reduced whenthe tire temperature falls again.

These circumstances may cause a warningwhen temperatures fall very sharply.

Sudden tire pressure lossThe system cannot indicate sudden serioustire damage caused by external circumstan-ces.

Seite 157

Safety CONTROLS


Failure performing a resetThe system does not function properly if areset has not been carried out, for instancea flat tire is reported though tire inflationpressures are correct.

MalfunctionThe yellow warning light flashes andis then illuminated continuously. ACheck Control message is displayed.

It may not be possible to identify tire pres-sure losses.

Examples and recommendations in the fol-lowing situations:

– A wheel without TPM wheel electronics,for instance an emergency wheel, ismounted: have it checked by a dealer’sservice center or another qualified serv-ice center or repair shop as needed.

– Malfunction: have system checked by adealer’s service center or another quali-fied service center or repair shop.

– The system was unable to complete thereset. Perform a system reset again.

– Interference caused by systems or devi-ces with the same radio frequency: afterleaving the area of the interference, thesystem automatically becomes activeagain.

Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure MonitoringSystemEach tire, including the spare (if provided)should be checked monthly when cold andinflated to the inflation pressure recom-mended by the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la-bel. (If your vehicle has tires of a differentsize than the size indicated on the vehicleplacard or tire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.) As an added safety

feature, your vehicle has been equippedwith a tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated. Accordingly,when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-nates, you should stop and check your tiresas soon as possible, and inflate them to theproper pressure. Driving on a significantlyunder-inflated tire causes the tire to over-heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-infla-tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect the vehicle's han-dling and stopping ability. Please note thatthe TPMS is not a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver's responsi-bility to maintain correct tire pressure, evenif under-inflation has not reached the levelto trigger illumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale. Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunction indica-tor to indicate when the system is not oper-ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indi-cator is combined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects a mal-function, the telltale will flash for approxi-mately one minute and then remain contin-uously illuminated. This sequence willcontinue upon subsequent vehicle start-upsas long as the malfunction exists. When themalfunction indicator is illuminated, thesystem may not be able to detect or signallow tire pressure as intended. TPMS mal-functions may occur for a variety of rea-sons, including the installation of replace-ment or alternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMS from func-tioning properly. Always check the TPMSmalfunction telltale after replacing one ormore tires or wheels on your vehicle to en-sure that the replacement or alternate tiresand wheels allow the TPMS to continue tofunction properly.

Seite 158

CONTROLS Safety


Flat Tire Monitor FTM

ConceptThe system detects tire inflation pressureloss on the basis of rotation speed differen-ces between the individual wheels whiledriving.

In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss,the diameter and therefore the rotationalspeed of the corresponding wheel changes.The difference will be detected and reportedas a flat tire.

The system does not measure the actual in-flation pressure in the tires.

Functional requirementsThe following conditions must be met forthe system; otherwise, reliable flagging of aloss of tire inflation pressure is not assured:

– After a tire or wheel replacement, an ini-tialization was performed with the cor-rect tire inflation pressure.

– After the tire pressure was adjusted to anew value, an initialization was per-formed.

Status displayThe current status of the flat tire monitorcan be displayed, for instance whether theRPA is active.


1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Flat Tire Monitor"

The status is displayed.

Initialization requiredAn initialization must be performed in thefollowing situations:

– After the tire inflation pressure hasbeen adjusted.

– After a tire or wheel replacement.

Performing initializationWhen initializing, the set tire inflationpressures serve as reference values in orderto detect a flat tire. Initialization is startedby confirming the tire inflation pressures.

Do not initialize the system when drivingwith snow chains.


1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Flat Tire Monitor"

4. Start the engine but do not drive off.

5. Start the initialization with: "Performreset".

6. Drive away.

The initialization is completed while driv-ing, which can be interrupted at any time.

The initialization automatically continueswhen driving resumes.

Messages

General informationWhen a flat tire is indicated, DSC DynamicStability Control is switched on, if needed.

Safety information

Warning

A damaged regular tire with low or miss-ing tire inflation pressure impacts han-dling, such as steering and braking re-sponse. Run-flat tires can maintain limitedstability. There is a risk of accident. Do notcontinue driving if the vehicle is equippedwith normal tires. Follow the information

Seite 159

Safety CONTROLS


on run-flat tires and continued drivingwith these tires.

Indication of a flat tire


In addition, a symbol with a Check Controlmessage appears on the Control Display.


There is a flat tire or a majorloss in tire inflation pressure.

Measure1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.

Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-neuvers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted withnormal tires or run-flat tires.

Run-flat tires, refer to page 259, are la-beled with a circular symbol containingthe letters RSC marked on the tire'ssidewall.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires1. Identify the damaged tire.

To do this, check the tire inflation pres-sure in all four tires, for instance usingthe tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit.



If identification of flat tire damage isnot possible, please contact a dealer’sservice center or another qualified serv-ice center or repair shop.

2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tirekit or by changing the wheel.

Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tirekit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics.In this case, have the electronics checkedand replaced at the next opportunity.

Run-flat tires

Safety information

Warning


Maximum speed

You may continue driving with a damagedtire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire

If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-neuvers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of50 mph/80 km/h.

3. Check the tire inflation pressure in allfour tires at the next opportunity.


Seite 160

CONTROLS Safety


Possible driving range with adepressurized tire

The distance for which it may be possible todrive safely varies depending on how thevehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, roadconditions, external temperature. The driv-ing range may be less but may also be moreif an economical driving style is used.

If the vehicle is loaded with an averageweight and used under favorable conditions,the distance for which it may be safe todrive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.

Vehicle handling with damaged tires

Vehicles driven with a damaged tire willhandle differently, potentially leading toconditions such as the following:

– Greater likelihood of swerving offcourse.

– Longer braking distances.

– Changed self-steering properties.

Modify your driving style. Avoid abruptsteering maneuvers or driving over obsta-cles, for instance curbs or potholes.

Final tire failure

Vibrations or loud noises while driving canindicate the final failure of a tire.

Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces ofthe tire could come loose and cause an acci-dent.

Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’sservice center or another qualified servicecenter or repair shop.

System limitsThe system could be delayed or malfunctionin the following situations:

– A natural, even tire inflation pressureloss in all four tires will not be recog-nized. Therefore, check the tire inflationpressure regularly.

– Sudden serious tire damage caused byexternal circumstances cannot be recog-nized in advance.

– When the system has not been initial-ized.

– When driving on a snowy or slipperyroad surface.

– Sporty driving style: spinning tractionwheels, high lateral acceleration (drift-ing).

– When driving with snow chains.

Intelligent Safety

ConceptIntelligent Safety enables central operationof the driver assistance systems.

The intelligent safety systems can help pre-vent an imminent collision.

– Approach control warning with Citylight braking function, refer topage 162.

– Daytime pedestrian collision mitigation,refer to page 166.

Safety information

Warning


Seite 161

Safety CONTROLS


Warning

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as asubstitute for the driver’s personal judg-ment. Due to its limits, the system may notissue warnings or reactions, or these maybe issued late or in a manner that is notconsistent with their normal use. There isa risk of accident. Adjust driving style totraffic conditions. Watch traffic closelyand actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

Due to system limits, individual functionscan malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the Intelligent Safety systemsactivated. There is a risk of accident.Switch all Intelligent Safety systems offprior to tow-starting/towing.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Switching on/offSome Intelligent Safety systems are auto-matically active after every departure. SomeIntelligent Safety systems activate accord-ing to the last setting.

Press button briefly:

– The menu for the IntelligentSafety system is displayed. Thesystems are individuallyswitched off according to theirrespective settings.

– LED lights up orange or goes out respec-tive to their individual settings.

Adjust the settings as needed. The individ-ual settings are stored for the driver profilecurrently in use.

Press button again:

– All Intelligent Safety systemsare switched on.

– The LED lights up green.

Hold down button:

– All Intelligent Safety systemsare switched off.

– The LED goes out.

Approach control warningwith city light braking func-tion

ConceptThe system may prevent some accidents. Inthe event of an accident, the system may re-duce impact speed.

The system sounds a warning before an im-minent collision and activates brakes inde-pendently, if needed.

The Brake Assistant function activates andapplies the brakes with limited force andduration.

A camera at the base of the interior mirrorcontrols the system.

The approach control warning is availableeven if cruise control has been deactivated.

Seite 162

CONTROLS Safety


With the vehicle approaching another vehi-cle intentionally, the approach control warn-ing and braking are delayed in order toavoid false system reactions.

General informationThe system warns at two levels of an immi-nent danger of collision at speeds from ap-prox. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warn-ings may vary with the current drivingsituation.

Braking is performed at speeds up to ap-proximately 35 mph/60 km/h.

Detection range

Objects that the system can detect aretaken into account.

Safety information

Warning


Warning

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as asubstitute for the driver’s personal judg-ment. Due to its limits, the system may notissue warnings or reactions, or these maybe issued late or in a manner that is notconsistent with their normal use. There isa risk of accident. Adjust driving style totraffic conditions. Watch traffic closelyand actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning


Overview



Seite 163

Safety CONTROLS


Camera



Switching on/off

Switching on automaticallyThe system is automatically active after ev-ery driving off.

Switching on/off manually





Press button again:



Hold down button:



Setting the warning timeThe warning time can be set via the CentralInformation Display (CID).

1. "My MINI"


3. "Intelligent Safety"

4. "Warning time"


The selected warning time is stored for thedriver profile currently in use.

Warning with braking function

DisplayA warning symbol appears in the instru-ment cluster and in the Head-up Display if acollision with a detected vehicle is immi-nent.

Symbol Measure

Symbol lights up red: prewarn-ing.

Brake and increase distance.

Symbol flashes red and anacoustic signal sounds: acutewarning.

Brake and make an evasive ma-neuver, if necessary.

PrewarningThis warning is provided, for instance whenthere is impending danger of a collision orthe distance to the vehicle ahead is toosmall.

If a prewarning is provided, respond bybraking as warranted.

Seite 164

CONTROLS Safety


Acute warning with braking functionAn acute warning is displayed when thereis an imminent danger of collision due tothe vehicle approaching another object at ahigh speed.

The driver must intervene actively whenthere is an acute warning. If necessary, thedriver is assisted by a minor automaticbraking intervention in a possible risk ofcollision.

Acute warnings may be provided even whenthere has been no prior warning.

Braking interventionThe warning prompts the driver to inter-vene. During a warning, the maximum brak-ing force is used. In order to activate theBrake Assistant function, you must applythe brakes quickly and forcefully. If there isa risk of collision, the system may assistwith braking. When the vehicle is travelingat a low speed, the vehicle may come to acomplete stop.

Manual transmission: during a braking in-tervention up to a complete stop, the enginemay be shut down.

The driver may interrupt the braking inter-vention function by stepping on the acceler-ator pedal or by actively moving the steer-ing wheel.

The system’s ability to detect objects maybe limited in some circumstances. Refer tothe information in this Owner’s Manual re-garding the limitations of the system andactively intervene as warranted.

System limits

Safety information

Warning

The system is designed to operate in cer-tain conditions and circumstances. Due toconditions or other factors, the systemmay not respond. There may be a risk ofaccident or risk of damage to property. Ac-tively intervene as warranted. Refer to theinformation in this Owner’s Manual re-garding the scope of the system’s opera-tion and limitations.

Detection rangeThe system's detection potential is limited.

Thus, a system reaction might not come ormight come late.

The following situations may not be de-tected, for example:

– Slow moving vehicles when you ap-proach them at high speed.

– Vehicles that suddenly swerve in frontof you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.

– Vehicles with an unusual rear appear-ance.

– Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.

Functional limitationsThe system may not be fully functional inthe following situations:


– In tight curves.

– If the field of view of the camera or thewindshield is dirty or covered.

– If the driving stability control systemsare deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.

Seite 165

Safety CONTROLS


– Up to 10 seconds after the start of theengine via the Start/Stop button.


– If there are constant blinding effects be-cause of oncoming light, for instancefrom the sun low in the sky.

Warning sensitivityThe more sensitive the warning settingsare, the more warnings are displayed.Therefore, there may also be an excess ofpremature or unjustified warnings and reac-tions.

Daytime pedestrian collisionmitigation

ConceptThe system may prevent some accidentswith pedestrians.

When driving at city speeds, the systemwill issue a warning if there is imminentrisk of a collision with pedestrians, and sup-port this with a light braking function.

The camera at the base of the interior mir-ror controls the system.

General informationIn sufficiently bright conditions, the systemissues a warning of a possible risk of colli-sion with pedestrians in the speed rangefrom approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx.35 mph/60 km/h

The system reacts to people who are withinthe detection range of the system.

Detection range

The detection area in front of the vehicle isdivided into two areas:

– Central area, arrow 1, directly in front ofthe vehicle.

– Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right andleft of the central area.

A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo-cated within the central area. A warning isissued about pedestrians who are locatedwithin the extended area only if they aremoving in the direction of the central area.

Safety information

Warning


Warning

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as asubstitute for the driver’s personal judg-ment. Due to its limits, the system may notissue warnings or reactions, or these maybe issued late or in a manner that is notconsistent with their normal use. There isa risk of accident. Adjust driving style to

Seite 166

CONTROLS Safety


traffic conditions. Watch traffic closelyand actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning


Overview



Camera



Switching on/off

Switching on automaticallyThe system is automatically active after ev-ery driving off.

Switching on/off manually





Press button again:



Hold down button:



Warning with braking function

DisplayIf a collision with a detected person is im-minent, a warning symbol appears on theinstrument cluster and in the Head-up Dis-play.

The red symbol is displayed and asignal sounds.

Intervene immediately by braking ormake an evasive maneuver.

Seite 167

Safety CONTROLS


Braking interventionThe warning prompts the driver to inter-vene. During a warning, the maximum brak-ing force is used. In order to activate theBrake Assistant function, you must applythe brakes quickly and forcefully. If there isa risk of collision, the system may assistwith braking. When the vehicle is travelingat a low speed, the vehicle may come to acomplete stop.

Manual transmission: during a braking in-tervention up to a complete stop, the enginemay be shut down.

The driver may interrupt the braking inter-vention function by stepping on the acceler-ator pedal or by actively moving the steer-ing wheel.

The system’s ability to detect objects maybe limited in some circumstances. Refer tothe information in this Owner’s Manual re-garding the limitations of the system andactively intervene as warranted.

System limits

Safety information

Warning


Detection rangeThe detection potential of the camera is lim-ited.

Thus, a warning might not be issued or beissued late.

The following situations may not be de-tected, for example:

– Partially covered pedestrians.

– Pedestrians that are not detected assuch because of the viewing angle orcontour.

– Pedestrians outside of the detectionrange.

– Pedestrians having a body size less than32 in/80 cm.

Functional limitationsThe system may not be fully functional ormay not be available in the following situa-tions:




– If the driving stability control systemsare deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.

– Up to 10 seconds after the start of theengine via the Start/Stop button.


– If there are constant blinding effects be-cause of oncoming light, for instancefrom the sun low in the sky.

– When it is dark outside.

John Cooper Works GP:Manual Speed Limiter

ConceptThe system can be used to set a speed limit,for instance to prevent the vehicle from ex-ceeding speed limits.

Seite 168

CONTROLS Safety


General informationThe system can limit the speed, starting at avalue of 20 mph/30 km/h. The vehicle canbe driven at any speed below the set speedlimit.

Exceeding the speed limitWhen necessary, the speed limit can be in-tentionally overcome by stepping on thegas.

When the vehicle speed exceeds the setspeed limit, a warning is issued.

No brake interventionIf the set speed limit is reached or uninten-tionally exceeded, such as when drivingdownhill, the vehicle is not actively braked.

When the speed limit is set during a trip toa value below the current speed, the vehiclecoasts until its speed drops below the setspeed limit.

Overview

Steering wheel buttons, left

Button Function

System on/off.

Increase the speed limit.

Reduce the speed limit.

Operation

Switching on

Press the button on the steeringwheel.

The current speed is accepted as the speedlimit.

If the system is switched on while the vehi-cle is stationary or driving at low speeds,20 mph/30 km/h is set as the speed limit.

The set speed is displayed under the LIMITor LIM indicator.

When the speed limit is switched on, DSCDynamic Stability Control is switched on aswell, if needed.

Switching off


The system switches off automatically inthe following situations, for example:

– When shifting into reverse gear.

– When the engine is switched off.

– When cruise control is switched on.

– John Cooper Works GP: when activatingGP MODE or deactivating DSC.

The displays go out.

Changing the speed limit or button: press up or down repeat-

edly until the desired speed limit is set.

– or button: each time it is pressedto the resistance point, the speed limitincreases or decreases by 1 mph,1 km/h.

– or button: each time it is pressedpast the resistance point, the desiredspeed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.

When the speed limit is set during a trip toa value below the current speed, the vehiclecoasts until it drops to the set speed limit.

Exceeding the speed limitThe speed limit can be exceeded intention-ally. There is no acoustic warning in thiscase.

Seite 169

Safety CONTROLS


Press the accelerator pedal all the way downto intentionally exceed the set speed limit.

When the vehicle speed drops below the setspeed limit, the limit is automatically reacti-vated.

Warning when the speed limit isexceeded

Visual warningIf the set speed limit is exceeded, the LIMITor LIM indicator flashes while the vehiclespeed is greater than the speed limit.

Acoustic warning– If the speed limit is exceeded uninten-

tionally, a signal sounds.

– When the speed limit is reduced to be-low the vehicle speed while driving, asignal sounds after approx. 30 seconds.

– When the speed limit is intentionallyexceeded by stepping on the acceleratorpedal all the way down, there is no sig-nal.

Displays in the instrument clusterInstrument cluster without enhancedfeatures:

The desired speed is displayed underthe LIMIT indicator.

Instrument cluster with en-hanced features:

The desired speed is displayedunder the LIM indicator.

– The indicator does not light up: the sys-tem is switched off.

– The indicator lights up green: the sys-tem is active.

– Display flashes green: set speed limit ex-ceeded.

Displays in the Head-up DisplayThe information from the Speed Limiter canalso be displayed in the Head-up Display.

Brake force display

ConceptAdditional brake lights indicate emergencybraking to the traffic behind. This can re-duce the risk of a rear-end collision.

General information

– During normal brake application, thebrake lights light up.

– During heavy brake application, theflashers additionally light up.

Fatigue alert

ConceptThe system can detect decreasing alertnessor fatigue of the driver during long, monoto-nous trips, for instance on highways. In thissituation, it is recommended that the drivertakes a break.

Seite 170

CONTROLS Safety


Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitutefor the driver’s personal judgment in as-sessing one's physical state. An increasinglack of alertness or fatigue may not be de-tected or not be detected in time. There isa risk of accident. Make sure that thedriver is rested and alert. Adjust drivingstyle to traffic conditions.

FunctionThe system is switched on each time the en-gine is started and cannot be switched off.

After travel has begun, the system monitorscertain aspects of the driver's behavior, sothat decreasing alertness or fatigue can bedetected.

This procedure takes the following criteriainto account:

– Personal driving style, for instancesteering behavior.

– Driving conditions, for instance time,length of trip.

Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h,the system is active and can display a rec-ommendation to take a break.

Break recommendationIf the driver becomes less alert or fatigued,a message is displayed in the Control Dis-play with the recommendation to take abreak.

A recommendation to take a break is dis-played only once during an uninterruptedtrip.

After a break, another recommendation totake a break cannot be displayed until afterapproximately 45 minutes.

System limitsThe function may be limited in the follow-ing situations and may issue an incorrectwarning or no warning at all:

– When the clock is set incorrectly.

– When the vehicle speed is mainly belowabout 43 mph/70 km/h.

– With a sporty driving style, such as dur-ing rapid acceleration or when corner-ing fast.

– In active driving situations, such aswhen changing lanes frequently.

– When the road surface is poor.

– In the event of strong side winds.

The system is reset approx. 45 minutes af-ter parking the vehicle, for instance in thecase of a break during longer trips on high-ways.

PostCrash – iBrake

ConceptIn the event of an accident, the system canbring the vehicle to a halt automaticallywithout intervention by the driver in cer-tain situations. This can reduce the risk of afurther collision and the consequencesthereof.

At standstillAfter coming to a halt, the brake is releasedautomatically. Secure the vehicle againstrolling.

Harder vehicle brakingIn certain situations, it can be necessary tobring the vehicle to a halt more quickly thanthe Brake Assistant allows.

To do this, quickly apply extra force to thebrake. For a brief period, the braking pres-sure will be higher than the braking pres-

Seite 171

Safety CONTROLS


sure that is achieved by the automatic brak-ing function. This interrupts automaticbraking.

Interrupting automatic brakingIt can be necessary to interrupt automaticbraking in certain situations, for instancefor an evasive maneuver.

Interrupt automatic braking:

– By pressing the brake pedal.

– By pressing the accelerator pedal.

Seite 172

CONTROLS Safety


Driving stability control systems



Antilock Braking System ABS

ABS prevents locking of the wheels duringbraking.

The vehicle maintains its steering powereven during full brake applications, whichincreases the active safety.

ABS is ready when vehicle is ready to drive.

Brake assistant

When you apply the brakes rapidly, this sys-tem automatically boosts the vehicle brak-ing capability to the furthest possible ex-tent. It reduces the braking distance to aminimum during an emergency stop. Thissystem utilizes all of the capabilities pro-vided by the Antilock Brake System ABS.

Do not reduce the pressure on the brakepedal for the duration of the emergencystop.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control

ConceptWithin the physical limits, the system helpsto keep the vehicle on a steady course byreducing engine speed and by applyingbrakes to the individual wheels.

General informationDSC detects the following unstable drivingconditions, for instance:

– Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteer-ing.

– Loss of traction of the front wheels,which can lead to understeering.

Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer topage 174, is a version of the DSC where for-ward momentum is optimized.

John Cooper Works GP: GP MODE, refer topage 175, is one of the versions of the DSCthat is optimized for forward momentum.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitutefor the driver’s personal judgment in as-sessing the traffic conditions. Based onthe limits of the system, it cannot inde-pendently react to all traffic situations.There is a risk of accident. Adjust drivingstyle to traffic conditions. Watch trafficclosely and actively intervene where ap-propriate.

Seite 173

Driving stability control systems CONTROLS


Warning

When driving with a roof load, for in-stance with roof-mounted luggage rack,the vehicle's center of gravity is higher,which increases the risk of the vehicle tip-ping in critical driving situations. Theremay be a risk of accident or risk of damageto property. Do not deactivate DSC Dy-namic Stability Control when driving withroof load.

Indicator/warning lightsThe indicator light flashes: DSC con-trols the drive and braking forces.

The indicator light lights up: DSC hasmalfunctioned.

Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF

General informationWhen DSC is deactivated, driving stabilityis reduced during acceleration and whendriving in curves.

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSCagain as soon as possible.

Deactivating DSC

Press and hold this button but notlonger than approx. 10 seconds, un-til the indicator light for DSC OFF

lights up in the instrument cluster and dis-plays DSC OFF.

DSC is switched off.

Activating DSC

Press the button.

DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicatorlight go out.

Indicator/warning lightsWhen DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis-played in the instrument cluster.

The indicator light lights up: DSC isdeactivated.

Automatic activationWhen DSC is deactivated, automatic activa-tion occurs in the following situations:

– The vehicle has a flat tire.

– When activating cruise control in theTRACTION or DSC OFF settings.

– John Cooper Works GP: when activatingcruise control in the GP MODE or DSCOFF settings.

DTC Dynamic Traction Con-trol

ConceptDTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stabil-ity Control where forward momentum is op-timized.

The system ensures maximum headway onspecial road conditions, for instance unp-lowed snowy roads or loose road surfaces,but with somewhat limited vehicle stability.

When DTC is activated, the vehicle hasmaximum traction. Driving stability is lim-ited during acceleration and when drivingin curves.

Drive carefully.

You may find it useful to briefly activateDTC under the following special circum-stances:

– When driving in slush or on uncleared,snow-covered roads.

– When driving off from deep snow orloose ground.

Seite 174

CONTROLS Driving stability control systems


– When driving with snow chains.

Deactivating/activating DTCDynamic Traction Control

Activating DTC

Press the button.

TRACTION is displayed in the in-strument cluster and the indicator light forDSC OFF lights up.

Deactivating DTC

Press the button again.

TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica-tor light go out.

John Cooper Works GP: GPMODE

ConceptFor the John Cooper Works GP, GP MODEreplaces the Dynamic Traction Control DTC.

GP MODE is a mode of the Dynamic Stabil-ity Control DSC that has been optimized fordriving on racetracks and makes it possibleto drive on a dry roads with high longitudi-nal and lateral acceleration but with limitedvehicle stability. The system does not inter-vene with braking interventions on thewheels for stabilization until the absolutelimit range is reached.

When the GP MODE is activated, the agilityof the vehicle is increased further by a highengine speed.

Activating/deactivating GP MODE

Activating GP MODE

Press the button.

GP MODE is displayed in the instrumentcluster and the indicator light for DSC OFFlights up. In addition, a Check Control mes-sage is displayed.

Deactivating GP MODE

Press the button again.

GP MODE and DSC OFF indicatorlight go out.

Performance Control

Performance Control enhances the agility ofthe vehicle.

To increase maneuverability, wheels arebraked individually when a sporty drivingstyle is used.

Adaptive chassis

ConceptThe tuning of the suspension can bechanged with the system.

The system offers several different pro-grams.

The programs are selected via the MINIDriving Modes switch.

Programs

MID/GREENBalanced tuning of the shock absorbers formore comfort.

SPORTConsistently sporty tuning of the shock ab-sorbers for greater driving agility.

Seite 175



MINI Driving Modes switch

ConceptThe MINI Driving Modes switch helps tofine-tune the vehicle's settings and features.

Choose between three different programs.

Pressing the MINI Driving Modes switchwill activate the particular program.

Operating the programs

Switch Program

SPORT

MID

GREEN

MIDMID provides balanced tuning.

With each starting operation, MID is acti-vated using the Start/Stop button.

GREEN

ConceptGREEN provides consistent tuning to maxi-mize range.

Activating GREENPress the MINI Driving Modes switchdownward until GREEN is displayed in theinstrument cluster.

Configuring GREEN

Via MINI Driving Modes switch

1. Activate GREEN.

2. "Configure GREEN"

3. Configure the program.

This configuration is retrieved whenGREEN is activated.

Via the Central Information Display (CID)

1. "My MINI"


3. If necessary, "Driving mode"



This configuration is retrieved whenGREEN is activated.

SPORT

ConceptConsistently sporty tuning of the drivetrainfor greater driving agility.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, thetuning of the chassis and suspension alsochanges and SPORT can be individuallyconfigured.

The configuration is stored for the driverprofile currently in use.

Activating SPORTPress the MINI Driving Modes switch up-ward until SPORT is displayed in the instru-ment cluster.

Configuring SPORTVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. If necessary, "Driving mode"

4. "Configure SPORT"


This configuration is retrieved when SPORTis activated.

Seite 176

CONTROLS Driving stability control systems


Configuring driving programSettings can be made for the following driv-ing programs in Driving mode:

– GREEN, refer to page 176.

– SPORT, refer to page 176.

Displays

Program selection

Pressing the MINI DrivingModes switch displays a list ofprograms, which can be se-lected.

Selected program

The instrument cluster dis-plays the selected program.

Drive-off assistant

ConceptThis system supports driving off on uphillgrades. The parking brake is not required.

Driving off with the drive-offassistant1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot

brake.

2. Release the foot brake and drive offwithout delay.

After the foot brake is released, the vehicleis held in place for approx. 2 seconds.

Servotronic

Servotronic is a speed-dependent powersteering function.

The system provides the steering force withmore support at low speeds than at higherones. This makes it easier to park, for in-stance, and makes steering firmer whendriving at faster speeds.

Furthermore, the steering force adapts ac-cording to the driving program, so that afirm, sporty feel or a comfortable steeringresponse is conveyed.

Seite 177



Driving comfort



Camera-based cruise control

ConceptUsing this system, a desired speed and adistance to a vehicle ahead can be adjustedusing the buttons on the steering wheel.

The system maintains the desired speed onclear roads. The vehicle accelerates orbrakes automatically.

If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the sys-tem adjusts the speed of your vehicle sothat the set distance to the vehicle ahead ismaintained. The speed is adjusted as far asthe given situation allows.

The distance can be adjusted in severalsteps. For safety reasons, it depends on therespective speed.

General informationA camera on the interior mirror is used todetect vehicles driving ahead.

Depending on the settings, the characteris-tics of cruise control many change in cer-tain ranges.

Safety information

Warning


Warning

The desired speed can be incorrectly ad-justed or called up by mistake. There is arisk of accident. Adjust the desired speedto the traffic conditions. Watch trafficclosely and actively intervene where ap-propriate.

Warning

Risk of accident due to too high speed dif-ferences to other vehicles, for instance inthe following situations:

– When fast approaching a slowly mov-ing vehicle.

– Vehicle suddenly swerving into ownlane.

– When fast approaching standing ve-hicles.

There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.Watch traffic closely and actively inter-vene where appropriate.

Seite 178

CONTROLS Driving comfort


Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

Cruise control on/off, refer topage 179.

Store/maintain speed, refer topage 180.

Pause cruise control, refer topage 179.

Continue cruise control with thelast setting, refer to page 181.

Reduce distance, refer topage 181.

Increase the distance, refer topage 181.

Increase speed, refer topage 180.

Reduce speed, refer to page 180.

Buttons are arranged according to vehicle'sseries, optional features and country speci-fications.

Camera




Speed rangeThe system is best used on well-constructedroads.

The system is functional at speeds begin-ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

The max. speed that can be set is85 mph/140 km/h.

Active cruise control is paused below ap-prox. 20 mph/30 km/h. The system does notbrake to a stop.

Switching on/off and interruptingcruise control

Switching on


Instrument cluster without enhancedfeatures:

Display in the instrument clusterlights up.


Display in the instrument clusterlights up. The current speed is adopted asdesired speed and displayed with symbol.


Display in the instrumentcluster lights up. The currentspeed is adopted as desired

speed and displayed with symbol.

Cruise control is active and maintains theset speed.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switchedon, if necessary.

Seite 179

Driving comfort CONTROLS


Switching off


The displays go out. The stored desiredspeed is deleted.

Interrupting manually


Interrupting automaticallyThe system is automatically interrupted inthe following situations:

– When the driver applies the brakes.

– Manual transmission: when the clutchpedal is depressed for a few seconds orreleased while a gear is not engaged.

– If selector lever position N is set.

– Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti-vated or DSC Dynamic Stability Controlis deactivated.

– John Cooper Works GP: when GP MODEis activated or DSC Dynamic StabilityControl is deactivated.

– If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter-venes.

– If the detection range of the camera isimpaired, for instance by soiling, heavyprecipitation or glare effects from thesun.

– If the vehicle in front decelerates belowa speed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

Setting the speed

Maintaining/storing the speedPress or button in the interruptedstate.

When the system is switched on, the cur-rent speed is maintained and stored as thedesired speed.


The stored speed is displayed by thesymbol in the Info Display of the instrumentcluster.


The stored speed is displayed.


The speed can also be stored as follows:

Press the button.

Changing the speed or button: press until the desired

speed is set.

If active, the displayed speed is stored andthe vehicle reaches the stored speed whenthe road is clear.

– or button: each time it is pressedto the point of resistance, the desiredspeed increases or decreases by approx.1 mph/1 km/h.


or button: hold down to repeat theaction.

Seite 180



Adjusting the distance

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitutefor the driver’s personal judgment. Due tothe system limits, braking can be late.There may be a risk of accident or risk ofdamage to property. Be aware to the trafficsituation at all times. Adjust the distanceto the traffic and weather conditions andmaintain the prescribed safety distance,possibly by braking.

Reduce distance

Press the button repeatedly untilthe desired distance is set.


The set distance is briefly displayedin the left part of the Info Display of the in-strument cluster.

Increase the distance

Press the button repeatedly untilthe desired distance is set.


The set distance is briefly displayedin the left part of the Info Display of the in-strument cluster.

Continuing cruise control

General informationAn interrupted cruise control can be contin-ued by calling up the stored speed.

Make sure that the difference between cur-rent speed and stored speed is not too largebefore calling up the stored speed. Other-wise, unintentional braking or acceleratingmay occur.

In the following cases, the stored speedvalue is deleted and cannot be called upagain:

– When the system is switched off.

– When the ignition is switched off.

Calling up the stored speed anddistance

Press the button with the system in-terrupted. Cruise control is contin-ued with the stored values. The in-

strument cluster briefly displays theselected distance.

Switching distance control on/off

Safety information

Warning

The system does not react to traffic driv-ing ahead of you, but instead maintainsthe stored speed. There may be a risk ofaccident or risk of damage to property. Ad-just the desired speed to the traffic condi-tions and brake as needed.

Switching distance control offDistance control can be switched off and onwhen driving with cruise control activated.

Press and hold this button.

Or:

Press and hold this button.

Seite 181



The indicator light in the instrumentcluster lights up.

To switch distance control back on, pressone of the two buttons again briefly.

After changing over distance control, aCheck Control message is displayed.


Desired speed and stored speed


In addition to the indicator light, thedesired speed is displayed in the Info Dis-play.

– Display lights up green: system is active,the display indicates the desired speed.

– Display lights up orange: system is in-terrupted, the display indicates thestored speed.

– No display: system is switched off.


– Display lights up green:system is active, the dis-play indicates the desiredspeed.

– Speed value is illuminated gray: systemis interrupted.


If no speed is indicated, it is possible thatthe conditions necessary for operation arenot currently fulfilled.

Distance to vehicle ahead of you

Distance display

Distance 1

Distance 2

Distance 3

Distance 4

This value is set automatically af-ter the system is switched on.

Instrument clusters without enhanced fea-tures: selected distance from the vehicledriving ahead is briefly displayed in the lefthand portion of the Info Display.

Detected vehicle


Symbol lights up orange: a vehiclehas been detected ahead of you.


Vehicle symbol is displayed: avehicle has been detectedahead of you.



Symbol flashes orange.

Instrument cluster with enhancedfeatures:

Vehicle symbol flashes.

Seite 182



The conditions are not adequate for the sys-tem to work.

The system was deactivated but applies thebrakes until you actively resume control bypressing on the brake pedal or acceleratorpedal.

Symbol flashes red and a signalsounds:

Brake and make an evasive maneu-ver, if necessary.

System interrupted without detectedvehicle.

System interrupted with detected ve-hicle.

Displays in the Head-up DisplayThe information from Active Cruise Controlcan also be displayed in the Head-up Dis-play.

System limits

Detection range

The detection capacity of the system andthe automatic braking capacity are limited.

Two-wheeled vehicles for instance mightnot be detected.

DecelerationThe system does not decelerate in the fol-lowing situations:

– For pedestrians, cyclists or similarlyslow-moving road users.

– For red traffic lights.

– For cross traffic.

– For oncoming traffic.

– Unlit vehicles or vehicles with nonwork-ing lighting at night.

Swerving vehicles

A vehicle driving in front of you is not de-tected until it is completely within the samelane as your vehicle.

If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenlyswerves into your lane, the system may notbe able to automatically restore the selecteddistance. It may not be possible to restorethe selected distance in certain situations,including if you are driving significantlyfaster than vehicles driving ahead of you,for instance when rapidly approaching atruck. When a vehicle driving ahead of youis reliably detected, the system requeststhat the driver intervene by braking andcarrying out evasive maneuvers, if needed.

Seite 183



Cornering

When the desired speed is too high for acurve, the speed is reduced slightly. Be-cause curves may not be anticipated in ad-vance, drive into a curve at an appropriatespeed.

The system has a limited detection range.Situations can arise in tight curves where avehicle driving ahead will not be detectedor will be detected very late.

When you approach a curve the system maybriefly report vehicles in the next lane dueto the bend of the curve. If the system de-celerates you may compensate it by brieflyaccelerating. After releasing the acceleratorpedal the system is reactivated and controlsspeed independently.

WeatherThe following restrictions can occur underunfavorable weather or light conditions:

– Poorer vehicle recognition.

– Short-term interruptions for vehiclesthat are already recognized.

Examples of unfavorable weather or lightconditions:

– Wet conditions.

– Snowfall.

– Slush.

– Fog.

– Glare.

Drive attentively, and react to the currenttraffic situation. If necessary, intervene ac-tively, for instance by braking, steering orevading.

Engine powerThe desired speed may not be maintainedon uphill grades if engine power is insuffi-cient.

MalfunctionA Check Control message is displayed if thesystem fails or was automatically deacti-vated.

The system may not be fully functional inthe following situations:

– When an object was not correctly de-tected.




– When driving toward bright lights.

– Up to 20 seconds after the start of theengine, via the Start/Stop button.


Seite 184



Cruise control

ConceptUsing this system, a desired speed can beadjusted using the buttons on the steeringwheel. The system maintains the desiredspeed. The system accelerates and brakesautomatically as needed.

General informationThe system is functional at speeds begin-ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

Depending on the settings, the cruise con-trol settings many change under certainconditions.

Safety information

Warning


Warning

The use of the system can lead to an in-creased risk of accidents in the followingsituations, for instance:

– On winding roads.

– In heavy traffic.

– On slippery roads, in fog, snow, orwet conditions, or on a loose roadsurface.

There may be a risk of accident or risk ofdamage to property. Only use the system ifdriving at constant speed is possible.

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

Cruise control on/off, refer topage 185.

Store speed, refer to page 186.

Pause cruise control, refer topage 185.

Continue cruise control with thelast setting, refer to page 187.

Increase speed, refer topage 186.

Reduce speed, refer to page 186.

Switching on/off and interruptingcruise control

Switching on



The indicator light in the instrumentcluster lights up.


The current speed is adopted as thedesired speed and is displayed with thesymbol in the instrument cluster.

Seite 185




Display in the instrumentcluster lights up. The currentspeed is adopted as the speed

limit.

Cruise control is active and maintains theset speed.


Switching off


The displays go out. The stored desiredspeed is deleted.

Interrupting manually

When active, press the button onthe steering wheel.

Interrupting automaticallyThe system is automatically interrupted inthe following situations:

– When the driver applies the brakes.

– If the clutch pedal is depressed for a fewseconds or released while a gear is notengaged.

– If the gear engaged is too high for thecurrent speed.

– If selector lever position N is set.

– Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti-vated or DSC Dynamic Stability Controlis deactivated.

– John Cooper Works GP: when GP MODEis activated or DSC Dynamic StabilityControl is deactivated.

– If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter-venes.

Setting the speed

Maintaining/storing the speedPress or button in the interruptedstate.

When the system is switched on, the cur-rent speed is maintained and stored as thedesired speed.

The stored speed is displayed in the instru-ment cluster.


The speed can also be stored as follows:

Press the button.

Changing the speed or button: press until the desired

speed is set.

If active, the displayed speed is stored andthe vehicle reaches the stored speed whenthe road is clear.

– or button: each time it is pressedto the point of resistance, the desiredspeed increases or decreases by approx.1 mph/1 km/h.


– or button: press button to resist-ance point and hold. The vehicle acceler-ates or decelerates without pressure onthe accelerator pedal. After the button isreleased, the vehicle maintains its finalspeed. Pressing the switch beyond theresistance point causes the vehicle toaccelerate more rapidly.

Seite 186



Continuing cruise control

General informationAn interrupted cruise control can be contin-ued by calling up the stored speed.

Make sure that the difference between cur-rent speed and stored speed is not too largebefore calling up the stored speed. Other-wise, unintentional braking or acceleratingmay occur.

Calling up the stored speed


The stored speed is reached again and main-tained.


Indicator light


Depending on how the vehicle isequipped, the indicator light in the instru-ment cluster indicates whether the systemis switched on.


The indicator in the instru-ment cluster lights up: the sys-tem is switched on.

Desired speed and stored speed


The desired speed is displayed to-gether with the symbol.

– Display lights up green: system is active,the display indicates the desired speed.

– Display lights up orange: system is in-terrupted, the display indicates thestored speed.



The desired speed is displayedtogether with the symbol.

– Display lights up green:system is active, the dis-play indicates the desiredspeed.

– Display lights up gray: system is inter-rupted, the display indicates the storedspeed.


Instrument cluster without enhanced fea-tures:

If no speed is indicated, it is possible thatthe conditions necessary for operation arenot currently fulfilled.

System limits

Engine powerThe desired speed is also maintained down-hill, but may not be maintained on uphillgrades if engine power is insufficient.

PDC Park Distance Control

ConceptPDC is a support when parking. The systemdetects objects behind the vehicle. If the ve-hicle is equipped with front PDC, objects infront of the vehicle are detected too. Ob-jects that you are approaching slowly are in-dicated by signal tones and a visual display.

Seite 187



General informationThe ultrasound sensors for measuring thedistances are located in the bumpers.

The delete range, depending on obstaclesand environmental conditions, is approx.6 ft/2 m.

An acoustic warning is first given in the fol-lowing situations:

– By the front middle sensors and the twocorner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cmfrom the object.

– By the rear middle sensors at ap-prox. 5 ft/1.50 m from the object.

– When a collision is imminent.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitutefor the driver’s personal judgment in as-sessing the traffic conditions. There is arisk of accident. Adjust driving style totraffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehi-cle surroundings closely and actively in-tervene where appropriate.

Warning

Due to high speeds when PDC Park Dis-tance Control is activated, the warning canbe delayed due to physical circumstances.There is a risk of injury or risk of damageto property. Avoid approaching an objecttoo fast. Avoid driving off fast while PDCPark Distance Control is not yet active.

Overview

With front PDC: button in vehicle

Park assistance button

Ultrasound sensors

Ultrasound sensors of thePDC, for instance in the bump-ers.

Functional requirementsEnsure full functionality:

– Do not cover sensors, for instance withstickers, bicycle racks or similar.

– Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.

Switching on/off

Switching on automaticallyThe system switches on automatically in thefollowing situations:

– If selector lever position R is engagedwhen the engine is running.

The rearview camera also switches on.

– With front PDC: when obstacles are de-tected behind or in front of the vehicleby PDC and the speed is slower than ap-prox. 2.5 mph/4 km/h.

Seite 188



With front PDC: automatic activation on ob-stacle detection can be switched off. Via theCentral Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Parking"

4. "Automatic PDC activation": dependingon the vehicle equipment.

5. "Automatic PDC activation"

The setting is stored for the driver pro-file currently used.

Automatic deactivation duringforward travelThe system switches off when a certaindriving distance or speed is exceeded.

Switch the system back on, if needed.

With front PDC: switching on/offmanually

Press the park assistance button.

– On: the LED lights up.

– Off: the LED goes out.

The rearview camera image is displayed ifthe reverse gear is engaged when pressingthe park assistance button.

Depending on the equipment version, thesystem cannot be switched off manually ifthe reverse gear is engaged.

Warning

Signal tonesAn intermittent tone indicates when the ve-hicle is approaching an object. E.g., when anobject is detected to the left rear of the ve-hicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rearspeaker.

The shorter the distance to the object, theshorter the intervals.

When the distance to a detected object isless than approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a contin-uous tone is sounded.

With front PDC: when objects are simulta-neously located both in front of and behindthe vehicle, an alternating continuous sig-nal is sounded.

The signal tone is switched off, when selec-tor lever position P is engaged on vehicleswith Steptronic transmission.

VolumeThe ratio of the PDC signal tone volume tothe entertainment volume can be adjusted.

1. "My MINI"


3. "Tone"

4. "Volume settings"

5. "PDC"

6. Set the desired value.


Visual warningThe approach of the vehicle to an object canbe shown on the Control Display. Objectsthat are farther away are already displayedon the Control Display before a signalsounds.

A display appears as soon as Park DistanceControl (PDC) is activated.

The range of the sensors is represented incolors: red, green and yellow.

When the image of the rearview camera isdisplayed, the switch can be made to PDC:

"Rear view camera"

Seite 189



System limits

Safety information

Warning


With rear luggage rack or when thetrailer power socket is in useThe rear PDC functions are switched off.


Limits of ultrasonic measurementThe detection of objects with ultrasonicmeasurements can run into physical limits,for instance under the following conditions:

– For small children and animals.

– For persons with certain clothing, for in-stance coats.

– With external interference of the ultra-sound, for instance from passing vehi-cles or loud machines.

– When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam-aged or out of position.

– If cargo protrudes.

– Under certain weather conditions suchas high relative humidity, wet condi-tions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strongwind.

– With tow bars and trailer couplings ofother vehicles.

– With thin or wedge-shaped objects.

– With moving objects.

– With elevated, protruding objects suchas ledges or cargo.

– With objects with corners and sharpedges.

– With objects with a fine surface struc-ture such as fences.

– For objects with porous surfaces.

– Low objects already displayed, for in-stance curbs, can move into the blindarea of the sensors before or after a con-tinuous tone sounds.

False warningsThe system may issue a warning under thefollowing conditions even though there isno obstacle within the detection range:

– In heavy rain.

– When sensors are very dirty or coveredwith ice.

– When sensors are covered in snow.

– On rough road surfaces.

– On uneven surfaces, such as speedbumps.

– In large buildings with right angles andsmooth walls, for instance in under-ground garages.

– In automatic vehicle washes.

– Due to heavy exhaust.

– Due to other ultrasound sources, for in-stance sweeping machines, high pres-sure steam cleaners or neon lights.

The malfunction is signaled by a contin-uous tone alternating between the frontand rear speakers. As soon as the mal-function due to other ultrasound sourcesis no longer present, the system is againfully functional.

With front PDC: to reduce false alarms,switch off automatic PDC activation on ob-

Seite 190



stacle detection, for instance in vehiclewashes; see Switching on/off.

MalfunctionA Check Control message is displayed in theinstrument cluster.

Red symbol is displayed, and therange of the sensors is dimmed onthe Control Display.

PDC has failed. Have the system checked bya dealer's service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.

Rearview camera

ConceptThe rearview camera provides assistance inparking and maneuvering backwards. Thearea behind the vehicle is shown on theControl Display.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitutefor the driver’s personal judgment in as-sessing the traffic conditions. There is arisk of accident. Adjust driving style totraffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehi-cle surroundings closely and actively in-tervene where appropriate.

Overview

Depending on the vehicle equipment:button in the vehicle


Camera

The camera lens is located in the handle ofthe tailgate.

The image quality may be impaired by dirt.If necessary, clean the camera lens.

Switching on/off

Switching on automaticallyThe system is switched on automatically ifselector lever position R is engaged whenthe engine is running.

Automatic deactivation duringforward travelThe system switches off when a certaindriving distance or speed is exceeded.

Seite 191



Switch the system back on, if needed.

Depending on the vehicle equipment:switching on/off manually


– On: the LED lights up.

– Off: the LED goes out.

The parking assistance functions are shownon the Control Display.

Switching the view via the CentralInformation Display (CID)If the rearview camera view is not dis-played, change the view via the Central In-formation Display (CID):

"Rear view camera"

The rearview camera image is displayed.

Display on the Control Display

Functional requirements– The rearview camera is switched on.

– The tailgate is fully closed.

– Keep the recording range of the cameraclear.

Protruding cargo or carrier systems thatare not connected to a trailer powersocket can lead to malfunctions.

Activating assistance functionsMore than one assistance function can beactive at the same time.

The zoom function for trailer operation canonly be activated separately.

– Parking aid lines

"Parking aid lines"

Lanes and turning radius lines are indi-cated.

– Obstacle marking

"Obstacle marking"

Obstacles are marked, depending on thevehicle equipment.

– Trailer hitch

"Trailer hitch - zoom"

A zoomed image of the trailer hitch isshown.

Pathway lines

Pathway lines can be superimposed on theimage of the rearview camera.

Pathway lines help you to estimate thespace required when parking and maneu-vering on level roads.

Pathway lines depend on the current steer-ing angle and are continuously adjusted tothe steering wheel movements.

Turning radius lines

Turning radius lines can be superimposedon the image of the rearview camera.

Turning radius lines show the course of thesmallest possible turning radius on a levelroad.

Seite 192



Only one turning radius line is displayed af-ter the steering wheel is turned past a cer-tain angle.

Obstacle marking

Depending on the vehicle equipment, obsta-cle markings can be faded into the image ofthe rearview camera.

The colored thresholds of the obstacle mark-ings match the markings of the PDC ParkDistance Control.

Zoom on trailer hitchTo make it easier to attach a trailer, you canzoom in on the view of the trailer hitch.

Two static circle segments show the dis-tance between the trailer and the trailerhitch.

A docking line dependent on the steeringangle helps with aiming for the trailer withthe trailer hitch.

The zoom function can be activated whenthe camera is switched on.

When zooming in, remember that the viewmay no longer show certain obstacles.

If necessary, the zoom function can also beactivated when a rear luggage rack is used.

Parking using pathway and turningradius lines1. Position the vehicle so that the turning

radius lines lead to within the limits ofthe parking space.

2. Turn the steering wheel to the pointwhere the pathway line covers the cor-responding turning radius line.

Display settings

BrightnessWith the rearview camera switched on:


2. Turn the Controller until the desired set-ting is reached and press the Controller.

Seite 193



ContrastWith the rearview camera switched on:


2. Turn the Controller until the desired set-ting is reached and press the Controller.

System limits

Detection of objectsVery low obstacles or high, protruding ob-jects such as ledges may not be recognizedby the system.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, someassistance functions also consider data fromthe PDC Park Distance Control.

Follow the notes in the PDC Park DistanceControl chapter.

The objects displayed on the Control Dis-play may be closer than they appear. There-fore, do not estimate the distance from theobjects on the display.

Parking assistant

Concept

This system assists the driver in parkingparallel to the road.

General informationParking assistant handling is divided intothree steps:

– Switching on and activating.

– Parking space search.

– Parking.

Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaceson both sides of the vehicle.

The parking assistant calculates the bestpossible parking line and takes control ofsteering during the parking procedure.

System status and instructions on requiredactions are displayed on the Control Dis-play.

A component of the parking assistant is thePDC Park Distance Control.

Safety information

Warning


Warning

If the trailer hitch is used, the driver assis-tance system can cause damage due tocovered sensors. There may be a risk of ac-cident or risk of damage to property. Thedriver assistance system should not beused during trailer towing or if the trailerhitch is used, for instance bicycle rack.

Seite 194



NOTICE

The parking assistant can steer the vehicleover or onto curbs. There is a risk of dam-age to property. Watch traffic closely andactively intervene where appropriate.

The safety information of the PDC Park Dis-tance Control applies in addition.

Overview



Ultrasound sensors

The ultrasound sensors for measuring park-ing spaces are located on the wheel hous-ing.


Ultrasound sensorsEnsure full functionality:

– Do not cover sensors, for instance withstickers.

– Keep the sensors clean and unob-structed.

For measuring parking spaces– Maximum speed while driving forward

approx. 22 mph/35 km/h.

– Maximum distance to row of parked ve-hicles: 5 ft/1.5 m.

Suitable parking space– Gaps behind an object that has a min.

length of 5 ft/1.5 m.

– Gap between two objects with a mini-mum length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

– Min. length of gap between two objects:your vehicle's length plus approx.3.3 ft/1.0 m.

– Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

For parking– Doors and tailgate are closed.

– The parking brake is released.

– When parking in parking spaces on thedriver's side, the corresponding turn sig-nal must be switched on.

Switching on and activating

Switching on with the button


The LED lights up.

The current status of the parking spacesearch is indicated on the Control Display.

Seite 195



Parking assistant is activated automati-cally.

Switching on with reverse gearShift into reverse.

The current status of the parking spacesearch is indicated on the Control Display.

To activate: "Parking Assistant"

Display on the Control Display

System activated/deactivated

Symbol Meaning

Gray: the system is not availa-ble.

White: the system is availablebut not activated.

The system is activated.

Parking space search and systemstatus

– Symbol P on the vehicle image: the park-ing assistant is activated and the park-ing space search is active.

– Control Display shows suitable parkingspaces at the edge of the road next tothe vehicle symbol. When the parkingassistant is active, suitable parkingspaces are highlighted.

– The parking procedure isactive. The system takesover the steering.

– Parking space search is always activewhenever the vehicle is moving forwardslow and straight, even if the system isdeactivated. When the system is deacti-vated, the displays on the Control Dis-play are shown in gray.

Parking using the parking assistant

Parking

1. Press the park assistance button orshift into reverse gear to switch on theparking assistant, refer to page 195. Ac-tivate the parking assistant, if needed.

Parking assistant is activated.

2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at aspeed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/hand at a distance of maximum5 ft/1.5 m.

The status of the parking space searchand possible parking spaces are dis-played on the display, refer to page 196.

3. Follow the instructions on the display.

The best possible parking position willcome after gear change on the station-ary vehicle - wait for the automaticsteering wheel move.

The end of the parking procedure is in-dicated on the display.

4. Adjust the parking position yourself, ifneeded.

Interrupting manuallyThe parking assistant can be interrupted atany time:

– Press the park assistance button.

Seite 196



– "Parking Assistant"

Interrupting automaticallyThe system is interrupted automatically inthe following situations:

– If the driver grasps the steering wheelor takes over steering.

– If a gear is selected that does not matchthe instruction on the display.

– If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.6 mph/10 km/h.

– Possibly on snow-covered or slipperyroad surfaces.

– If a maximum number of parking at-tempts or the time taken for parking isexceeded.

– If the PDC Park Distance Control dis-plays clearances that are too small.

– When switching into other functions ofthe radio.


ResumingAn interrupted parking procedure can becontinued, if needed.

Reactivate the parking assistant, refer topage 195, and follow the instructions on thedisplay.

Switching offThe system can be switched off as follows:

– Press the park assistance button.

– Switching off the ignition.

System limits

Safety information

Warning


No parking assistanceThe parking assistant does not offer assis-tance in the following situations:


– With mounted rear luggage rack.

Functional limitationsThe system may not be fully functional inthe following situations:

– On bumpy road surfaces such as gravelroads.

– On slippery ground.

– With accumulations of leaves/snow inthe parking space.

– With a mounted emergency wheel.

– With ditches or edges, for instance anedge of a port.

Limits of ultrasonic measurementThe detection of objects with ultrasonicmeasurements can run into physical limits,for instance under the following conditions:

– For small children and animals.

– For persons with certain clothing, for in-stance coats.

Seite 197



– With external interference of the ultra-sound, for instance from passing vehi-cles or loud machines.

– When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam-aged or out of position.

– If cargo protrudes.

– Under certain weather conditions suchas high relative humidity, wet condi-tions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strongwind.

– With tow bars and trailer couplings ofother vehicles.

– With thin or wedge-shaped objects.

– With moving objects.

– With elevated, protruding objects suchas ledges or cargo.

– With objects with corners and sharpedges.

– With objects with a fine surface struc-ture such as fences.

– For objects with porous surfaces.

– Low objects already displayed, for in-stance curbs, can move into the blindarea of the sensors before or after a con-tinuous tone sounds.

– The parking assistant may identify park-ing spaces that are not suitable for park-ing.

Tire sizeThe parking position may vary dependingon the tire size.

MalfunctionA Check Control message is displayed.

The parking assistant failed. Have the sys-tem checked by a dealer's service center oranother qualified service center or repairshop.

Seite 198



Climate control



Interior air quality

The air quality in the vehicle is improved bythe following components:

– Emission tested passenger compart-ment.

– Microfilter.

– Air conditioning system to control thetemperature, air flow and recirculated-air mode.

Depending on the equipment specification:

– Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.

– Automatic climate control.

– Parked-car ventilation.

Seite 199

Climate control CONTROLS


Air conditioner

1 Air distribution settings

2 Air flow

3 Temperature

4 Seat heating, right 84

5 Air conditioning

6 Recirculated-air mode

7 Rear window defroster

8 Windshield defroster

9 Seat heating, left 84

Climate control functions in detail


Switching on

Set any air flow.

Switching off

Turn the wheel for air flow allthe way to the left.

Temperature

Concept

The system heats or cools, depending on theset temperature.

Adjusting

Turn the wheel to set the de-sired temperature.

Seite 200

CONTROLS Climate control


Air conditioning

Concept

The air in the car's interior will be cooledand dehumidified and, depending on thetemperature setting, warmed again.

The car's interior can only be cooled withthe engine running.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with air con-ditioning switched on.

Depending on the weather, the windshieldmay fog up briefly when the engine isstarted.

The air conditioner produces condensationwater, refer to page 233, that will exit frombelow the vehicle.

Recirculated-air mode

Concept

You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu-tants in the immediate environment by tem-porarily suspending the supply of outsideair. The system then recirculates the airflow within the vehicle.

Operation

Press the button:

The LED is illuminated when recir-culated-air mode is switched on. The supplyof outside air is shut off.

When recirculated-air mode is switched off,fresh air is directed into the vehicle's inte-rior.

To prevent window condensation, recircu-lated-air mode switches off automatically af-ter a certain amount of time, depending onthe external temperature.

With constant recirculated-air mode, the airquality in the car's interior deteriorates andwindow fogging increases.

If the windows fog over, switch off recircu-lated-air mode and increase the air flow, ifneeded.

Controlling the air flow manually

Concept

The air flow for climate control can be ad-justed manually.

Operation

Turn the ring to set the de-sired air flow.

The higher the air flow, themore effective the heating orcooling will be.

The air flow from the air conditioner may bereduced automatically to save batterypower.

Controlling the air distributionmanually

Concept

The air distribution for climate control canbe adjusted manually.

Operation

Turn the wheel to select thedesired program or the desiredintermediate setting.

– Windows.

– Upper body region.

– Floor area.

– Windows, upper body region, andfloor area.

Seite 201



To defrost windows and removecondensationMake the following settings to defrost thewindows and remove condensation:

– Direct the air distribution onto the win-dows.

– Increasing the air flow.

– Increase the temperature.

– Switch on the air conditioning if needed.

Windshield defroster

Press the button. The LED lights up.

The front window defrosterswitches off automatically after a certainperiod of time.

Rear window defroster


The rear window defroster switchesoff automatically after a certain period oftime.

When GREEN Mode is activated, the heat-ing output is reduced.

MicrofilterIn external and recirculated-air mode, themicrofilter filters dust and pollen from theair.

Have this filter changed during vehiclemaintenance, refer to page 281.

Automatic climate control

1 Temperature, left

2 Display

3 Air flow, AUTO intensity

4 AUTO program

5 Air distribution, manual

6 Display

7 Temperature, right

8 Seat heating, right 84

Seite 202



9 Maximum cooling

10 Air conditioning

11 Recirculated-air mode

12 Rear window defroster

13 Windshield defroster

14 To defrost windows and remove conden-sation

15 Seat heating, left 84

Climate control functions in detail


Switching on

Set any air flow.

Switching off

Turn wheel for air flow to theleft until the control switchesoff.

Temperature

Concept

The automatic climate control achieves theset temperature as quickly as possible, ifnecessary by using the maximum cooling orheating power, and then keeps it constant.

Adjusting

Turn the wheel to set the de-sired temperature.

Do not rapidly switch between differenttemperature settings. The automatic climatecontrol will not have sufficient time to ad-just the set temperature.

Air conditioning

Concept

The air in the car's interior will be cooledand dehumidified and, depending on thetemperature setting, warmed again.

The car's interior can only be cooled withthe engine running.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with air con-ditioning switched on.

Depending on the weather, the windshieldmay fog up briefly when the engine isstarted.

The cooling function is switched on auto-matically with the AUTO program.

When using the automatic climate control,condensation water, refer to page 233, de-velops and drains underneath the vehicle.This is normal.

Maximum cooling

Concept

The system is set to the lowest temperature,maximum air flow and recirculated-airmode.

General information

The function is available with external tem-peratures beyond approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ andwith the engine running.

Air flows out of the vents to the upper bodyregion. The vents need to be open for this.

Seite 203



The air flow can be adjusted with the pro-gram active.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with thesystem switched on.

AUTO program

Concept

The AUTO program cools, ventilates orheats the car's interior automatically.

The air distribution and temperature arecontrolled automatically depending on thetemperature in the car's interior and the de-sired temperature setting including the se-lected intensity of the air flow.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with theAUTO program switched on.

Depending on the selected temperature,AUTO intensity and outside influences, theair is directed to the windshield, side win-dows, upper body, and into the floor area.

Point the side vents toward the side win-dows.

The following features are switched on au-tomatically with the AUTO program:

– The air conditioning, refer to page 203.

To switch off the program: press the buttonagain or manually adjust the air distribu-tion.

Intensity

With the AUTO program activated, the au-tomatic intensity control can be changed.

Turn the ring to set the de-sired intensity from soft to in-tensive.

The set intensity is displayed via the posi-tion of the illuminated LED segment.

Recirculated-air mode

Concept

You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu-tants in the immediate environment by tem-porarily suspending the supply of outsideair. The system then recirculates the airflow within the vehicle.

Operation

Press the button:

The LED is illuminated when recir-culated-air mode is switched on. The supplyof outside air is shut off.

When recirculated-air mode is switched off,fresh air is directed into the vehicle's inte-rior.

To prevent window condensation, recircu-lated-air mode switches off automatically af-ter a certain amount of time, depending onthe external temperature.

With constant recirculated-air mode, the airquality in the car's interior deteriorates andwindow fogging increases.

If the windows fog over, switch off recircu-lated-air mode and increase the air flow, ifneeded.

Adjusting the air flow manually

Concept

The air flow for climate control can be ad-justed manually.

Seite 204



General information

To adjust the air flow manually switch offAUTO program first.

Operation

Turn the ring to set the de-sired air flow.

The manually adjusted air flow is displayedvia illuminated LED segments.

The air flow of the automatic climate con-trol may be reduced automatically to savebattery power.

Adjusting the air distributionmanually

Concept

The air distribution for climate control canbe adjusted manually.

Operation

Press the button repeatedly to se-lect a program:

– Windows, upper body region, and floorarea.

– Upper body region and floor area.

– Floor area.

– Windows and floor area.

– Windows.

– Windows and upper body region.

– Upper body region.

To defrost windows and removecondensation

Concept

Ice and condensation are quickly removedfrom the windshield and the front side win-dows.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with thesystem switched on.

The air flow can be adjusted with the pro-gram active.

If there is window condensation, switch onthe air conditioning too.

Windshield defroster


The front window defrosterswitches off automatically after a certainperiod of time.

Rear window defroster


The rear window defroster switchesoff automatically after a certain period oftime.

When GREEN Mode is activated, the heat-ing output is reduced.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filterIn external and recirculated-air mode, themicrofilter/activated charcoal filter filtersdust, pollen, and gaseous pollutants out ofthe air.

Have this filter changed during vehiclemaintenance, refer to page 281.

Seite 205



Ventilation

SettingThe air flow directions can be individuallyadjusted:

– Direct ventilation:

The air flow is directly pointed onto theperson. The air flow heats or cools no-ticeably, depending on the adjusted tem-perature.

– Indirect ventilation:

If the vents are fully or partly closed, theair is directly routed into the car's inte-rior.

Front ventilation

– Turn knob for continuous opening andclosing of the vents.

– Swivel the vents to alter the direction ofthe vent flow, arrows.

Parked-car ventilation

ConceptThe parked-car ventilation ventilates thecar's interior and lowers its temperature, ifneeded.

General informationThe parked-car ventilation can be switchedon and off directly or by using two preset

activation times. The system remainsswitched on for 30 minutes.

The parked-car ventilation system is oper-ated via the Central Information Display(CID).

Functional requirements– Direct operation: vehicle is in radio-

ready state.

– Direct operation or preset activationtime: does not depend on external tem-perature.

– Battery is sufficiently charged.

If parked-car ventilation is switched on,the vehicle battery will be discharged.Thus, limit the maximum activation timeto save the vehicle battery. The systemwill be available again after the engineis started or after a short trip.

– Make sure that the vehicle's date andtime are set correctly.

– Open the vents to allow air to flow out.

Switching on/off directlyVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. If necessary, "Climate functions"

4. "Activate comfort ventilation now"

The symbol on the automatic climatecontrol flashes if the system is switched on.

Preselecting the activation timeVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"



4. "Comfort ventilation"

Seite 206



5. Select the desired activation time.

6. Set the desired time.

Activating the activation timeVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"



4. "For start time at:"

Activate the desired activation time.

The symbol on the automatic climatecontrol lights up when the activation time isactivated.

The symbol on the automatic climatecontrol flashes when the system has beenswitched on.

The system will only be switched on withinthe next 24 hours. After that, it needs to bereactivated.

Seite 207



Interior equipment



Integrated Universal RemoteControl

ConceptThe integrated Universal Remote Control inthe interior mirror can operate up to 3 func-tions of remote-controlled systems such asgarage door drives, barriers, or lighting sys-tems.

General informationThe Integrated Universal Remote Controlreplaces up to 3 different hand-held trans-mitters. To operate the remote control, thebuttons on the interior mirror must be pro-grammed with the desired functions. Thehand-held transmitter for the particular sys-tem is required in order to program the re-mote control.

Before selling the vehicle, delete the storedfunctions for the sake of security.

If possible, do not install the antenna of theremote-controlled system, e.g. the garagedoor drive, near metal objects to ensure thebest possible operation.

Safety information

Warning

The operation of remote-controlled sys-tems with the integrated universal remotecontrol, such as the garage door, may re-sult in injury, for example, body parts be-coming jammed in a garage door. There isa risk of injury or risk of damage to prop-erty. Make sure that the area of movementof the respective system is clear duringprogramming and operation. Also followthe safety information of the hand-heldtransmitter.

CompatibilityIf this symbol is printed on the pack-aging or in the owner's manual of thesystem to be controlled, the system

is generally compatible with the integratedUniversal Remote Control.

Additional questions are answered by:

– A dealer's service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop.

– www.homelink.com on the Internet.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gen-tex Corporation.

Seite 208

CONTROLS Interior equipment


Overview

1 LED

2 Programmable keys

3 Hand-held transmitters of the system

Programming

General informationThe battery of the hand-held transmittermust be fully charged at the time of pro-gramming to ensure an optimal range of theintegrated universal remote control.


2. Initial setup:

Press and hold the two outer buttons onthe interior mirror simultaneously forapproximately 10 seconds until the LEDflashes green rapidly. This erases all pro-gramming of the buttons on the interiormirror.

3. Press the interior mirror button to beprogrammed. The LED on the interiormirror will slowly begin flashing orange.

4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for thesystem to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5to 30 cm away from the buttons on theinterior mirror. The required distancedepends on the hand-held transmitter.

5. Press and hold the button of the desiredfunction on the hand-held transmitter.

Canada: if programming with the hand-held transmitter was interrupted, hold

down the interior mirror button and re-peatedly press and release the hand-heldtransmitter button for 2 seconds.

6. – The LED lights up green: program-ming completed.

Release the button.

– The LED flashes fast: programmingis not complete.

Press the button on the interior mir-ror for 2 seconds and release. Per-form this procedure three times tocomplete the programming proce-dure.

If the integrated universal remotecontrol remains nonoperational, con-tinue with the special features forchange code wireless systems.

– LED does not flash green after60 seconds: programming not com-pleted.

Repeat steps 3 to 6.

To program other functions on other but-tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.

Special feature of the rolling codewireless systemIf you are unable to operate the system af-ter repeated programming, please check ifthe system to be controlled features a roll-ing code radio system.

Refer to the owner's manual for the system.

For systems with a rolling code radio sys-tem, the integrated Universal Remote Con-trol and the system also have to besynchronized.

Please read the owner's manual to find outhow to synchronize the system.

Synchronizing is easier with the aid of asecond person.

Seite 209

Interior equipment CONTROLS


Synchronizing the universal remote controlwith the system:

1. Park the vehicle within range of the re-mote-controlled system.

2. Program the relevant button on the inte-rior mirror as described.

3. Locate and press the synchronizing but-ton on the system being programmed,e.g. at the garage gate. You have approx.30 seconds for the next step.

4. Hold down the programmed button onthe interior mirror for approximately3 seconds and then release it. If neces-sary, repeat this step up to three timesin order to finish synchronization. Oncesynchronization is complete, the pro-grammed function will be carried out.

Reprogramming individual buttons1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Press and hold the interior mirror but-ton to be programmed.

3. As soon as the LED on the interior mir-ror flashes orange after approx. 20 sec-onds, release the button.

4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for thesystem to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5to 30 cm away from the buttons on theinterior mirror. The required distancedepends on the hand-held transmitter.

5. Press and hold the button of the desiredfunction on the hand-held transmitter.

Canada: if programming with the hand-held transmitter was interrupted, holddown the interior mirror button and re-peatedly press and release the hand-heldtransmitter button for 2 seconds.

6. The LED can light up in different ways.

– The LED lights up green: the pro-gramming procedure is completed.

Release the button.

– The LED flashes fast: the hand-heldtransmitter was detected but pro-gramming is not complete.

Press the button on the interior mir-ror for 2 seconds and release. Per-form this procedure three times tocomplete the programming proce-dure.

If the integrated universal remotecontrol remains nonoperational, con-tinue with the special features forchange code wireless systems.

– LED does not flash green after60 seconds: programming not com-pleted.

Repeat steps 3 to 6.

If the programming procedure is not com-pleted, the previous programming will re-main unchanged.

Operation

Warning

The operation of remote-controlled sys-tems with the integrated universal remotecontrol, such as the garage door, may re-sult in injury, for example, body parts be-coming jammed in a garage door. There isa risk of injury or risk of damage to prop-erty. Make sure that the area of movementof the respective system is clear duringprogramming and operation. Also followthe safety information of the hand-heldtransmitter.

The system, such as the garage door, can beoperated using the button on the interiormirror while the engine is running or whenthe ignition is started. To do this, hold downthe button within receiving range of thesystem until the function is activated. Theinterior mirror LED stays lit while the wire-less signal is being transmitted.

Seite 210



Deleting stored functionsAll stored functions will be deleted. Thefunctions cannot be deleted individually.

Press and hold the two outer buttons on theinterior mirror simultaneously for approxi-mately 10 seconds until the LED on the in-terior mirror flashes green rapidly.

Digital compass

Overview

1 Control button

2 Mirror display

Mirror displayThe compass shows the current driving di-rection.

Operating conceptVarious functions can be called up by press-ing the control button with a pointed object,such as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similarobject. The following setting options aredisplayed in succession, depending on howlong the control button is pressed:

– Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.

– 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.

– 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.

– 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steeringsetting.

– 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.

Setting the compass zonesSets the particular compass zones on the ve-hicle so that the compass operates correctly;refer to World map with compass zones.

Seite 211



World map with magnetic zones

Procedure1. Press and hold the control button for ap-

prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of theset compass zone appears in the mirror.

2. To change the zone setting, press thecontrol button quickly and repeatedlyuntil the number of the compass zonethat corresponds with your location ap-pears in the mirror.

The set zone is stored automatically. Thecompass is ready for use again after approx-imately 10 seconds.

Calibrating the digital compassThe digital compass must be calibrated inthe event of the following:

– The wrong compass point is displayed.

– The point of the compass displayed doesnot change despite changing the direc-tion of travel.

– Not all points of the compass are dis-played.

Procedure1. Make sure that there are no large metal-

lic objects or overhead power lines nearthe vehicle and that there is sufficientroom to drive around in a circle.

2. Set the currently applicable compasszone.

3. Press and hold the control button for ap-prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appearson the display. Next, drive in a completecircle at least once at a speed of no morethan 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc-cessful, the "C" is replaced by the pointsof the compass.

Left/right-hand steeringThe digital compass is already set for rightor left-hand steering at the factory.

Setting the languagePress and hold the control button for ap-prox. 12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the

Seite 212



control button again to switch betweenEnglish "E" and German "O".

Settings are stored automatically after ap-proximately 10 seconds.

Sun visor

Glare shieldTo provide protection against glare, fold thesun visor down or pivot it to the side.

Vanity mirrorA vanity mirror is located in the sun visorbehind a cover.

When the cover is opened, the mirror light-ing switches on.

Front passenger side dash-board

Decorative trim

Customized decorative trim panels for thedashboard on the front passenger side areavailable as original MINI accessories de-pending on the equipment specification.

Follow the assembly instructions.

Ashtray/cigarette lighter

Overview

The ashtray is located in one of the frontalcup holders, the cigarette lighter above it inthe center console.

AshtrayIn order to empty the ashtray, remove theashtray from the cup holder.

Cigarette lighter

Safety information

Warning

Contact with the hot heating element orthe hot socket of the cigarette lighter cancause burns. Flammable materials can ig-nite if the cigarette lighter falls down or isheld against the objects. There is a risk offire and injuries. There is a risk of damageto property. Take hold of the cigarettelighter by its handle. Make sure that chil-dren do not use the cigarette lighter.

Seite 213



NOTICE

If metal objects fall into the socket, theycan cause a short circuit. There is a risk ofdamage to property. Replace the cigarettelighter or socket cover again after usingthe socket.

Operation

Push in the cigarette lighter.

The cigarette lighter can beremoved as soon as it popsback out.

Sockets

ConceptThe lighter socket can be used as a socketfor electrical equipment while the ignitionis switched on or the engine is running.

General informationThe total load of all sockets must not exceed140 watts at 12 volts.

Do not damage the socket by using non-compatible connectors.

Safety information

Warning

Devices and cables in the unfolding area ofthe airbags, such as portable navigationdevices, can hinder the unfolding of theairbag or be thrown around in the car's in-terior during unfolding. There is a risk ofinjury. Make sure that devices and cablesare not in the airbag's area of unfolding.

NOTICE

Battery chargers for the vehicle batterycan work with high voltages and currents,which means that the 12 volt on-boardnetwork can be overloaded or damaged.There is a risk of damage to property. Onlyconnect battery chargers for the vehiclebattery to the starting aid terminals in theengine compartment.

NOTICE

If metal objects fall into the socket, theycan cause a short circuit. There is a risk ofdamage to property. Replace the cigarettelighter or socket cover again after usingthe socket.

In the center console

Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.

Seite 214



In the cargo area

The socket is located on the right side inthe cargo area.

USB port

General informationFollow the information regarding the con-nection of mobile devices to the USB port inthe section on USB connections, refer topage 55.

In the center console

Depending on the equipment version, a USBport Type A or a USB port Type A and a USBport Type C are located in the front of thecenter console.

Properties of upper USB port:

– USB port Type A.

– For charging mobile devices and fordata transfer.

– Charge current: max. 1.5 A.

Properties of lower USB port:

– USB port Type C.

– For charging mobile devices and fordata transfer.

– Charge current: max. 3 A.

Wireless charging tray

ConceptThe wireless charging tray enables the fol-lowing functions to be performed withoutcables:

– Charging the rechargeable battery of amobile phone with Qi capability and ofother mobile devices, which support theQi standard.

– Connect the mobile phone to the exter-nal antenna.

Depending on the country, this providesfor better network reception and a con-sistent reproduction quality.

General informationWhen inserting the mobile phone, makesure there are no objects between it and thewireless charging tray.

During charging, the surface of the tray andthe mobile phone may become warm.Higher temperatures may lead to a reduc-tion in the charge current through the mo-bile phone, and in isolated cases the charg-ing process is paused temporarily. Followthe relevant instructions in the mobilephone owner's manual.

NOTEThis device has been tested for human ex-posure limits and found compliant at a mini-mum distance of 4 in/10 cm during opera-tion.

Seite 215



Therefore, a distance of 4 in/10 cm must bemaintained in every direction when operat-ing the device.

Mounting position of the product.

Safety information

Warning

When charging a device that meets the Qistandard in the wireless charging tray, anymetal objects located between the deviceand the tray can become very hot. Placingstorage devices or electronic cards, suchas chip cards, cards with magnetic stripsor cards for signal transmission, betweenthe device and the tray may impair thecard function. There is a risk of injury andrisk of damage to property. When charg-ing mobile devices, make sure there are noobjects between the device and the tray.

NOTICE

The tray is intended for mobile phones upto a particular size. Forceful inserting ofthe mobile phone into the tray can damagethe tray or the mobile phone. There is arisk of damage to property. Observe themaximum dimensions for mobile phones.Do not force the mobile phone into thetray.

Functional requirements– Ignition or standby state is switched on.

– The mobile phone must compatibly sup-port the required Qi standard. Compati-ble mobile phones, refer to page 53.

If the mobile phone does not support theQi standard, the mobile phone can becharged using a special Qi-compatiblecharging case.

– Use only protective jackets and coversup to a maximum thickness of0.07 in/2 mm. Otherwise, the chargingfunction may be impaired.

– The mobile phone must not exceed themaximum size of approximately 5.9 x3.07 x 0.62 in/150 x 78 x 16 mm.

OverviewThe wireless charging tray is located in thecenter armrest.

1 Front holder with LED

2 Storage area

3 Movable clamp

Inserting the mobile phone1. Open center armrest, refer to vehicle

Owner's Manual.

2. Push back the clamp.

Seite 216



3. Insert the mobile phone with the displayfacing upward in the direction of thefront holder, arrow 1.

4. Place the mobile phone in the storagearea, arrow 2.

5. Push the clamp forward and clamp themobile phone in the tray.

6. Close the center armrest.

Removing the mobile phone1. Open the center armrest.

2. Push the clamp back and remove themobile phone.

LED displays

Color Meaning

Blue The mobile phone is charging.

Depending on the model, theblue LED is no longer illuminatedonce the inserted mobile phonewith Qi capability is fullycharged.

Or-ange

The mobile phone is not charg-ing.

Temperature on the mobilephone possibly too high or for-eign object in the charging tray.

Red The mobile phone is not charg-ing.

Contact a dealer’s service centeror another qualified service cen-ter or repair shop.

System limitsAt high temperatures on the mobile phoneor in the vehicle, the charging functions ofthe mobile phone may be limited and somefunctions may no longer work.

LTE-Compensator - Informationand User ManualYour car is equipped with a wireless charg-ing tray (WCA) to charge your mobile phoneand connect it to the mobile network. To en-sure the best possible connection a signalbooster (LTE-Compensator) is used in con-junction with the WCA. The following para-graphs refer to this booster:

This is a CONSUMER device.

BEFORE USE, you MUST REGISTER THISDEVICE with your wireless provider andhave your provider's consent. Most wirelessproviders consent to the use of Compensa-tors. Some providers may not consent to theuse of this device on their network. If you

Seite 217



are unsure, contact your provider. YouMUST operate this device with approved an-tennas and cables as specified by the manu-facturer. Antennas MUST be installed atleast 20 cm (8 inches) from any person. YouMUST cease operating this device immedi-ately if requested by the FCC or a licensedwireless service provider. Warning E911 lo-cation information may not be provided ormay be inaccurate for calls served by usingthis device.

Please observe additionally the following in-formation

– Sprint Nextel will allow consumers toregister their signal boosters by callingtheir toll-free number.

– T-Mobile online registration link:(www.T-Mobile.com/BoosterRegistra-tion); (https://saqat.t-mobile.com/sites/SignalBooster#).

– Verizon’s online registration link:(http://www.verizonwireless.com/wcms/consumer/register-signal-boos-ter.html).

– AT&T online registration link (https://securec45.securewebsession.com/attsignalbooster.com/).

– U.S.Cellular online registration link(http://www.uscellular.com/uscellular/support/fcc-booster-registration.jsp).

Before use you must register your boosterdevice with your wireless provider.

If you should be requested by the FCC tocease operating your booster, you are notallowed to insert your mobile phone in thecharging tray anymore unless the booster ispermanently deactivated by your local MINIdealer.

You must not remove the booster from thecar nor use it with any other than the prein-stalled coupling device or antenna. Anymodification of the existing antenna or cou-pling device as well as the use of other an-

tennas or coupling devices will cause thecease of the booster´s operating license.

The booster device fulfills the network pro-tection standards as required by the FCC,such as intermodulation limits, oscillationdetection and gain limits.

Booster Manufacturer: Kathrein Automotive

Model Number: LTECOMPB0

Part Number: 6803145-01

FCC-ID: 2ACC7LTECOMPB0

Seite 218



Storage compartments



Safety information

Warning

Loose objects or devices with a cable con-nection to the vehicle, for instance mobilephones, can be thrown about the car's in-terior while driving, for instance in theevent of an accident, braking or evasivemaneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secureloose objects or devices with a cable con-nection to the vehicle in the car's interior.

NOTICE

Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats candamage the dashboard. There is a risk ofdamage to property. Do not use anti-slippads.

Overview

The following storage compartments areavailable in the car's interior:

– Glove compartment on the front passen-ger side.

– Compartments in the doors.

– Storage compartment in the center arm-rest.

– Storage compartment in front of the cupholders.

– Clothes hooks

– Storage tray in the center console.

– Pockets on the backrests of the frontseats.

Glove compartment

Safety information

Warning

Folded open, the glove compartment pro-trudes in the car's interior. Objects in theglove compartment can be thrown into thecar's interior while driving, for instance inthe event of an accident, braking or eva-sive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury.Always close the glove compartment im-mediately after using it.

Seite 219

Storage compartments CONTROLS


Opening

Pull the handle.

The light in the glove compartmentswitches on.

ClosingFold up the cover.

Compartments in the doors

General informationThere are storage compartments in thedoors.

Safety information

Warning

Breakable objects, such as glass bottles orglasses, can break in the event of an acci-dent or a braking or evasive maneuver.Broken glass can be scattered in the car'sinterior. There is a risk of injury or risk ofdamage to property. Do not use any break-able objects while driving. Only stowbreakable objects in closed storage com-partments.

Center armrest

General informationThe center armrest contains a storage com-partment.

Opening

Press button, arrow 1, and open center arm-rest upward, arrow 2.


Press button, arrow 1, and swing centerarmrest upward or downward into the de-sired height, arrow 2.

Seite 220

CONTROLS Storage compartments


Cup holders

Safety information

Warning

Unsuitable containers in the cup holdersmay damage the cup holders or be thrownabout the car’s interior in the event of anaccident, an evasive maneuver, or forcefulbraking. Spilled liquids can distract fromthe traffic conditions and lead to an acci-dent. Hot drinks can damage the cupholder or lead to scalding. There is a riskof injury or risk of damage to property. Donot force objects into the cup holder. Uselightweight, shatterproof, and sealablecontainers. Do not transport hot bever-ages.

Front

In the center console.

Rear

For 3-door models: in front of the rear seatsand in the side armrests.

For 5-door models: in front of the rear seats.

Clothes hooks

General information3-door model: The clothes hooks are locatedabove the side windows in the rear.

5-door model: The clothes hooks are locatedabove the rear doors.

Safety information

Warning

Clothing articles on the clothes hooks canobstruct the view while driving. There is arisk of accident. When suspending cloth-ing articles from the clothes hooks, ensure

Seite 221

Storage compartments CONTROLS


that they will not obstruct the driver'sview.

Warning

Improper use of the clothes hooks can leadto a risk of objects flying about duringbraking and evasive maneuvers. There is arisk of injury and risk of damage to prop-erty. Only hang lightweight objects, for in-stance clothing articles, from the clotheshooks.

Seite 222

CONTROLS Storage compartments


Cargo area



Loading

Safety information

Warning

High gross weight can overheat the tires,damage them internally and cause a sud-den drop in tire inflation pressure. Drivingcharacteristics may be negatively im-pacted, reducing lane stability, lengthen-ing the braking distances and changingthe steering response. There is a risk ofaccident. Pay attention to the permittedload capacity of the tires and never exceedthe permitted gross weight.

Warning

Loose objects or devices with a cable con-nection to the vehicle, for instance mobilephones, can be thrown about the car's in-terior while driving, for instance in theevent of an accident, braking or evasivemaneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure

loose objects or devices with a cable con-nection to the vehicle in the car's interior.

Warning

Improperly stowed objects can shift andbe thrown into the car's interior, for in-stance in the event of an accident or dur-ing braking and evasive maneuver. Vehi-cle occupants can be hit and injured. Thereis a risk of injury. Stow and secure objectsand cargo properly.

NOTICE

Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.There is a risk of damage to property.Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargoarea.

Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” onyour vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of thedriver and passengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load ca-pacity. For example, if the “XXX”amount equals 1,400 lbs and there willbe five 150 lbs passengers in your vehi-cle, the amount of available cargo and

Seite 223

Cargo area CONTROLS


luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 -750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs)

5. Determine the combined weight of lug-gage and cargo being loaded on the ve-hicle. That weight may not safely exceedthe available cargo and luggage load ca-pacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,load from your trailer will be transferredto your vehicle. Consult this manual todetermine how this reduces the availa-ble cargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

Load

On 3-door models

John Cooper Works GP

On 5-door models

The maximum load is the sum of the weightof the occupants and the cargo.

The greater the weight of the occupants,the less cargo that can be transported.

Stowing and securing cargo– Cover sharp edges and corners on the

cargo.

– Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as pos-sible, directly behind and at the bottomof the rear passenger seat backrests.

– Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat isnot occupied, secure each of the outersafety belts in the opposite buckle.

– If necessary, fold down the rear back-rests to stow large cargo.

– Do not stack cargo above the top edge ofthe backrests.

– Small and light cargo: secure withratchet straps or draw straps.

– Larger and heavy cargo: secure withcargo straps.

Seite 224

CONTROLS Cargo area


John Cooper Works GP

– Stow heavy cargo as low and as far for-ward as possible, directly behind thecargo rod.

– Do not stack cargo above the top edge ofthe cargo rod.

– Do not stow cargo on top of the cargorod.

Lashing eyes in the cargo area

Without storage compartment package: tosecure the cargo there are two lashing eyes,arrow 1, in the cargo area.

John Cooper Works GP: do not use the loopon the right side to secure cargo. The loopon the right side is intended exclusively asan anchor for the upper retaining strap withchild restraint systems, refer to page 97.

With storage compartment package: to se-cure the cargo there are six lashing eyes, ar-rows 1 and 2, in the cargo area.

Attach load securing aids, such as lashingstraps, tensioning straps, draw straps orcargo nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargoarea.

Cargo cover

General informationWhen the tailgate is opened, the cargocover is raised.

Safety information

Warning

Loose objects or devices with a cable con-nection to the vehicle, for instance mobilephones, can be thrown about the car's in-terior while driving, for instance in theevent of an accident, braking or evasivemaneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secureloose objects or devices with a cable con-nection to the vehicle in the car's interior.

RemovingFor storing bulky objects the cargo covercan be removed.

1. Detach the left and right retainingstraps at the tailgate.

2. Pull the cargo cover out of the bracketson the left and right.

Seite 225

Cargo area CONTROLS


Installing1. Slide the cargo cover forward horizon-

tally into the two side brackets until itaudibly engages.

2. Attach the left and right retaining strapsat the tailgate.

Storage space under cargofloor panel

Located under the cargo floor panel on theright side is a trough for the onboard vehi-cle tool kit.

Fold the right side of the cargo floor panelupward to remove the onboard vehicle toolkit.

Enlarging the cargo area

ConceptThe cargo area can be enlarged as follows:

– The rear seat backrests can be foldeddown.

– The rear seat backrests can be movedinto an upright loading position usingthe cargo setting.

General informationThe rear seat backrest is divided into twoparts at a ratio of 60 to 40. The left rear seatbackrest is connected to the center section.

The rear seat backrests can be folded downfrom the rear.

Safety information

Warning

Danger of jamming with folding down thebackrests. There is a risk of injury or riskof damage to property. Make sure that thearea of movement of the rear backrest andthe of the head restraint is clear prior tofolding down.

Warning

If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse-cured cargo can be thrown about the car’sinterior; for instance, in the event of an ac-cident, braking or an evasive maneuver.There is a risk of injury. Make sure thatthe rear seat backrest is locked after fold-ing it back.

Warning

With a rear backrest that is not locked, theprotective function of the middle safetybelt is not guaranteed. There is a risk ofinjuries or danger to life. If you are usingthe middle safety belt, lock the wider rearseat backrest.

Warning

The stability of the child restraint systemis limited or compromised with incorrectseat adjustment or improper installation ofthe child seat. There is a risk of injuries ordanger to life. Make sure that the child re-

Seite 226

CONTROLS Cargo area


straint system fits securely against thebackrest. If possible, adjust the backresttilt for all affected backrests and correctlyadjust the seats. Make sure that seats andbackrests are securely engaged or locked.If possible, adjust the height of the headrestraints or remove them.

Warning


Folding down the rear seatbackrest from the rear1. Before the rear seat backrest is folded

down, hook the corresponding safetybelt into the belt buckle on the side.

2. Pull the lever up, arrow 1, and fold therear seat backrest forward, arrow 2.

Cargo position

ConceptThe rear seat backrests can be moved intoan upright loading position.

Adjusting1. Release the backrest, and tilt it forward.

2. Fold the frame up until it engages.

3. Fold back and engage the rear seatbackrest.

Folding back the backrestFold up the backrest and press it into thelatch. Make sure that the safety belt is notcaught behind the backrest or in betweenthe backrest and the rear seats.

Variable cargo area floor

ConceptWith the variable cargo area floor, the cargoarea can be configured corresponding totransport requirements.

General informationFollow instructions on securing cargo, referto page 223.

Seite 227

Cargo area CONTROLS


Removing the cargo floor panel

5-door models: To change the position ofthe cargo area floor, first fold up the rearpart of the cargo area floor.

Grasp the cargo floor panel in the rear andfold slightly upward. Next, pull it backwardfrom the supports.

The cargo floor panel can be removed fromthe cargo area above the tail lights.

Lower position

– Larger objects can be transported.

– Space for smaller objects remains be-tween the fixed and variable cargo areafloor.

Folded up position

Safety information

Warning

Improper use of the variable cargo floorpanel can lead to a danger of objects flyingabout during braking and evasive maneu-vers. There is a risk of injury and risk ofdamage to property.

– Do not use the variable cargo floorpanel to separate the cargo area andcar's interior in the sense of a parti-tion net.

– Only use the variable cargo floorpanel in the folded-up position whenthe backrests are folded up andlocked.

– Fold down the variable cargo floorpanel before driving off.

– Always secure cargo against shifting,using straps, belts and lashing eyes,for instance.

Fold up the cargo floor panel

Fold up the cargo floor panel in the lowerposition and push it behind the locks, arrow.

You've reached the maximum cargo height.

Seite 228

CONTROLS Cargo area


Upper position

– With the backrests folded down, a long,flat loading surface is produced.

– For 3-door models:

Maximum load in this position:330 lbs/150 kg.

– For 5-door models:

Maximum load in this position:441 lbs/200 kg.

– Space for objects remains between thefixed and variable cargo area floor.

Seite 229

Cargo area CONTROLS


Things to remember when driving



Breaking-in period

General informationMoving parts need to begin working to-gether smoothly.

The following instructions will help you toachieve a long vehicle life and good effi-ciency.

During break-in, do not use the LaunchControl, refer to page 121.

Safety information

Warning

Due to new parts and components, safetyand driver assistance systems can reactwith a delay. There is a risk of accident.After installing new parts or with a newvehicle, drive conservatively and inter-vene early if necessary. Observe the break-in procedures of the respective parts andcomponents.

Engine, transmission, and axledrive

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 kmDo not exceed the maximum engine androad speed:

– For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and100 mph/160 km/h.

Avoid full load or kickdown under all cir-cumstances.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 kmThe engine and vehicle speed can graduallybe increased.

TiresTire traction is not optimal due to manufac-turing circumstances when tires are brand-new; they achieve their full traction poten-tial after a break-in time.

Drive conservatively for the first200 miles/300 km.

Brake systemBrake discs and brake pads only reach theirfull effectiveness after ap-prox. 300 miles/500 km. Drive moderatelyduring this break-in period.

ClutchThe function of the clutch reaches its opti-mal level only after a distance driven of ap-prox. 300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period, engage the clutch gently.

Following part replacementThe same break-in procedures should be ob-served if any of the components mentioned

Seite 230

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving


above have to be renewed in the course ofthe vehicle's operating life.

General driving notes

Closing the tailgate

Safety information

Warning

An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi-cle and can endanger occupants and othertraffic participants or damage the vehiclein the event of an accident, braking or eva-sive maneuvers. In addition, exhaustfumes may enter the car's interior. Thereis a risk of injury or risk of damage toproperty. Do not drive with the tailgateopen.

Driving with the tailgate openIf driving with the tailgate open cannot beavoided:

– Close all windows and the glass sunroof.

– Greatly increase the air flow from thevents.

– Drive moderately.

Ice on window glass

NOTICE

The window will be lowered slightly whenpulling on the door handle. In the event offrost, the window may freeze up and notbe lowered. There is a risk of damage toproperty. When pulling on the door han-dle, make sure that the window is lowered.If necessary, remove snow and ice fromthe window. Do not open the door withforce.

Hot exhaust gas system

Warning

High temperatures can occur underneaththe body, for instance caused by the ex-haust gas system, while driving. Contactwith the exhaust gas system can causeburns. There is a risk of injury. Do nottouch the hot exhaust gas system, includ-ing the exhaust pipe.

Warning

If combustible materials, such as leaves orgrass, come in contact with hot parts ofthe exhaust gas system, these materialscan ignite. There is a risk of fire and inju-ries. Do not remove the heat shields instal-led and never apply undercoating to them.Make sure that no combustible materialscan come in contact with hot vehicle partsin driving operation, idle or during park-ing.

Mobile communication devices inthe vehicle

Warning

Vehicle electronics and mobile phones caninfluence one another. There is radiationdue to the transmission operations of mo-bile phones. There is a risk of injury orrisk of damage to property. If possible, inthe car's interior use only mobile phoneswith direct connections to an exterior an-tenna in order to exclude mutual interfer-ence and deflect the radiation from thecar's interior.

Seite 231

Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS


HydroplaningOn wet or slushy roads, a wedge of watercan form between the tires and road sur-face.

This phenomenon is referred to as hydro-planing. It is characterized by a partial orcomplete loss of contact between the tiresand the road surface, ultimately undermin-ing your ability to steer and brake the vehi-cle.

Driving through water

General informationWhen driving through water, follow the fol-lowing:

– Deactivate Auto Start/Stop function.

– Drive through calm water only.

– Drive through water only if it is notdeeper than maximum 9.8 inches/25 cm.

– Drive through water no faster thanwalking speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.

Safety information

NOTICE

When driving too quickly through toodeep water, water can enter into the en-gine compartment, the electrical system orthe transmission. There is a risk of damageto property. When driving through water,do not exceed the maximum indicated wa-ter level and the maximum speed for driv-ing through water.

Braking safely

General informationThe vehicle is equipped with an AntilockBraking System ABS as a standard feature.

Perform an emergency stop in situationsthat require such.

Steering is still responsive. You can stillavoid any obstacles with a minimum ofsteering effort.

Pulsation of the brake pedal and soundsfrom the hydraulic circuits indicate thatABS is in its active mode.

John Cooper Works GP: brake systemThe vehicle has a brake system that wasadapted for the increased driving dynamicsof the vehicle.

Because of the design for high brakingpower, durability, and controllability, oper-ating noises may be heard when braking.

However, this noise development has no ef-fect on the performance, operational safety,and durability of the brake.

Objects in the area around the pedals

Warning

Objects in the driver's floor area can limitthe pedal distance or block a depressedpedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow ob-jects in the vehicle such that they are se-cured and cannot enter into the driver'sfloor area. Use floor mats that are suitablefor the vehicle and can be safely attachedto the floor. Do not use loose floor matsand do not layer several floor mats. Makesure that there is sufficient clearance forthe pedals. Ensure that the floor mats aresecurely fastened again after they were re-moved, for instance for cleaning.

Driving in wet conditionsWhen roads are wet, salted, or in heavyrain, gently press the brake pedal every fewmiles.

Seite 232



Ensure that this action does not endangerother traffic.

The heat generated during braking driesbrake discs and brake pads and protectsthem against corrosion.

In this way braking efficiency will be avail-able when you need it.

Hills

General information

Drive long or steep downhill gradients inthe gear that requires least braking effort.Otherwise, the brakes may overheat and re-duce brake efficiency.

You can increase the engine's braking effectby shifting down, going all the way to firstgear, if needed.

Safety information

Warning

Light but consistent brake pressure canlead to high temperatures, brakes wearingout and possibly even brake failure. Thereis a risk of accident. Avoid placing exces-sive stress on the brake system.

Warning

In idle state or with the engine switchedoff, safety functions, for instance enginebraking effect, braking assistance andsteering assistance, may not be available.There is a risk of accident. Do not attemptto drive in idle state or with the engineswitched off.

Brake disc corrosionCorrosion on the brake discs and contami-nation on the brake pads are increased bythe following circumstances:

– Low mileage.

– Extended periods when the vehicle isnot used at all.

– Infrequent use of the brakes.

– Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaningagents.

Corrosion buildup on the brake discs willcause a pulsating effect on the brakes intheir response - generally this cannot becorrected.

Condensation water under theparked vehicleWhen using the automatic climate control,condensation water develops and collectsunderneath the vehicle.

Ground clearance

NOTICE

If the ground clearance is insufficient, e.g.,curbs or underground garage entrances,contact with vehicle parts, e.g., spoiler,and the underbody may occur. There is arisk of damage to property. Ensure thatthere is sufficient ground clearance availa-ble.

Roof-mounted luggage rack

General informationInstallation only possible with roof rack.

Roof racks are available as special accesso-ries.

MountingFollow the installation instructions of theroof rack.

Seite 233



LoadingBecause roof-mounted luggage racks raisethe vehicle's center of gravity when loaded,they have a major effect on vehicle handlingand steering response.

Therefore, note the following when loadingand driving:

– Do not exceed the approved roof/axleloads and the approved gross vehicleweight.

– Be sure that adequate clearance is main-tained for tilting and opening the glasssunroof.

– Distribute the roof load uniformly.

– The roof load should not extend past theloading area.

– Always place the heaviest pieces on thebottom.

– Secure the roof luggage firmly, for in-stance using ratchet straps.

– Do not let objects project into the open-ing path of the tailgate.

– Drive cautiously and avoid sudden ac-celeration and braking maneuvers. Takecorners gently.

Rear luggage rack

General informationInstallation only possible with rear luggagerack preparation.

Rear luggage racks that are classified by themanufacturer of the vehicle to be suitableare available as special accessories.

Mounting

COOPER

COOPER S

The fixing points, arrows 1, and the socket,arrow 2, are located below the covers in thebumper.

Remove the covers before installing therear luggage rack.

LoadingBecause rear luggage racks raise the vehi-cle's center of gravity when loaded, theyhave a major effect on vehicle handling andsteering response.

Therefore, note the following when loadingand driving:

– Do not exceed the approved axle loadand the approved gross vehicle weight.

– Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden accelera-tion and braking maneuvers. Take cor-ners gently.

Seite 234



Power consumptionBefore starting to drive, check the functionof the rear luggage rack lights. Before start-ing to drive, check the function of thetrailer tail lights.

The rear luggage rack lights must not con-sume more than:

– Turn signals: 42 watts per side.

– Rear lights: 50 watts per side.

– Brake lights: 84 watts in total.

– Rear fog lights: 42 watts in total.

– Backup light: 42 watts in total.

Keep activation times of power consumersshort with the engine switched off to pro-tect the vehicle battery.

Driving on racetracks

Warning

The vehicle is not designed for use in MSport or motor sport type competition.There is a risk of accident. Do not use thevehicle for M Sport or motor sport typecompetitions.

Higher mechanical and thermal loads duringracetrack operation lead to increased wear.This wear is not covered by the warranty.

John Cooper Works GP: race trackoperationAlways check the engine oil level beforedriving on a racetrack. Top up up the engineoil to the maximum value for use on a race-track.

The vehicle can only be used under certainconditions in the M Sport or M Sport similarcompetition. This requires adjustments onthe vehicle, such as the use of specific oper-ating fluids.

Have the vehicle prepared for race track op-eration by a dealer’s service center or an-other qualified service center or repairshop.

Seite 235



Reducing fuel consumption



General information

The vehicle contains advanced technologiesfor the reduction of consumption and emis-sion values.

Fuel consumption depends on a number ofdifferent factors.

The implementation of certain measures,driving style and regular maintenance caninfluence fuel consumption and environ-mental impact.

Remove unnecessary cargo

Additional weight increases fuel consump-tion.

Remove attached parts follow-ing use

Remove roof-mounted or rear luggage rackswhich are no longer required following use.

Attached parts on the vehicle impair theaerodynamics and increase the fuel con-sumption.

Close the windows and glasssunroof

Driving with the glass sunroof and windowsopen results in increased air resistance andraises fuel consumption.

Tires

General informationTires can affect consumption in variousways, for instance tire size may influenceconsumption.

Check the tire inflation pressureregularlyCheck and, if needed, correct the tire infla-tion pressure at least twice a month and be-fore starting on a long trip.

Low tire inflation pressure increases rollingresistance and thus raises fuel consumptionand tire wear.

Drive away without delay

Do not wait for the engine to warm-upwhile the vehicle remains stationary. Startdriving right away, but at moderate enginespeeds.

This is the fastest way for the cold engineto reach its operating temperature.

Seite 236

DRIVING TIPS Reducing fuel consumption


Look well ahead when driving

Driving smoothly and proactively reducesfuel consumption.

Avoid unnecessary acceleration and brak-ing.

By maintaining a suitable distance to thevehicle driving ahead of you.

Avoid high engine speeds

Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuelconsumption and reduces wear.

If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shiftindicator, refer to page 132.

Use coasting conditions

When approaching a red light, take yourfoot off the accelerator and let the vehiclecoast to a halt.

For going downhill take your foot off the ac-celerator and let the vehicle roll.

The flow of fuel is interrupted while coast-ing.

Switch off the engine duringlonger stops

Switching off the engineSwitch off the engine during longer stops,for instance at traffic lights, railroad cross-ings or in traffic congestion.

Auto Start/Stop functionThe Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicleautomatically switches off the engine dur-ing a stop.

If the engine is switched off and then re-started rather than leaving the engine run-ning constantly, fuel consumption and emis-sions are reduced. Savings can begin withina few seconds of switching off the engine.

In addition, fuel consumption is also deter-mined by other factors, such as drivingstyle, road conditions, maintenance or envi-ronmental factors.

Switch off any functions thatare not currently needed

Functions such as seat heating and the rearwindow defroster require a lot of energyand consume additional fuel, especially incity and stop-and-go traffic.

Switch off these functions if they are notneeded.

Have maintenance carried out

Have the vehicle maintained regularly toachieve optimal vehicle efficiency and serv-ice life. MINI recommends that mainte-nance work be performed by a MINI servicecenter.

Also note the MINI maintenance systems,refer to page 281.

GREEN Mode

ConceptGREEN Mode supports a driving style thatsaves on consumption. For this purpose, theengine control and comfort features, for in-stance the climate control output, are ad-justed.

For Steptronic transmission:

Seite 237

Reducing fuel consumption DRIVING TIPS


Under certain conditions the engine is auto-matically decoupled from the transmissionin the D selector lever position. The vehiclecontinues traveling with the engine idlingto reduce consumption. The D selector leverposition remains engaged.

In addition, context-sensitive instructionsare displayed to assist with an efficientdriving style.

The achieved extended range is displayed inthe instrument cluster as bonus range.

General informationThe system includes the following MINI-MALISM functions and MINIMALISM dis-plays:

– GREEN Limit, refer to page 238

– GREEN climate control, refer topage 238.

– GREEN bonus range, refer to page 239.

– GREEN tip, driving instruction, refer topage 239.

– Coasting driving condition, refer topage 240.

– MINIMALISM analyzer, refer topage 242.

Activating GREEN ModePress the MINI Driving Modesswitch downward untilGREEN is displayed in the in-strument cluster.

Configuring GREEN

Via MINI Driving Modes switch1. Activating GREEN Mode.



Via the Central Information Display(CID)1. "My MINI"




Activating/deactivating the functionsThe following functions can be activated/deactivated:

– "GREEN speed warning"

– "GREEN climate control"

– "Coasting"


GREEN Limit– "GREEN speed warning": GREEN Limit

is activated.

A GREEN tip is displayed if the speed ofthe set GREEN Limit is exceeded.

– "Tip at:"

Set the desired speed for the GREENLimit.

GREEN climate controlClimate control is set to be efficient.

By making a slight change to the set tem-perature and adjusting the rate of heatingor cooling of the car's interior consumptioncan be economized.

The power output to the seat heater and ex-terior mirror is reduced.

CoastingEfficiency can be optimized by disengagingthe engine and coasting, refer to page 240,with the engine idling.

This function is only available in GREENMode.

Seite 238



Deactivate the function to use the brakingeffect of the engine when traveling down-hill.

GREEN potential savingsShows potential savings with the currentsettings in percentages.

Display in the instrument cluster

GREEN bonus range

A modified driving style helpsyou extend your driving range.

The range extension can bedisplayed as the bonus rangein the instrument cluster.

The bonus range is shown in the range dis-play.

The bonus range is automatically reset ev-ery time the vehicle is refueled.

– Green display: efficient driving style.

– Gray display: modify driving style, forinstance by backing off the acceleratorpedal.

Efficiency display

A bar display in the instru-ment cluster indicates yourcurrent driving efficiency.

Mark in the left area, arrow 1:display for energy recovered

by coasting or when braking.

Mark in the right area, arrow 2: displaywhen accelerating.

The efficiency of your driving style isshown by the position of the mark:

– Mark inside the green range: efficientdriving style.

– Mark outside the green range: modifydriving style, for example by backing offthe accelerator.

GREEN tip, driving instruction

General information

The GREEN tip indicates that your drivingstyle can be modified to be more efficient,for example by backing off the accelerator.



Activating/deactivating the displayActivate information relating to the drivingstyle and GREEN tips in the instrumentcluster using the Central Information Dis-play (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"


5. "GREEN info"

Seite 239



GREEN tip, symbolsAn additional symbol and text instructionsare displayed.

Symbol Measure

For an efficient driving style,look well ahead when driving,accelerate conservatively, anddelay accelerating.

Reduce speed to the selectedGREEN speed.


Switch from M/S to D and avoidmanual shift interventions.


Follow the shift instructions.


Engage neutral for an enginestop.

Indications on the Control Display

Displaying MINIMALISM informationThe current efficiency of the functions inGREEN Mode can be displayed on the Con-trol Display.


1. "My MINI"


3. "MINIMALISM"

Information is shown on the following func-tions:

– Auto Start/Stop function.

– Energy recovery.

– Coasting.

Displaying the MINIMALISM analyzerVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "MINIMALISM Analyser"

Further information on the MINIMALISManalyzer, refer to page 242.

Coasting

ConceptThe function helps to conserve fuel.

To do this, under certain conditions the en-gine is automatically decoupled from thetransmission when selector lever position Dis set. The vehicle continues traveling withthe engine idling to reduce consumption.Selector lever position D remains engaged.

This driving condition is referred to ascoasting.

As soon as you step on the brake or acceler-ator pedal, the engine is automatically cou-pled again.

General informationCoasting is a component of the GREEN driv-ing mode.

Coasting is automatically activated whenthe GREEN driving mode is called via theMINI Driving Modes switch, refer topage 176.

A proactive driving style helps the driver touse the function often and supports the effi-cient effect of coasting.

Functional requirementsThe function is available in the speed rangefrom approx. 15 mph/25 km/h up to100 mph/160 km/h.

– Accelerator pedal and brake pedal arenot operated.

Seite 240



– The selector lever is in selector lever po-sition D.

– Engine and transmission are at operat-ing temperature.

– With a camera in the area of the interiormirror: the system does not detect anyvehicles ahead of you.

Operation via shift paddles

Concept

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, thecoasting mode can be influenced with theshift paddles.

Activating/deactivating coasting via shiftpaddles

1. Shift to the highest gear by pulling theright shift paddle.

2. To activate coasting mode, actuate theright shift paddle again.

To deactivate, actuate the left shift paddle.

Display

Instrument cluster without enhancedfeatures

The bar display below the tachometer is fil-led in green and the mark appears at thezero point. The tachometer indicates idlespeed.

Instrument cluster with enhanced features

The bar display below the tachometer is fil-led in green and the mark appears at thezero point. The tachometer indicates idlespeed.

Indications on the Control Display

The coasting driving condition is displayedin the MINIMALISM Info while driving.

The distance traveled in the coasting driv-ing condition is indicated by a counter.

Displaying MINIMALISM information


1. "My MINI"


3. "MINIMALISM"

System limitsThe function is not available if one of thefollowing conditions applies:

– DSC OFF and TRACTION are activated.

– Cruise control is activated.

– If driving in the dynamic limit range.

– If driving on steep uphill or downhillgrades.

– The battery charge state is temporarilytoo low.

– The vehicle electrical system is drawingexcessive current.

Seite 241



MINIMALISM analyzer

ConceptThe function helps develop an especially ef-ficient driving style and to conserve fuel.

For this purpose, the driving style is ana-lyzed. The assessment is done in variouscategories and is displayed on the ControlDisplay.

This display will help you adjust your driv-ing style and save some fuel.

The range of the vehicle can be extended byadopting an efficient driving style. This gainin range is displayed as a bonus range in theinstrument cluster and on the Control Dis-play.

Functional requirementThis function is available in GREEN Mode.

Displaying the MINIMALISM analyzerVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "MINIMALISM Analyser"

Display on the Control DisplayThe display of the MINIMALISM analyzerconsists of a fish in a water glass, a table ofvalues and the display of the achieved bo-nus range.

The fish and the movements of the water inthe bowl symbolize the efficiency of thedriving style.

Depending on the equipment, the fish isshown with efficient and inefficient drivingstyle or only with inefficient driving style.

The more efficient the driving style, the lessthe water sloshes around in the bowl andthe better is the fish's mood. If the drivingstyle is inefficient, the water oscillates, the

fish's mood worsens, and a reduced numberof stars is displayed.

The table of values contains stars and evalu-ates the driving style in different catego-ries. The more efficient the driving style,the more stars are displayed in the table.

The bonus range achieved by a driving stylethat minimizes consumption is displayedbelow the table of values. The more effi-cient the driving style, the faster the bonusrange increases.

To assist with an efficient driving style,GREEN tips are displayed while driving.

Tips for an energy-saving driving style, Sav-ing fuel, refer to page 236.

Seite 242



Seite 243



Refueling



General information

Follow the fuel recommendation, refer topage 246, prior to refueling.

Safety information

NOTICE

With a driving range of less than30 miles/50 km the engine may no longerhave sufficient fuel. Engine functions arenot ensured anymore. There is a risk ofdamage to property. Refuel promptly.

Fuel cap

Opening1. Grasp the fuel filler flap at the rear edge

and open it.

2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket at-tached to the fuel filler flap.

Seite 244

MOBILITY Refueling


Closing

Warning

The retaining strap of the fuel cap can bejammed and crushed during closing. Thecap cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuelvapors can escape. There is a risk of injuryor risk of damage to property. Pay atten-tion that the retaining strap is not jammedor crushed when closing the cap.

1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise untilyou clearly hear a click.

2. Press on the fuel filler flap until it en-gages.

Emergency unlockingIt may be necessary in certain situations tounlock the fuel filler flap manually, for in-stance with an electrical fault.

Have fuel filler flap unlocked by a dealer’sservice center or another qualified servicecenter or repair shop.

Follow the following when re-fueling

General informationWhen refueling, insert the filler nozzlecompletely into the filler pipe. Lifting up thefuel pump nozzle during refueling causes:

– Premature switching off.

– Reduced return of the fuel vapors.

The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzleclicks off the first time.

Make sure that the fuel cap is closed prop-erly after refueling, otherwise the emissionswarning light may light up.

Follow safety regulations posted at the gasstation.

Safety information

NOTICE

Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfillingof the fuel tank can damage the fuel sys-tem. Painted surfaces may be damaged bycontact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harmthe environment. There is a risk of damageto property. Avoid overfilling.

Seite 245

Refueling MOBILITY


Fuel



Fuel recommendation

General informationDepending on the region, many gas stationssell fuel that has been customized to winteror summer conditions. Fuel that is availablein winter, for instance helps make a coldstart easier.

Gasoline

General informationFor the best fuel efficiency, the gasolineshould be sulfur-free or very low in sulfurcontent.

Fuels that are marked on the gas pump ascontaining metal must not be used.

Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of25 %, i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refu-eling.

Ethanol should meet the following qualitystandards:

US: ASTM 4806–xx

CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx

xx: comply with the current standard ineach case.

Safety information

NOTICE

Even small quantities of the wrong fuel orwrong fuel additives can damage the fuelsystem and engine. Furthermore, the cata-lytic converter is permanently damaged.There is a risk of damage to property. Donot refuel or add the following in the caseof gasoline engines:

– Leaded gasoline.

– Metallic additives, for instance man-ganese or iron.

Do not press the Start/Stop button afterrefueling with the wrong fuel. Contact adealer’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.

NOTICE

Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel systemand the engine. There is a risk of damageto property. Do not use fuels with a higherpercentage of ethanol than recommended.Do not refuel with fuels containing metha-nol, e.g. M5 to M100.

NOTICE

Fuel that does not comply with the mini-mum quality can compromise engine func-tion or cause engine damage. There is arisk of damage to property. Do not fill withfuel that does not comply with the mini-mum quality.

Seite 246

MOBILITY Fuel


CAUTION

The use of poor-quality fuels may result inharmful engine deposits or damage. Addi-tionally, problems relating to drivability,starting and stalling, especially under cer-tain environmental conditions such ashigh ambient temperature and high alti-tude, may occur.

If drivability problems are encountered,we recommend switching to a high qualitygasoline brand and a higher octane grade— AKI number — for a few tank fills. Toavoid harmful engine deposits, it is highlyrecommended to purchase gasoline fromTop Tier retailers.

Failure to comply with these recommenda-tions may result in the need for unsched-uled maintenance.

Recommended fuel gradeMINI recommends AKI 91.

John Cooper Works/John Cooper WorksGP:

MINI recommends AKI 93.

Refuel with this gasoline to achieve therated performance and consumption values.

Minimum fuel gradeMINI recommends AKI 89.

John Cooper Works/John Cooper WorksGP:

MINI recommends AKI 91.

If you use gasoline with this minimum AKIRating, the engine may produce knockingsounds when starting at high external tem-peratures. This has no effect on the enginelife.

Seite 247

Fuel MOBILITY


Wheels and tires



Tire inflation pressure

General informationThe tire characteristics and tire inflationpressure influence the following:

– The service life of the tires.

– Road safety.

– Driving comfort.

– Fuel consumption.

Safety information

Warning

A tire with too little or no tire inflationpressure may heat up significantly andsustain damage. This will have a negativeimpact on aspects of handling, such assteering and braking response. There is arisk of accident. Regularly check the tireinflation pressure, and correct it asneeded, for instance twice a month and be-fore a long trip.

Tire inflation pressurespecifications

In the tire inflation pressure tableThe tire inflation pressure table, refer topage 250, contains all tire inflation pres-sure specifications for the specified tiresizes at the ambient temperature. The tireinflation pressure values apply to tire sizesapproved by the manufacturer of the vehiclefor the vehicle type.

To identify the correct tire inflation pres-sure, please note the following:

– Tire sizes of your vehicle.

– Maximum permitted driving speed.

Checking the tire inflation pressure

General informationTires heat up while driving. The tire infla-tion pressure increases with the tire tem-perature.

Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tireinflation pressure.

The displays of inflation devices may under-read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.

Checking using tire inflation pressurespecifications in the tire inflationpressure tableThe tire inflation pressure specifications inthe tire inflation pressure table only relateto cold tires or tires at the same tempera-ture as the ambient temperature.

Only check the tire inflation pressure levelswhen the tires are cold, i.e.:

– Driving range of max. 1.25 miles/2 kmhas not been exceeded.

Seite 248

MOBILITY Wheels and tires


– If the vehicle has not moved again for atleast 2 hours after a trip.

1. Determine the intended tire inflationpressure levels for the mounted tires.

2. Check the tire inflation pressure in allfour tires, using a pressure gage, for ex-ample.

3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if theactual tire inflation pressure deviatesfrom the intended tire inflation pres-sure.

4. Check whether all valve caps arescrewed onto the tire valves.

After correcting the tire inflationpressureFor run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires.

For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: resetthe Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.

Checking the tire inflation pressure ofthe emergency wheel

Located behind the bumper on the under-side of the vehicle is an opening for check-ing the tire inflation pressure.

Tire pressures up to 100 mph/160 km/hFor speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h andfor optimum driving comfort, note the pres-sure values in the tire inflation pressure ta-ble, refer to page 250, and adjust as neces-sary.

These pressure values can also be found onthe tire inflation pressure label on the driv-er's door pillar.

Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.

Seite 249

Wheels and tires MOBILITY


Tire pressure values up to100 mph/160 km/h

On 3-door models: COOPER

Tire size Pressure specifica-tions in bar/PSI

Specifications inbar/PSI with coldtires

175/65 R 15 84H A/S

195/55 R 16 87V A/S

205/45 R 17 88V XL A/S

195/55 R 16 87W

205/45 R 17 88W XL

175/65 R 15 88H XL M+S

195/55 R 16 87H M+S

205/45 R 17 88V XL M+S

2.4 / 35 2.2 / 32

205/40 R 18 86W XL

175/60 R 16 86H XL M+S

185/50 R 17 86H XL M+S

2.6 / 38 2.3 / 33

On 3-door models: COOPER S


Specificationsin bar/PSI withcold tires

195/55 R 16 87V A/S

195/55 R 16 87H M+S

2.4 / 35 2.2 / 32

205/45 R 17 88V XL A/S

205/45 R 17 88W XL

205/45 R 17 88V XL M+S

2.5 / 36 2.2 / 32

205/40 R 18 86W XL

175/60 R 16 86H XL M+S

185/50 R 17 86H XL M+S

2.7 / 39 2.3 / 33

Seite 250



On 3-door models: JOHN COOPERWORKS

Tire size Pressure specificationsin bar/PSI


205/45 R 17 88V XL A/S

205/45 R 17 88W XL

205/40 R 18 86W XL

185/50 R 17 86H XL M+S

205/45 R 17 88V XL M+S

2.8 / 41 2.4 / 35

JOHN COOPER WORKS GP


Specifica-tions inbar/PSI withcold tires

195/45 R 1887 H XL M+S

225/35 R 1887 Y XL

2.5 / 36 2.2 / 32




175/65 R 15 84H A/S

195/55 R 16 87V A/S

205/45 R 17 88V XL A/S

195/55 R 16 87W

205/45 R 17 88W XL

175/65 R 15 88H XL M+S

195/55 R 16 87H M+S

205/45 R 17 88V XL M+S

2.5 / 36 2.3 / 33

205/40 R 18 86W XL

175/60 R 16 86H XL M+S

185/50 R 17 86H XL M+S

2.7 / 39 2.5 / 36

Seite 251






195/55 R 16 87V A/S

195/55 R 16 87H M+S

2.3 / 33 2.2 / 32

205/45 R 17 88V XL A/S

205/45 R 17 88W XL

205/45 R 17 88V XL M+S

2.6 / 38 2.4 / 35

205/40 R 18 86W XL

175/60 R 16 86H XL M+S

185/50 R 17 86H XL M+S

2.7 / 39 2.5 / 36

Tire inflation pressures at max.speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h

Warning

In order to drive at maximum speeds in ex-cess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please ob-serve, and, if necessary, adjust tire pres-sures for speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant table on thefollowing pages. Otherwise, tire damageand accidents could occur.

For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and foroptimum driving comfort, note the pressurevalues in the tire inflation pressure table,refer to page 252, and adjust as necessary.

Tire inflation pressure values over100 mph/160 km/h




175/65 R 15 84H A/S

195/55 R 16 87V A/S

205/45 R 17 88V XL A/S

195/55 R 16 87W

205/45 R 17 88W XL

175/65 R 15 88H XL M+S

195/55 R 16 87H M+S

205/45 R 17 88V XL M+S

2.7 / 39 2.5 / 36

205/40 R 18 86W XL

175/60 R 16 86H XL M+S

185/50 R 17 86H XL M+S

2.9 / 42 2.5 / 36

Seite 252





Specifications inbar/PSI withcold tires

195/55 R 16 87V A/S

195/55 R 16 87H M+S

2.8 / 41 2.4 / 35

205/45 R 17 88V XL A/S

205/45 R 17 88W XL

205/45 R 17 88V XL M+S

205/40 R 18 86W XL

175/60 R 16 86H XL M+S

185/50 R 17 86H XL M+S

3.1 / 45 2.7 / 39

On 3-door models: JOHN COOPERWORKS



205/45 R 17 88V XL A/S

205/45 R 17 88W XL

205/40 R 18 86W XL

185/50 R 17 86H XL M+S

205/45 R 17 88V XL M+S

3.4 / 49 3.0 / 44

JOHN COOPER WORKS GP

Tire size Pressure specifications inbar/PSI

Specifica-tions inbar/PSI withcold tires

195/45 R 1887 H XL M+S

2.7 / 39 2.2 / 32

225/35 R 1887 Y XL

3.1 / 45 2.6 / 38

Seite 253






175/65 R 15 84H A/S

195/55 R 16 87V A/S

205/45 R 17 88V XL A/S

195/55 R 16 87W

205/45 R 17 88W XL

175/65 R 15 88H XL M+S

195/55 R 16 87H M+S

205/45 R 17 88V XL M+S

2.8 / 41 2.6 / 38

205/40 R 18 86W XL

175/60 R 16 86H XL M+S

185/50 R 17 86H XL M+S

3.0 / 44 2.7 / 39



Specifications inbar/PSI withcold tires

195/55 R 16 87V A/S

195/55 R 16 87H M+S

2.9 / 42 2.7 / 39

205/45 R 17 88V XL A/S

205/45 R 17 88W XL

205/45 R 17 88V XL M+S

205/40 R 18 86W XL

175/60 R 16 86H XL M+S

185/50 R 17 86H XL M+S

3.2 / 46 2.9 / 42

Tire identification marks

Tire size205/45 R 17 84 V

205: nominal width in mm

45: aspect ratio in %

R: radial tire code

17: rim diameter in inches

84: load rating, not for ZR tires

V: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires

Seite 254



Maximum tire loadMaximum tire load is the maximum permis-sible weight for which the tire is approved.

Locate the maximum tire load on the tiresidewall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating– GAWR – on the certification label on thedriver’s door pillar. Divide the tire load by1.1. It must be greater than one-half of thevehicle’s Gross Axle Weight Rating –GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and tireloads, respectively.

Speed letter

Designation Maximum speed

Q up to 100 mph/160 km/h

R: up to 106 mph/170 km/h

S up to 112 mph/180 km/h

T up to 118 mph/190 km/h

H up to 131 mph/210 km/h

V up to 150 mph/240 km/h

W up to 167 mph/270 km/h

Y up to 186 mph/300 km/h

Tire Identification NumberDOT-Code: DOT xxxx xxx 0120

xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand

xxx: tire size and tire design

0120: tire age

Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelinesof the U.S. Department of Transportation.

Tire age

RecommendationRegardless of the tire tread, replace tires atleast every 6 years.

Manufacture dateYou can find the manufacture date of thetire on the tire's sidewall.

Designation Manufacture date

DOT … 0120 1st week 2020

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applica-ble on the tire sidewall between treadshoulder and maximum section width.

E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Tempera-ture A

DOT Quality GradesTreadwear

Traction AA A B C

Temperature A B C

All passenger vehicle tires must conform toFederal Safety Requirements in addition tothese grades.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire whentested under controlled conditions on aspecified government test course. E.g., atire graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well on the governmentcourse as a tire graded 100. The relativeperformance of tires depends upon the ac-tual conditions of their use, however, andmay depart significantly from the norm dueto variations in driving habits, service prac-tices and differences in road characteristicsand climate.

TractionThe traction grades, from highest to lowest,are AA, A, B, and C.

Those grades represent the tire's ability tostop on wet pavement as measured under

Seite 255



controlled conditions on specified govern-ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.A tire marked C may have poor traction per-formance.

The traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

TemperatureThe temperature grades are A, the highest,B, and C, representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and its ability todissipate heat when tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoor laboratorytest wheel. Sustained high temperature cancause the material of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, and excessive tempera-ture can lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level of perform-ance which all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No. 109. Grades Band Arepresent higher levels of performance onthe laboratory test wheel than the minimumrequired by law.

Warning

The temperature grade for this tire is es-tablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed, un-derinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can causeheat buildup and possible tire failure.

RSC – Run-flat tiresRun-flat tires, refer to page 259, are labeledwith a circular symbol containing the let-ters RSC marked on the sidewall.

M+SWinter and all-season tires with better coldweather performance than summer tires.

Tire tread

Summer tiresDo not drive with a tire tread of less than0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an in-creased risk of hydroplaning.

Winter tiresDo not drive with a tire tread of less than0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitablefor winter operation.

Minimum tread depth

Wear indicators are distributed around thetire's circumference and have the legally re-quired minimum height of 0.063 in-ches/1.6 mm.

The positions of the wear indicators aremarked on the tire sidewall with TWI, TreadWear Indicator.

Seite 256



Tire damage

General informationInspect your tires regularly for damage, for-eign objects lodged in the tread, and treadwear.

Driving over rough or damaged road surfa-ces, as well as debris, curbs and other obsta-cles can cause serious damage to wheels,tires and suspension parts. This is morelikely to occur with low-profile tires, whichprovide less cushioning between the wheeland the road. Be careful to avoid road haz-ards and reduce your speed, especially ifyour vehicle is equipped with low-profiletires.

Indications of tire damage or other vehiclemalfunctions:

– Unusual vibrations.

– Unusual tire or running noises.

– Unusual handling such as a strong ten-dency to pull to the left or right.

Damage can be caused by the following sit-uations, for instance:

– Driving over curbs.

– Road damage.

– Tire inflation pressure too low.

– Vehicle overloading.

– Incorrect tire storage.

Safety information

Warning

Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pres-sure, which can lead to loss of vehicle con-trol. There is a risk of accident. If tire dam-age is suspected while driving,immediately reduce speed and stop. Havewheels and tires checked. For this pur-pose, drive carefully to the nearest dealer’sservice center or another qualified service

center or repair shop. Have vehicle towedor transported as needed. Do not repairdamaged tires, but have them replaced.

Warning

Tires can become damaged by driving overobstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, athigh speed. Larger wheels have a smallertire cross-section. The smaller the tirecross-section, the higher the risk of tiredamage. There is a danger of accidents andproperty damage. If possible, avoid drivingover objects or road conditions that maydamage tires, or drive over them slowlyand carefully.

Changing wheels and tires

Mounting and wheel balancingHave mounting and tire and wheel balanc-ing carried out by a dealer’s service centeror another qualified service center or repairshop.

Wheel and tire combination

General informationYou can ask the dealer's service center oranother qualified service center or repairshop about the correct wheel/tire combina-tion and wheel rim versions for the vehicle.

Safety information

Warning

Wheels and tires which are not suitablefor your vehicle can damage parts of thevehicle, for instance due to contact withthe body due to tolerances despite thesame official size rating. There is a risk of

Seite 257



an accident. The manufacturer of your ve-hicle strongly suggests that you usewheels and tires that have been recom-mended by the vehicle manufacturer foryour vehicle type.

Warning

Incorrect wheel/tire combinations willhave a negative impact on the vehicle'shandling and on the function of a varietyof systems, such as the ABS Antilock Brak-ing System or DSC Dynamic Stability Con-trol. There is a risk of accident. To main-tain good handling and vehicle response,use only tires with a single tread configu-ration from a single manufacturer. Themanufacturer of the vehicle recommendsthat you use wheels and tires that havebeen recommended by the vehicle manu-facturer for your vehicle type. Followingtire damage, have the original wheel/tirecombination remounted on the vehicle assoon as possible.

Recommended tire brands

For each tire size, the manufacturer of thevehicle recommends certain tire brands.The tire brands can be identified by a staron the tire sidewall.

New tiresTire traction is not optimal due to manufac-turing circumstances when tires are brand-

new; they achieve their full traction poten-tial after a break-in time.

Drive conservatively for the first200 miles/300 km.

Retreaded tires

Warning

Retreaded tires can have different tire cas-ing structures. With advanced age theservice life can be limited. There is a riskof an accident. The manufacturer of yourvehicle does not recommend the use of re-treaded tires.

The manufacturer of the vehicle does notrecommend the use of retreaded tires.

Winter tiresWinter tires are recommended for operat-ing on winter roads.

Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro-vide better winter traction than summertires, they usually do not provide the samelevel of performance as winter tires.

Maximum speed of winter tiresIf the maximum speed of the vehicle ishigher than the permissible speed for thewinter tires, then attach a label showing thepermissible maximum speed in the field ofview. The label is available from a dealer'sservice center or another qualified servicecenter or repair shop.

With winter tires mounted, observe and donot exceed the permissible maximum speed.

Changing runflat tiresFor your own safety, use only runflat tires.Further information is available from a deal-er's service center or another qualified serv-ice center or repair shop.

Seite 258



Rotating wheels between axlesDifferent wear patterns can occur on thefront and rear axles depending on individualdriving conditions. The tires can be rotatedin pairs between the axles to achieve evenwear. Further information is available froma dealer's service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop. After rotating,check the tire pressure and correct, ifneeded.

Storing tires

Tire inflation pressureDo not exceed the maximum tire inflationpressure indicated on the side wall of thetire.

StorageStore wheels and tires in a cool, dry anddark place.

Always protect tires against all contact withoil, grease, and solvents.

Do not leave tires in plastic bags.

Remove dirt from wheels or tires.

Run-flat tires

ConceptRun-flat tires permit continued driving un-der restricted conditions even in the eventof a complete loss of tire inflation pressure.

General informationThe wheels are composed of tires that areself-supporting to a limited degree.

The support of the sidewall allows the tireto remain drivable to a restricted degree inthe event of a tire inflation pressure loss.

Follow the instructions for continued driv-ing with a flat tire.

Safety information

Warning


Label

The tires are marked on the tire sidewallwith RSC Run-flat System Component.

Repairing a flat tire

Safety measures– Park the vehicle as far away as possible

from passing traffic and on solid ground.

– Switch on the hazard warning system.

– Secure the vehicle against rolling awayby setting the parking brake.

– Turn the steering wheel until the frontwheels are in the straight-ahead posi-tion and engage the steering wheel lock.

– Have all vehicle occupants get out of thevehicle and ensure that they remain out-

Seite 259



side the immediate area in a safe place,such as behind a guardrail.

– If necessary, set up a warning triangleat an appropriate distance.

John Cooper Works GP: sporttires

General informationThe vehicle is fitted with sport tires, whichhave been optimized for use on a racetrackin dry conditions.

More information on wheels and tires:

– From a dealer’s service center or an-other qualified service center or repairshop.

– Internet: www.hankooktire.com

Safety information

Warning

At temperatures below 14 ℉/-10 ℃, thesport tires can become damaged, for in-stance torn and broken. There may be arisk of accident or risk of damage to prop-erty. Do not move, mount, or drive onsport tires at temperatures below14 ℉/-10 ℃.

StorageIf the sport tires are not used for a long pe-riod of time, we recommend removing thewheels from the vehicle and lowering thetire inflation pressure to half the levelspecified by the manufacturer.

Store wheels or sport tires in a clean, dry,and dark place at temperatures above32 ℉/0 ℃.

Use on the roadThe sport tires meet the legal regulationsfor use on public roads.

After being used on a racetrack, the sporttires may no longer be suitable for road use.Therefore, after they have been used on aracetrack, check the sport tires against thelegal regulations for use on public roads,for instance the minimum tread depth.

Use on a racetrack

General informationInspect the sport tires for damage, foreignobjects lodged in the tread, and tread wearevery time before using them on a race-track.

Bring the sport tires to the correct tempera-ture for use on a racetrack. To do this, drivea few circuits with an appropriate drivingstyle.

Intensive useAfter an extended period of intensive driv-ing on a racetrack and driving over curbs orleaving the roadway, the sport tires can be-come damaged.

Inspect the sport tires for damage, foreignobjects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.The wheel must be removed in order to in-spect the outside and inside of the sporttires. Have the sport tires checked by adealer’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.

Tire inflation pressure

General informationCheck the tire inflation pressure regularlyand correct it if necessary, taking the regu-lations for use on the road or a racetrackinto account.

Seite 260



Tire inflation pressure specificationsThe tire inflation pressure table contains alltire inflation pressure specifications for thespecified tire sizes at the ambient tempera-ture. The tire inflation pressure values applyto tire sizes approved by the manufacturerof the vehicle for the vehicle type.

To identify the correct tire inflation pres-sure, please note the following:

– Tire sizes of your vehicle.

– Maximum permitted driving speed.

Use on a racetrackThe tires heat up while driving. The tire in-flation pressure increases with the tire tem-perature.

After a period of intensive driving, correctthe tire inflation pressure in the heatedtires to the tire inflation pressure valuesspecified by the vehicle manufacturer.

After they have been used on a racetrack,allow the tires to cool down for at least2 hours. Reset the tire inflation pressure ofthe cold tires to the tire inflation pressurevalues specified by the vehicle manufac-turer.

After correcting the tire inflation pressure,carry out a reset of the Tire Pressure Moni-tor TPM.

Tire inflation pressure values up to100 mph/160 km/h


Specifica-tions inbar/PSIwith coldtires

225/35 R18 87 Y XL

2.5 / 36 2.2 / 32

Tire inflation pressure values over100 mph/160 km/h


Specifica-tions inbar/PSIwith coldtires

225/35 R18 87 Y XL

3.1 / 45 2.6 / 38

Mobility System

ConceptWith the Mobility System, minor tire dam-age can be sealed temporarily to enable con-tinued travel. To accomplish this, sealant ispumped into the tires, which seals the dam-age from the inside.

General information– Follow the instructions on using the

Mobility System found on the compres-sor and sealant container.

– Use of the Mobility System may be inef-fective if the tire puncture measures ap-prox. 1/8 inches/4 mm or more.

– Contact a dealer's service center or an-other qualified service center or repairshop if the tire cannot be made drivable.

– Do not remove foreign bodies that havepenetrated the tire. Only remove foreignobjects if they are visibly protrudingfrom the tire.

– Pull the speed limit sticker off the seal-ant container and apply it to the steer-ing wheel.

– The use of a sealant can damage theTPM wheel electronics. In this case,

Seite 261



have the TPM wheel electronics re-placed at the next opportunity.

– The compressor can be used to checkthe tire inflation pressure.

Overview

StorageThe Mobility System is located under thecargo floor panel.

Sealant container

– Sealant container, arrow 1.

– Filling hose, arrow 2.

Observe use-by date on the sealant con-tainer.

Compressor

1 Sealant container unlocking

2 Sealant container holder

3 Tire pressure gage

4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button

5 On/off switch

6 Compressor

7 Connector/cable for socket

8 Connection hose

Safety measures– Park the vehicle as far away as possible

from passing traffic and on solid ground.


– Secure the vehicle against rolling awayby setting the parking brake.

– Turn the steering wheel until the frontwheels are in the straight-ahead posi-tion and engage the steering wheel lock.

– Have all vehicle occupants get out of thevehicle and ensure that they remain out-side the immediate area in a safe place,such as behind a guardrail.

– If necessary, set up a warning triangleat an appropriate distance.

Filling the tire with sealant

Safety information

DANGER

If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila-tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gasescan enter into the vehicle. The exhaustgases contain pollutants which are color-less and odorless. In enclosed areas, ex-haust gases can also accumulate outside ofthe vehicle. There is danger to life. Keepthe exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficientventilation.

NOTICE

The compressor can overheat during ex-tended operation. There is a risk of dam-age to property. Do not run the compres-sor for more than 10 minutes.

Seite 262



Filling1. Shake the sealant container.

2. Pull filling hose completely out of thecover of the sealant container. Do notkink the hose.

3. Slide the sealant container into theholder on the compressor housing, en-suring that it engages audibly.

4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con-tainer onto the tire valve of the non-working wheel.

5. With the compressor switched off, in-sert the plug into the power socket in-side the vehicle.

6. With the ignition switched on or the en-gine running, switch on the compressor.

Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutesto fill the tire with sealant and achieve atire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.

While the tire is being filled with sealant,the tire inflation pressure may sporadicallyreach approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off thecompressor at this point.

Seite 263



Checking and adjusting the tireinflation pressure

Checking1. Switch off the compressor.

2. Read the tire inflation pressure on thetire pressure gage.

To continue the trip, a tire inflation pres-sure of at least 2 bar must be reached.

Removing and stowing the sealantcontainer1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant

container from the tire valve.

2. Press the red unlocking device.

3. Remove the sealant container from thecompressor.

4. Wrap and store the sealant container insuitable material to avoid dirtying thecargo area.

Minimum tire inflation pressure is notreached1. Pull the connector out of the power

socket inside the vehicle.

2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back todistribute the sealant in the tire.

3. Screw the connection hose of the com-pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.

4. Insert the connector into the powersocket inside the vehicle.

5. With the ignition switched on or the en-gine running, switch on the compressor.

If a tire inflation pressure of at least2 bar cannot be reached, contact yourdealer's service center or another quali-fied service center or repair shop.

If a tire inflation pressure of at least2 bar is reached, see Minimum tire infla-tion pressure is reached.

6. Unscrew the connection hose of thecompressor from the tire valve.

7. Pull the connector out of the powersocket inside the vehicle.

8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.

Minimum tire inflation pressure isreached1. Unscrew the connection hose of the

compressor from the tire valve.



4. Immediately drive approx.5 miles/10 km to ensure that the sealantis evenly distributed in the tire.

Do not exceed a speed of50 mph/80 km/h.

If possible, do not drive at speeds lessthan 12 mph/20 km/h.

Seite 264



Adjustment1. Stop at a suitable location.

2. Screw the connection hose of the com-pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.

3. Insert the connector into the powersocket inside the vehicle.

4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to atleast 2.0 bar.

– Increase tire inflation pressure: withthe ignition switched on or the en-gine running, switch on the com-pressor.

– Reduce tire inflation pressure: pressthe button on the compressor.

5. Unscrew the connection hose of thecompressor from the tire valve.



Continuing the tripDo not exceed the maximum permissiblespeed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer topage 159.

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer topage 154.

Replace the nonworking tire and the sealantcontainer of the Mobility System promptly.

Snow chains

General informationThe manufacturer of the vehicle has deter-mined certain wheels and tires to be suita-ble for operation on the vehicle.

Follow the snow chain manufacturer's in-structions.

Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor aftermounting snow chains, as doing so may re-sult in incorrect readings.

Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPMafter mounting snow chains, as doing somay result in incorrect readings.

When driving with snow chains, briefly ac-tivate Dynamic Traction Control DTC, ifneeded.

Safety information

Warning

With the mounting of snow chains on un-suitable tires, the snow chains can comeinto contact with vehicle parts. There maybe a risk of accident or risk of damage toproperty. Only mount snow chains on tiresthat are designated by their manufactureras suitable for the use of snow chains.

Seite 265



Warning

Insufficiently tight snow chains may dam-age tires and vehicle components. Theremay be a risk of accident or risk of damageto property. Make sure that the snowchains are always sufficiently tight. Re-tighten as needed according to the snowchain manufacturer's instructions.

Fine-link snow chainsThe manufacturer of the vehicle recom-mends the use of fine-link snow chains. Cer-tain types of fine-link snow chains havebeen tested by the manufacturer of the ve-hicle and recommended as road-safe andsuitable.

Information regarding suitable snow chainsis available from a dealer’s service center oranother qualified service center or repairshop.

UseUse only in pairs on the front wheels, equip-ped with the tires of the following size:

– 175/65 R 15.

– 175/60 R 16.

– 185/50 R 17.

John Cooper Works:

185/50 R 17.


195/45 R 18.

Maximum speed with snow chainsDo not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/hwhen using snow chains.

Changing wheels/tires

General informationWhen using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, awheel does not always need to be changedimmediately when there is a loss of tire in-flation pressure due to a flat tire.

If needed, the tools for changing wheels areavailable as accessories from a dealer’sservice center or another qualified servicecenter or repair shop.

Safety information

DANGER

The vehicle jack is only provided for short-term lifting of the vehicle for wheelchanges. Even if all safety measures areobserved, there is a risk of the raised vehi-cle falling, if the vehicle jack tips over.There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under thevehicle and do not start the engine.

DANGER

Supports such as wooden blocks under thevehicle jack reduce the capacity of the ve-hicle jack to bear weight. They have thepotential to exert too much strain on thevehicle jack, causing it to tip over and thevehicle to fall. There is a risk of injuries ordanger to life. Do not place supports underthe vehicle jack.

Warning

The jack, issued by the vehicle manufac-turer, is provided in order to perform awheel change in the event of a breakdown.The jack is not designed for frequent use;for example, changing from summer towinter tires. Using the jack frequently may

Seite 266



cause it to become jammed or damaged.There is a risk of injury and risk of damageto property. Only use the jack to attach anemergency or spare wheel in the event ofa breakdown.

Warning

On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for ex-ample snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jackcan slip away. There is a risk of injury. Ifpossible, change the wheel on a flat, solid,and slip-resistant surface.

Warning

The vehicle jack is optimized for liftingthe vehicle and for the jacking points onthe vehicle only. There is a risk of injury.Do not lift any other vehicle or cargo usingthe vehicle jack.

Warning

When the vehicle jack is not inserted intothe jacking point provided for this pur-pose, the vehicle may be damaged or thevehicle jack may slip when it is beingcranked up. There is a risk of injury or riskof damage to property. When cranking upthe vehicle jack, ensure that it is insertedin the jacking point next to the wheelhousing.

Warning

A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jackmay fall off of the jack if lateral forces areexerted on it. There is a risk of injury andrisk of damage to property. While the ve-hicle is raised, do not exert lateral forceson the vehicle or pull abruptly on the vehi-cle. Have a stuck wheel removed by a deal-

er’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.

Securing the vehicle against rolling

General informationThe vehicle manufacturer recommends toadditionally secure the vehicle against roll-ing away when changing a wheel.

On a level surface

Place wheel chocks or other suitable objectsin front and behind the wheel that is diago-nal to the wheel to be changed.

On a slight downhill gradient

If you need to change a wheel on a slightdownhill grade, place chocks and other suit-able objects, for instance a rock, under thewheels of both the front and rear axlesagainst the rolling direction.

Seite 267



Lug bolt lock

ConceptThe wheel lug bolts have a special coding.The lug bolts can only be released with theadapter which matches the coding.

OverviewThe adapter of the lug bolt lock is located inthe onboard vehicle tool kit, refer topage 283.

– Lug bolt, arrow 1.

– Adapter, arrow 2.

Unscrewing1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt.

2. Unscrew the lug bolt.

3. Remove the adapter after unscrewingthe lug bolt.

Screwing on1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt. If

necessary, turn the adapter until it fitson the lug bolt.

2. Screw on the lug bolt. The tighteningtorque is 140 Nm.

3. Remove the adapter and stow it afterscrewing on the lug bolt.

Preparing the vehicle– Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip

ground at a safe distance from traffic.



– Engage a gear or move the selector leverto position P.

– As soon as permitted by the traffic flow,have all vehicle occupants get out of thevehicle and ensure that they remain out-side the immediate area in a safe place,such as behind a guardrail.

– Depending on the vehicle equipment,get wheel change tools and, if necessary,the emergency wheel from the vehicle.

– If necessary, set up a warning triangleor portable hazard warning light at anappropriate distance.

– Secure the vehicle additionally againstrolling.

– Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.

Jacking points for the vehicle jack

The jacking points for the vehicle jack arelocated at the marked positions.

Seite 268



Jacking up the vehicle

Warning

Hands and fingers can be jammed whenusing the vehicle jack. There is a risk ofinjury. Comply with the described handposition and do not change this positionwhile using the vehicle jack.

1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, ar-row 1, and grasp the vehicle jack crankor lever with your other hand, arrow 2.

2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectan-gular recess of the jacking point closestto the wheel to be changed.

3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning thevehicle jack crank or lever clockwise.

4. Take your hand away from the vehiclejack as soon as the vehicle jack is underload and continue turning the vehiclejack crank or lever with one hand.

5. Make sure that the vehicle jack footstands vertically and at a right angle be-neath the jacking point.

6. Make sure that the vehicle jack footstands vertically and perpendicularly be-neath the jacking point after extendingthe vehicle jack.

7. Crank the vehicle up, until the vehiclejack is with the entire surface on the

Seite 269



ground and the relevant wheel is maxi-mum 1.2 inches/3 cm above ground.

Mounting a wheelMount one emergency wheel only, as re-quired.

1. Unscrew the lug bolts.

2. Remove the wheel.

3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheelon and screw in at least two lug bolts ina crosswise pattern until hand-tight.

If non-original light-alloy wheels of thevehicle manufacturer are mounted, theaccompanying lug bolts may have to beused as well.

4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug boltsand tighten all lug bolts well in a cross-wise pattern.

5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counter-clockwise to retract the vehicle jack andlower the vehicle.

6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it se-curely.

After the wheel change1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The

tightening torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm.

2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargoarea, if necessary.

The nonworking wheel cannot be storedunder the cargo floor panel because ofits size.

3. Check tire inflation pressure at the nextopportunity and correct as needed.

4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.

5. Check to make sure the lug bolts aretight with a calibrated torque wrench.

6. Have the damaged tire replaced at thenearest dealer's service center or an-

other qualified service center or repairshop.

Emergency wheel

ConceptIn the event of a flat tire, the emergencywheel can be used in place of the wheelwith the defective tire. The emergencywheel is only intended for temporary useuntil the defective tire/wheel has been re-placed.

General informationMount one emergency wheel only.

Also check the tire inflation pressure of theemergency wheel in the cargo area regu-larly, and correct it as needed.

Safety information

Warning

The emergency wheel has particular di-mensions. When driving with an emer-gency wheel, changed driving propertiesmay occur, for instance reduced lane sta-bility when braking, longer braking dis-tance, and changed self-steering proper-ties in the limit area. There is a risk ofaccident. Drive moderately and do not ex-ceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

OverviewThe emergency wheel is housed in a well onthe underbody of the vehicle. The screwconnection of the emergency wheel is underthe cargo floor panel, on the floor of thestorage compartment for the onboard vehi-cle tool kit.

The wheel change tools are under the cargofloor panel.

Seite 270



Removing the emergency wheel1. Loosen the nut using the wheel wrench

from the onboard vehicle tool kit.

2. Remove the retaining plate.

3. Screw wheel lug wrench onto the threadand hold in place with one hand.

4. Unlock the locking hexagon of the emer-gency wheel well using the hexagon at-tached to retaining plate.

5. Lower the emergency wheel with thewheel wrench.

6. Unscrewing the wheel wrench

7. Pull out the well with emergency wheelunder the vehicle toward the rear.

8. Remove the spacer and emergencywheel from the well.

9. Stow the well and spacer in the vehicle.

Replacing the tires1. Have the damaged tire replaced.

2. Replace the emergency wheel with thenew wheel.

Installing the emergency wheelHave the emergency wheel installed backinto the vehicle by a dealer’s service centeror another qualified service center or repairshop.

Seite 271



Engine compartment




Overview

1 Filler neck for washer fluid

2 Vehicle identification number

3 Oil filler neck

4 Jump-starting, positive terminal

5 Jump-starting, negative terminal

6 Coolant reservoir

Seite 272

MOBILITY Engine compartment


Hood

Safety information

Warning

Improperly executed work in the enginecompartment can damage vehicle compo-nents and impair vehicle functions. Thereis a risk of an accident and damage toproperty. Have work in the engine com-partment performed by a dealer’s servicecenter or another qualified service centeror repair shop.

Warning

The engine compartment accommodatesmoving components. Certain componentsin the engine compartment can also movewith the vehicle switched off, for instancethe radiator fan. There is a risk of injury.Do not reach into the area of moving parts.Keep articles of clothing and hair awayfrom moving parts.

Warning

There are protruding parts, for instancelocking hook, on the inside of the hood.There is a risk of injury. If the hood isopen, pay attention to protruding partsand keep clear of these areas.

Warning

An incorrectly locked hood can open whiledriving and restrict visibility. There is arisk of accident. Stop immediately and cor-rectly close the hood.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when openingand closing the hood. There is a risk of in-jury. Make sure that the area of movementof the hood is clear during opening andclosing.

NOTICE

Folded-away wipers can be jammed whenthe hood is opened. There is a risk of dam-age to property. Make sure that the wiperswith the wiper blades mounted are foldeddown onto the windshield before openingthe hood.

NOTICE

When the hood is closed, it must engageon both sides. Pressing again can damagethe hood. There is a risk of damage toproperty. Open the hood again and thenclose it energetically. Avoid pressingagain.

Opening the hood1. Pull lever, arrow 1.

Hood is unlocked.

2. After the lever is released, pull the leveragain, arrow 2.

Hood can be opened.

Seite 273

Engine compartment MOBILITY


Indicator/warning lightsWhen the hood is opened, a Check Controlmessage is displayed.

Closing the hood

Energetically close the hood from approx.20 in/50 cm.

The hood must engage on both sides.

Seite 274

MOBILITY Engine compartment


Engine oil



General information

The engine oil consumption is dependent onyour driving style and driving conditions.

Therefore, regularly check the engine oillevel after refueling by taking a detailedmeasurement.

The engine oil consumption can increase inthe following situations, for instance:

– Sporty driving style.

– Break-in of the engine.

– Idling of the engine.

– With use of engine oil types that areclassified as not suitable.

Different Check Control messages appear,depending on the engine oil level.

Safety information

NOTICE

An engine oil level that is too low causesengine damage. There is a risk of damageto property. Immediately add engine oil.

NOTICE

Too much engine oil can damage the en-gine or the catalytic converter. There is arisk of damage to property. Do not add toomuch engine oil. When too much engineoil is added, have the engine oil level cor-rected by a dealer’s service center or an-other qualified service center or repairshop.

Electronic oil measurement

General informationThe electronic oil measurement has twomeasuring principles:

– Monitoring.

– Detailed measurement.

When making frequent short-distance tripsor using a dynamic driving style, for in-stance when taking curves aggressively,regularly perform a detailed measurement.

Monitoring

ConceptThe engine oil level is monitored electroni-cally while driving and can be shown on theControl Display.

Seite 275

Engine oil MOBILITY


If the engine oil level is outside its permis-sible operating range, a Check Control mes-sage is displayed.

A red indicator light indicates thatthe engine oil pressure is too low.

Functional requirementsA current measured value is available afterapprox. 30 minutes of normal driving.

Displaying the engine oil levelVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"


The engine oil level is displayed.

System limitsWhen making frequent short-distance tripsor using a dynamic driving style, it may notbe possible to calculate a measured value.In this case, the measured value for the last,sufficiently long trip is displayed.

Detailed measurement

ConceptThe engine oil level is checked when the ve-hicle is stationary and displayed via a scale.

If the engine oil level is outside its permis-sible operating range, a Check Control mes-sage is displayed.

General informationDuring the measurement, the idle speed isincreased somewhat.

Functional requirements– Vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi-

tion.

– Manual transmission: shift lever in neu-tral position, clutch and accelerator ped-als not depressed.

– Steptronic transmission: selector leverin selector lever position N or P and ac-celerator pedal not depressed.

– Engine is running and is at operatingtemperature.

Performing a detailed measurementVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"


4. "Measure engine oil level"

5. "Start measurement"

The engine oil level is checked and dis-played via a scale.

Adding engine oil

General informationOnly add engine oil when the message isdisplayed in the instrument cluster. Thequantity to be added is indicated in themessage displayed in the instrument clus-ter.

Only add suitable types of engine oil, referto page 278.

Safely park the vehicle and switch off theignition before adding engine oil.

Take care not to add too much engine oil.

Seite 276

MOBILITY Engine oil


Safety information

Warning

Operating materials, for instance oils,greases, coolants, fuels, can contain harm-ful ingredients. There is a risk of injuriesor danger to life. Follow the instructionson the containers. Avoid the contact of ar-ticles of clothing, skin or eyes with operat-ing materials. Do not refill operating mate-rials into different bottles. Store operatingmaterials out of reach of children.

NOTICE

An engine oil level that is too low causesengine damage. There is a risk of damageto property. Immediately add engine oil.

NOTICE

Too much engine oil can damage the en-gine or the catalytic converter. There is arisk of damage to property. Do not add toomuch engine oil. When too much engineoil is added, have the engine oil level cor-rected by a dealer’s service center or an-other qualified service center or repairshop.

OverviewThe oil filler neck is located in the enginecompartment, refer to page 272.

Adding engine oil1. Open the hood, refer to page 273.

2. Open the lid counterclockwise.

3. Add engine oil.

4. Close the lid.

Engine oil types to add

General informationThe engine oil quality is critical for the lifeof the engine.

Only add the types of engine oil which arelisted.

Safety information

NOTICE

Oil additives can damage the engine.There is a risk of damage to property. Donot use oil additives.

NOTICE

Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc-tions in the engine or damage it. There is arisk of damage to property. When select-ing an engine oil, make sure that the en-gine oil has the correct oil rating.

Seite 277

Engine oil MOBILITY


Suitable engine oil typesAdd engine oils that meet the following oilrating standards:

Gasoline engine

BMW Longlife-01 FE.

BMW Longlife-14 FE+.

BMW Longlife-17 FE+.

Alternative engine oil typesIf an engine oil suitable for continuous useis not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of anengine oil with the following oil rating canbe added:

Oil rating

API SL.

API SM.

API SN.

Viscosity gradesWhen selecting an engine oil, make surethat the engine oil belongs to one of the fol-lowing viscosity grades:

Viscosity grades

SAE 0W-20.

SAE 0W-30.

More information about suitable oil ratingsand viscosity grades of engine oils can berequested from a dealer’s service center oranother qualified service center or repairshop.

Engine oil change

NOTICE

Engine oil that is not changed in timelyfashion can cause increased engine wearand thus engine damage. There is a risk ofdamage to property. It is recommendedthat you do not exceed the service inter-vals indicated in the vehicle.

The vehicle manufacturer recommends thatyou have a dealer's service center or an-other qualified service center or repair shopchange the engine oil.

Seite 278

MOBILITY Engine oil


Coolant



General information

Coolant consists of water and additives.

Not all commercially available additives aresuitable for the vehicle. Do not mix addi-tives of different colors. Observe the water -additive mixing ratio of 50:50. Informationabout suitable additives is available from adealer’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.

Safety information

Warning

With the engine hot and the cooling sys-tem open, coolant can escape and lead toscalding. There is a risk of injury. Onlyopen the cooling system with the enginecooled down.

Warning

Additives are harmful and incorrect addi-tives can damage the engine. There is arisk of injury and risk of damage to prop-erty. Do not allow additives to come intocontact with skin, eyes or articles of cloth-ing. Use suitable additives only.

Coolant level

CheckingThere are yellow Min and Max marks in thecoolant reservoir.

1. Let the engine cool.

2. Open the hood, refer to page 273.

3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoirslightly counterclockwise to allow anyexcess pressure to dissipate, then openit.

4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.

Seite 279

Coolant MOBILITY


5. The coolant level is correct if it lies be-tween the minimum and maximummarks in the filler neck.

6. Close the lid.

Adding coolant1. Let the engine cool.


3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoirslightly counterclockwise to allow anyexcess pressure to dissipate, then openit.

4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.

5. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolantup to the specified level; do not overfill.

6. Close the lid.

7. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi-nated as soon as possible.

Disposal

Comply with the relevant environ-mental protection regulations whendisposing of coolant and coolant ad-

ditives.

Seite 280

MOBILITY Coolant


Maintenance



MINI maintenance system

The maintenance system provides servicenotifications and thereby provides supportin maintaining road safety and the opera-tional reliability of the vehicle.

In some cases, scopes and intervals of themaintenance system may vary according tothe country version. Replacement work,spare parts, fuels and lubricants, and wearmaterials are calculated separately. Furtherinformation is available from a dealer's serv-ice center or another qualified service cen-ter or repair shop.

Condition Based Service CBS

ConceptSensors and special algorithms take into ac-count the driving conditions of the vehicle.CBS uses these to calculate the need formaintenance.

The system makes it possible to adapt theamount of maintenance corresponding toyour user profile.

General informationInformation on service notifications, referto page 131, can be displayed on the ControlDisplay.

Service data in the vehicle keyInformation on the service notifications iscontinuously stored in the vehicle key. Theservice center can read this data out andsuggest a maintenance scope for the vehi-cle.

Therefore, hand the service advisor the ve-hicle key with which the vehicle was drivenmost recently.

Storage periodsStorage periods during which the vehiclebattery was disconnected are not taken intoaccount.

If this occurs, have a dealer's service centeror another qualified service center or repairshop update the time-dependent mainte-nance procedures, such as checking brakefluid and, if necessary, changing the engineoil and the microfilter/activated-charcoalfilter.

Maintenance Manual andService and Warranty Infor-mation Booklet for US modelsand Warranty and ServiceGuide Booklet for Canadianmodels

Please consult your Maintenance Manualand Service and Warranty InformationBooklet for US models and Warranty and

Seite 281

Maintenance MOBILITY


Service Guide Booklet for Canadian modelsfor additional information on the perform-ance of service and maintenance work.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-mends that maintenance and repair be per-formed by a service center or another quali-fied service center or repair shop. Recordsof regular maintenance and repair workshould be retained.

Socket for OBD Onboard Diag-nosis

General informationDevices connected to the OBD socket trig-ger the alarm system when the vehicle islocked. Remove any devices connected atthe OBD socket before locking the vehicle.

Safety information

NOTICE

The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an in-tricate component intended to be used inconjunction with specialized equipment tocheck the vehicle’s primary emissions sys-tem. Improper use of the socket for On-board Diagnosis, or contact with thesocket for Onboard Diagnosis for otherthan its intended purpose, can cause vehi-cle malfunctions and creates risks of per-sonal and property damage. Given the fore-going, the manufacture of your vehiclestrongly recommends that access to thesocket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited toa dealer's service center or another quali-fied service center or repair shop or otherpersons that have the specialized trainingand equipment for purposes of properlyutilizing the socket for Onboard Diagnosis.

Position

There is an OBD socket on the driver's sidefor checking the primary components in thevehicle's emissions.

Emissions– The warning light lights up:

Emissions are deteriorating.Have the vehicle checked as soonas possible.

– The warning light flashes under certaincircumstances:

This indicates that there is excessivemisfiring in the engine.

Reduce the vehicle speed and have thesystem checked immediately; otherwise,serious engine misfiring within a briefperiod can seriously damage emissioncontrol components, in particular thecatalytic converter.

Seite 282

MOBILITY Maintenance


Replacing components



Vehicle tool kit

Depending on the vehicle equipment, theonboard vehicle tool kit is located on theright side under the cargo floor panel or in abag on the right side of the cargo area.

After use, secure the bag with the onboardvehicle tool kit on a lashing eye again.

Wiper blades

Safety information

NOTICE

The window may sustain damage if thewiper falls onto it without the wiper bladeinstalled. There is a risk of damage toproperty. Hold the wiper firmly whenchanging the wiper blade. Do not fold orswitch on the wiper without a wiper bladeinstalled.

NOTICE

Folded-away wipers can be jammed whenthe hood is opened. There is a risk of dam-age to property. Make sure that the wiperswith the wiper blades mounted are foldeddown onto the windshield before openingthe hood.

Replacing the front wiper blades1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the

wiper arms.

2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.

3. Open the wiper blade lock, arrow.

Seite 283

Replacing components MOBILITY


4. Pull the wiper blade down out of theholder on the wiper arm, arrow 1.

5. Pull the wiper blade free from the holderof the wiper arm, arrow 2.

6. Insert and latch a new wiper blade in re-verse order.

7. Fold down the wiper arm.

Replacing the rear wiper blade1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.

2. Turn the wiper blade all the way back.

3. Push the wiper blade out of the fasten-ing by continuing to turn it all the way.

4. Insert the new wiper blade by followingthe steps in reverse order. The wiperblade must engage audibly.

5. Fold down the wiper arm.

Light and bulb replacement

General information

Lights and bulbsLights and bulbs make an essential contri-bution to vehicle safety.

The manufacturer of the vehicle recom-mends that you have appropriate work per-formed by a dealer’s service center or an-other qualified service center or repair shopif you are unfamiliar with it or if it has notbeen described here.

A spare light box is available from a dealer'sservice center or another qualified servicecenter or repair shop.

Follow the safety information, refer topage 284.

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)Some items of equipment use light-emittingdiodes installed behind a cover as a lightsource. These light-emitting diodes are re-lated to conventional lasers and are offi-cially designated as Class 1 light-emittingdiodes.

Follow the safety information, refer topage 284.

Safety information

Lights and bulbs

Warning

Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con-tact with the bulbs can cause burns. Thereis a risk of injury. Only change bulbs afterthey have cooled off.

Seite 284

MOBILITY Replacing components


Warning

Work on switched-on lighting systems cancause short circuits. There is a risk of in-jury or risk of damage to property. Whenworking on the lighting system, switch offthe lights in question. If necessary, heedthe bulb manufacturer's instructions.

NOTICE

Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life.There is a risk of damage to property. Donot hold new bulbs with your bare hands.Use a clean cloth or something similar, orhold the bulb by its base.

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)

Warning

Intensive brightness can irritate or dam-age the retina of the eye. There is a risk ofinjury. Do not look directly into the head-lights or other light sources. Do not re-move the LED covers.

Headlight glassCondensation can form on the inside of theheadlight glass in cool or humid weather.When driving with the lights switched on,the condensation evaporates after a shorttime. The headlight glass does not need tobe changed.

If despite driving with the headlightsswitched on, increasing humidity forms, forinstance water droplets in the light, havethe headlights checked.

Headlight settingThe headlight adjustments can be affectedby changing lights and bulbs. After theheadlight adjustment was changed, have it

checked and, if necessary, corrected by adealer’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.

Front halogen lights, bulbreplacement

Overview

Halogen headlights

1 Low beams/high beams

2 Turn signal

Low beams/high beamsFollow the general instructions on lightsand bulbs, refer to page 284.

55-watt bulb, HB2.


2. Turn the lid counterclockwise, arrow,and remove.

3. Pull off the connector.

Seite 285



4. Unclip spring clip, arrow, and fold down.

5. Remove the bulb from the headlighthousing.

6. Insert the new bulb and install the coverin the reverse order.

Turn signalFollow the general instructions on lightsand bulbs, refer to page 284.

21-watt bulb, PY21W.

1. Turn the steering wheel.

2. Turn the lid counterclockwise, arrow 1,and remove.

3. Unscrew the inner cover counterclock-wise, and remove it.

4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwiseand remove it from the bulb housing.

5. Pull the bulb out of the fixture.

6. Insert the new bulb and install the coverin the reverse order.

LED front lights, bulb replacementAll lights feature LED technology.

In the case of a malfunction, contact a deal-er's service center or another qualified serv-ice center or repair shop.

LED front fog lightsThese front fog lights are made using LEDtechnology. In the case of a malfunction,contact a dealer's service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop.

Seite 286



Tail lights, bulb replacement

Overview

Vehicles with a rear fog light

1 Side tail lights

2 Rear fog light

3 License plate light

4 Center brake light

Vehicle with two rear fog lights

1 Side tail lights

2 Rear fog lights

3 License plate light

4 Center brake light

Side tail lights

1 Tail lights

2 Turn signal

3 Brake light

4 Reversing lights

Side tail lights with Union Jack

1 Tail lights

2 Turn signals/brake lights

3 Turn signals/brake lights

4 Reversing lights

Side tail lights

Without Union Jack

Follow the general instructions on lightsand bulbs, refer to page 284.

– Bulb, brake lights: H21W.

– Bulb, turn signals: P21W.

Seite 287



– Bulb, reversing lights: P21W.

1. Open the tailgate.

2. Remove left or right cover.

3. Through the opening, loosen the plugconnector, arrow 2 on the bulb holder.

Press the latches together, arrows 1, andremove the bulb holder.

4. Remove the bulb holder from the open-ing.

5. Press the nonworking bulb gently intothe socket, turn counterclockwise andremove.

– Arrow 1: brake lights

– Arrow 2: turn signal

– Arrow 3: reversing light

6. Proceed in the reverse order to insertthe new bulb and attach the bulb holder.Make sure that the bulb holder engagesin all fasteners.

With Union Jack

Follow the general instructions on lightsand bulbs, refer to page 284.

Bulb, reversing lights: P21W.

1. Open the tailgate.

2. Remove left or right cover.

3. Turn the bulb holder for the reversinglight, arrow, counterclockwise and re-move it.

Seite 288



4. Remove the bulb holder from the open-ing.

5. Press the nonworking bulb gently intothe socket, turn counterclockwise andremove.

6. Proceed in the reverse order to insertthe new bulb and attach the bulb holder.Make sure that the bulb holder engagesin all fasteners.

Central brake light and license platelightsFollow the general instructions on lightsand bulbs, refer to page 284.

The lights feature LED technology. In thecase of a malfunction, contact a dealer'sservice center or another qualified servicecenter or repair shop.

Side turn signal, bulb replacementFollow the general instructions on lightsand bulbs, refer to page 284.

Bulbs:

– With white lens: WY5W.

1. Open the hood. The covers of the sideturn signal lights are on the left andright next to the hinges of the hood.

2. Loosen the nuts of the cover by hand orwith the onboard vehicle tool kit, referto page 283, and remove the cover.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwiseand remove.

4. Replace the bulb.

5. To insert the new bulb, proceed in re-verse order of removal.

Insert the nuts of the cover and pressdown.

Seite 289



Side scuttles

Individual side scuttles for clicking into theside turn signals are available as originalMINI accessories.

Follow the assembly instructions.

Vehicle battery

General informationThe battery is maintenance-free.

More information about the battery can berequested from a dealer's service center oranother qualified service center or repairshop.

Safety information

Warning

Vehicle batteries that are not compatiblecan damage vehicle systems and impairvehicle functions. There is a risk of an ac-cident and damage to property. Only vehi-cle batteries that are compatible with yourvehicle type should be installed in your ve-hicle. Information on compatible vehiclebatteries is available at your dealer’s serv-ice center.

Register the battery to the vehicleThe manufacturer of the vehicle recom-mends that you have a service center or an-

other qualified service center or repair shopregister the vehicle battery to the vehicleafter the battery has been replaced. Oncethe battery has been registered again, allcomfort features will be available withoutrestriction and any Check Control messagesdisplayed which relate to comfort featureswill disappear.

Charging the battery

General informationMake sure that the battery is always suffi-ciently charged to guarantee that the bat-tery remains usable for its full service life.

A discharged battery is indicated bya red indicator light.

Charge the battery in the following situa-tions:

– When the inspection glass on the top ofthe battery is black.

– When the take-off performance is insuf-ficient.

The following circumstances can have anegative effect on the performance of thebattery:

– Frequent short-distance drives.

– The vehicle is not used for more than amonth.

Safety information

NOTICE

Battery chargers for the vehicle batterycan work with high voltages and currents,which means that the 12 volt on-boardnetwork can be overloaded or damaged.There is a risk of damage to property. Onlyconnect battery chargers for the vehiclebattery to the starting aid terminals in theengine compartment.

Seite 290



Charging the batteryCharge the battery only when the engine isoff and via the starting aid terminals, referto page 295, in the engine compartment.

Power failureAfter a power loss, some equipment needsto be newly initialized or individual settingsupdated, for example:

– Memory function: store the positionsagain.

– Time: update.

– Date: update.

– Glass sunroof: initialize the system.

Disposing of old batteriesHave old batteries disposed of by adealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repair

shop or take them to a collection point.

Maintain the filled battery in an upright po-sition for transport and storage. Secure thebattery so that it does not tip over duringtransport.

Fuses

Safety information

Warning

Incorrect and repaired fuses can overloadelectrical lines and components. There is arisk of fire. Never attempt to repair ablown fuse. Do not replace a nonworkingfuse with a substitute of another color oramperage rating.

Accessing the fusesThe fuses are located in the glove compart-ment.

1. Open the glove compartment.

2. Swing the cover down, arrow.

Information on the fuse types and locations,as well as the positions of any other fuseboxes, is available on the Internet:www.mini.com/fusecard.

Where applicable, information on the fusetypes and locations is also found on a sepa-rate sheet in the fuse box.

Replacing fusesThe vehicle manufacturer recommends thatyou have a dealer's service center or an-other qualified service center or repair shopreplace the fuses.

Seite 291



Breakdown assistance



Hazard warning flashers

The button is located above the Control Dis-play.

The red light in the button flashes when thehazard warning flashers are activated.

Warning triangle

The warning triangle is located in the tail-gate. To remove, loosen the brackets.

First-aid kit

General informationSome of the articles have a limited servicelife.

Check the expiration dates of the contentsregularly and replace any expired itemspromptly.

StorageThe first-aid kit is located in the cargo area.

MINI Roadside Assistance

ConceptMINI Roadside Assistance can be contactedif assistance is needed in the event of abreakdown.

Seite 292

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance


General informationIn the event of a breakdown, data on the ve-hicle's condition is sent to the vehicle man-ufacturer.

There are various ways of making contact.

– Via a Check Control message, refer topage 125.

– Calling with a mobile phone.

Requirements– Active MINI Connected contract or

equipment version with intelligentemergency call.

– Cellular network reception.

– The ignition is switched on.

StartingIf the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices,support is offered through Teleservice Diag-nosis.


1. "MINI Connected"

2. "MINI Assist"

3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"

The contact to the Roadside Assistanceof the manufacture is established.

A telephone number is displayed, ifneeded. Select to dial the telephonenumber on a connected mobile phone.

Teleservice DiagnosisTeleservice Diagnosis enables the wirelesstransmission of detailed vehicle data that isimportant for vehicle diagnosis. This data istransmitted automatically.

Teleservice HelpDepending on the country, the TeleserviceHelp enables a more in-depth diagnosis ofthe vehicle via wireless transmission.

You can launch Teleservice Help by re-questing it through the Service Specialist.

1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.


3. Control Display is switched on.

4. Confirm Teleservice Help.

The driving ability of the vehicle can be re-stored for specific functions.

If this is not possible, further measures willbe initiated, for instance Roadside Assis-tance will be informed.

Emergency Request

Intelligent emergency call

ConceptIn case of an emergency, an Emergency Re-quest can be triggered automatically by thesystem or manually.

General informationOnly press the SOS button in an emergency.

The Intelligent Assist system establishes aconnection with the MINI Response Center.

For technical reasons, the Emergency Re-quest cannot be guaranteed under unfavora-ble conditions.

Seite 293

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY


Overview

SOS button in the roofliner

Functional requirements– The ignition is switched on.

– The Assist system is functional.

– If the vehicle is equipped with intelli-gent emergency call: the SIM cardintegrated in the vehicle has been acti-vated.

Automatic triggeringUnder certain conditions, for instance if theairbags trigger, an Emergency Request isautomatically initiated immediately after anaccident of corresponding severity. Auto-matic Collision Notification is not affectedby pressing the SOS button.

Manual triggering1. Press the cover briefly to open it.

2. Press the SOS button until the LED atthe button lights up green.

– The LED is illuminated green when anEmergency Request has been initiated.

If the situation allows, wait in your vehi-cle until the voice connection has beenestablished.

– The LED flashes green when a connec-tion to the MINI Response Center hasbeen established.

The MINI Response Center then makescontact with you and takes further stepsto help you.

Even if you are unable to respond, theMINI Response Center can take furthersteps to help you under certain circum-stances.

For this purpose, data that serves to de-termine the necessary rescue measures,for instance the current position of thevehicle when it can be determined, istransmitted to the MINI Response Cen-ter.

If you can no longer hear the MINI Re-sponse Center through the loudspeakers,the hands-free system, for instance, maybe broken. However, the MINI ResponseCenter may still be able to hear you.

The MINI Response Center ends the Emer-gency Request.

Jump-starting

General informationIf the battery is discharged, the engine canbe started using the battery of another vehi-cle and two jumper cables. Only use jumpercables with fully insulated clamp handles.

Safety information

DANGER

Contact with live components can lead toan electric shock. There is a risk of inju-ries or danger to life. Do not touch anycomponents that are under voltage.

Seite 294



Warning

If the jumper cables are connected in theincorrect order, sparking may occur. Thereis a risk of injury. Pay attention to the cor-rect order during connection.

NOTICE

In the case of body contact between thetwo vehicles, a short circuit can occur dur-ing jump-starting. There is a risk of dam-age to property. Make sure that no bodycontact occurs.

Preparation1. Check whether the battery of the other

vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts. Thevoltage information can be found on thebattery.

2. Switch off the engine of the assistingvehicle.

3. Switch off any electronic systems/powerconsumers in both vehicles.

Starting aid terminals

The starting aid terminal in the engine com-partment acts as the battery's positive ter-minal.

Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.

The body ground or a special nut acts as thebattery negative terminal.

Connecting the cablesTo prevent personal injury or damage toboth vehicles, adhere strictly to the follow-ing procedure.

1. Pull off the lid of the starting aid termi-nal.

2. Attach one terminal clamp of the posi-tive jumper cable to the positive termi-nal of the battery, or to the correspond-ing starting aid terminal of the vehicleproviding assistance.

3. Attach the terminal clamp on the otherend of the cable to the positive terminalof the battery, or to the correspondingstarting aid terminal of the vehicle to bestarted.

4. Attach one terminal clamp of the nega-tive jumper cable to the negative termi-nal of the battery, or to the correspond-ing engine or body ground of assistingvehicle.

5. Attach the second terminal clamp to thenegative terminal of the battery, or tothe corresponding engine or bodyground of the vehicle to be started.

Seite 295



Starting the engineNever use spray fluids to start the engine.

1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicleand let it run for several minutes at anincreased idle speed.

2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is tobe started in the usual way.

If the first starting attempt is not suc-cessful, wait a few minutes before mak-ing another attempt in order to allow thedischarged battery to recharge.

3. Let both engines run for several mi-nutes.

4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re-verse order.

Check the battery and recharge, if needed.

Tow-starting and towing

Safety information

Warning


Steptronic transmission withdriven front axle: transporting thevehicle

General informationThe vehicle must not be towed if the frontwheels are touching the ground.

Safety information

NOTICE

The vehicle can be damaged when towingthe vehicle with a lifted rear axle. There isa risk of damage to property. Have vehicletransported only with lifted front axle oron a loading platform.

Pushing the vehicleTo remove a broken-down vehicle from thedanger area, it can be pushed for a shortdistance.

For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer topage 117.

Tow truck

Your vehicle should be transported with atow truck with a so-called lift bar or on aflat bed.

NOTICE

The vehicle can become damaged whenlifting and securing it.

There is a risk of damage to property.

– Lift the vehicle using suitable means.

– Do not lift or secure the vehicle by itstow fitting, body parts, or suspensionparts.

Seite 296



Manual transmission

Towing or pushing the vehicleA broken-down vehicle can be towed orpushed.

For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer topage 114.

NOTICE

If manual unlocking of the parking brakeis not possible, the vehicle cannot bemoved or towed. There is a risk of damageto property. The vehicle should only betransported on a loading platform.

Follow the following instructions:

– Make sure that the ignition is switchedon; otherwise, the low beams, tail lights,turn signals, and wipers may be unavail-able.

– Do not tow the vehicle with the rearaxle tilted, as the front wheels couldturn.

– When the engine is stopped, there is nopower assist. Consequently, more forceneeds to be applied when braking andsteering.

– Larger steering wheel movements arerequired.

– The towing vehicle must not be lighterthan the vehicle being towed; otherwise,it will not be possible to control the ve-hicle's response.

– Do not exceed a towing speed of30 mph/50 km/h.

– Do not exceed a towing distance of30 miles/50 km.

Tow truck

With driven front axle

Your vehicle should be transported with atow truck with a so-called lift bar or on aflat bed.

NOTICE

The vehicle can become damaged whenlifting and securing it.

There is a risk of damage to property.

– Lift the vehicle using suitable means.

– Do not lift or secure the vehicle by itstow fitting, body parts, or suspensionparts.

Towing other vehicles

General informationSwitch on the hazard warning system, de-pending on local regulations.

If the electrical system has failed, clearlyidentify the vehicle being towed by placinga sign or a warning triangle in the rear win-dow.

Seite 297



Safety information

Warning

If the approved gross vehicle weight of thetowing vehicle is lighter than the vehicleto be towed, the tow fitting can tear off orit will not be possible to control the vehi-cle's response. There is a risk of accident.Make sure that the gross vehicle weight ofthe towing vehicle is heavier than the ve-hicle to be towed.

NOTICE

If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in-correctly, damage to other vehicle partscan occur. There is a risk of damage toproperty. Correctly attach the tow bar ortow rope to the tow fitting.

Tow barThe tow fittings used should be on the sameside on both vehicles.

Should it prove impossible to avoid mount-ing the tow bar at an offset angle, please fol-low the following:

– Maneuvering capability is limited goingaround corners.

– The tow bar will generate lateral forcesif it is secured with an offset.

Tow ropeObserve the following notes when using thetow rope:

– Use nylon ropes or straps, which will en-able the vehicle to be towed withoutjerking.

– Make sure the tow rope is not twistedwhen fastening.

– Check the fastening of the tow fittingand tow rope in regular intervals.

– Do not exceed a towing speed of30 mph/50 km/h.

– Do not exceed a towing distance of3 miles/5 km.

– When starting to tow the vehicle, makesure that the tow rope is taut.

Tow fitting

General information

The screw-in tow fitting should always becarried in the vehicle.

The tow fitting can be screwed in at thefront or rear of the vehicle.

The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle toolkit, refer to page 283, are together in thecargo area.

Use of the tow fitting:

– Use only the tow fitting provided withthe vehicle and screw it all the way in.

– Use the tow fitting for towing on pavedroads only.

– Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting,for instance do not lift the vehicle by thetow fitting.

– Check the fastening of the tow fitting inregular intervals.

Seite 298



Safety information

NOTICE

If the tow fitting is not used as intended,there may be damage to the vehicle or tothe tow fitting. There is a risk of damageto property. Follow the notes on using thetow fitting.

Screw thread for tow fitting

Threaded holes for the tow fitting are lo-cated in the front and rear of the vehicle onthe right side with respect to the directionof travel.

Press on the mark on the edge of the coverto push it out.

Tow-starting

Steptronic transmissionDo not tow-start the vehicle.

Tow-starting the engine is not possible dueto the Steptronic transmission.

Have the reasons for the starting difficultiescorrected by a dealer’s service center or an-other qualified service center or repairshop.

Manual transmissionIf possible, do not tow-start the vehicle butstart the engine by jump-starting, refer topage 294. If the vehicle is equipped with a

catalytic converter, only tow-start while theengine is cold.

1. Switch on the hazard warning systemand comply with local regulations.

2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 98.

3. Engage third gear.

4. Have the vehicle tow-started with theclutch pedal pressed and slowly releasethe pedal. After the engine starts, imme-diately press on the clutch pedal again.

5. Stop at a suitable location, remove thetow bar or rope, and switch off the haz-ard warning system.

6. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer'sservice center or another qualified serv-ice center or repair shop.

Seite 299



Care



Washing the vehicle

General informationRegularly remove foreign objects such asleaves in the area below the windshieldwhen the hood is raised.

Wash your vehicle frequently, particularlyin winter. Intense soiling and road salt candamage the vehicle.

Steam jets or high-pressurewashers

Safety information

NOTICE

When cleaning with high-pressure wash-ers, components can be damaged due tothe pressure or temperatures being toohigh. There is a risk of damage to property.Maintain sufficient distance and do notspray too long continuously. Follow theoperating instructions for the high-pres-sure washer.

NOTICE

In the John Cooper Works GP, water maypenetrate into the engine compartmentwhen washing the underbody. There is arisk of damage to property. Do not washthe underbody for the John Cooper WorksGP;

Distances and temperature– Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.

– Minimum distance from sensors, cam-eras, seals: 12 inches/30 cm.

– Minimum distance from glass sunroof:31.5 in/80 cm.

Automatic vehicle washes

Safety information

NOTICE

In the case of the John Cooper Works GP,vehicle parts can be damaged in a carwash, for instance the rear spoiler. Thereis a risk of damage to property. Do notdrive through a car wash.

NOTICE

Water can penetrate in the windshieldarea due to high-pressure washers. Thereis a risk of damage to property. Do notdrive into high-pressure car wash systems.

Seite 300

MOBILITY Care


NOTICE

Improper use of automatic washing sys-tems or car washes can cause damage tothe vehicle. There is a risk of damage toproperty. Follow the following instruc-tions:

– Give preference to cloth car washesor those that use soft brushes in or-der to avoid paint damage.

– Do not drive through a car wash withguide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm toavoid damage to the chassis.

– Observe the tire width of the guiderail to avoid damage to tires and rims.

– Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid dam-age to the exterior mirrors.

– Unscrew the rod antenna to avoid therod antenna breaking off.

– Deactivate the wiper and, if neces-sary, rain sensor to avoid damage tothe wiper system.

Driving into a car wash with a manualtransmissionIn car washes, the vehicle must be able toroll freely.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer topage 114.

Driving into a car wash with aSteptronic transmissionIn car washes, the vehicle must be able toroll freely.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer topage 117.

Some car washes do not permit persons inthe vehicle. The vehicle cannot be lockedfrom the outside when in selector lever po-sition N. A signal is sounded when an at-tempt is made to lock the vehicle.

Driving out of a car washEnsure that the vehicle key is in the car.

Start the engine, refer to page 99.

HeadlightsDo not rub wet headlights dry and do notuse abrasive or acidic cleaning agents.

Soak areas that have been dirtied, for in-stance from insects, with shampoo andwash off with water.

Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use anice scraper.

After washing the vehicleAfter washing the vehicle, apply the brakesbriefly to dry them; otherwise, braking ac-tion can be reduced. The heat generatedduring braking dries brake discs and brakepads and protects them against corrosion.

Completely remove all residues on the win-dows, to minimize loss of visibility due tosmearing and to reduce wiper noises andwiper blade wear.

Vehicle care

Vehicle care products

General informationMINI recommends using vehicle care andcleaning products from MINI. Suitable careproducts are available from a dealer’s serv-ice center or another qualified service cen-ter or repair shop.

Seite 301

Care MOBILITY


Safety information

Warning

Cleansers can contain substances that aredangerous and harmful to your health.There is a risk of injury. When cleaningthe interior, open the doors or windows.Only use products intended for cleaningvehicles. Follow the instructions on thecontainer.

Vehicle paint

General informationRegular care contributes to driving safetyand value retention. Environmental influen-ces in areas with elevated air pollution ornatural contaminants, such as tree resin orpollen can affect the vehicle's paintwork.Tailor the frequency and extent of your ve-hicle care to these influences.

Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel,oil, grease or bird droppings, must be re-moved immediately to prevent the finishfrom being altered or discolored.

Matte finishOnly use cleaning and care products suita-ble for vehicles with matte finish.

Leather careRemove dust from the leather regularly, us-ing a cloth or vacuum cleaner.

Otherwise, particles of dust and road grimechafe in pores and folds, and lead to in-creased wear and premature degradation ofthe leather surface.

To guard against discoloration, such as fromclothing, clean leather and provide leathercare roughly every two months.

Clean light-colored leather more frequentlybecause soiling on such surfaces is substan-tially more visible.

Use leather care products; otherwise, dirtand grease will gradually break down theprotective layer of the leather surface.

Upholstery material care

General informationVacuum the upholstery regularly with avacuum cleaner.

If upholstery is very dirty, for instance withbeverage stains, use a soft sponge or micro-fiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner.

Clean the upholstery down to the seams us-ing large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbingthe material vigorously.

Safety information

NOTICE

Open Velcro® fasteners on articles ofclothing can damage the seat covers.There is a risk of damage to property. En-sure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.

Caring for special components

Light-alloy wheelsWhen cleaning the vehicle, use only neutralwheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to9. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents orsteam jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow themanufacturer's instructions.

Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaningagents can destroy the protective layer ofadjacent components, such as the brakedisc.

After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly todry them. The heat generated during brak-

Seite 302

MOBILITY Care


ing dries brake discs and brake pads andprotects them against corrosion.

Chrome surfacesCarefully clean components such as the ra-diator grille or door handles with plenty ofwater, possibly with shampoo added, partic-ularly when they have been exposed to roadsalt.

Rubber componentsEnvironmental influences can cause surfacesoiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss.Use only water and suitable cleaning agentsfor cleaning.

Treat especially worn rubber parts with rub-ber care agents at regular intervals. Whencleaning rubber seals, do not use any sili-con-containing vehicle care products in or-der to avoid damage or noises.

Fine wood partsClean fine wood facing and fine wood com-ponents only with a moist rag. Then drywith a soft cloth.

Plastic components

NOTICE

Cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents,such as lacquer thinners, heavy-dutygrease removers, fuel, or such, can damageplastic parts. There is a risk of damage toproperty. Clean with a microfiber cloth.Dampen the cloth lightly with water, ifneeded.

Clean with a microfiber cloth.

Dampen the cloth lightly with water, ifneeded.

Do not soak the roofliner.

Safety belts

Warning

Chemical cleansers can destroy the safetybelt webbing. Missing protective effect ofthe safety belts. There is a risk of injuriesor danger to life. Use only a mild soapy sol-ution for cleaning the safety belts.

Dirty belt straps impede the reeling actionand thus have a negative impact on safety.

Use only a mild soapy solution, with thesafety belts clipped into their buckles.

Safety belts should only be allowed to re-tract if they are dry.

Carpets and floor mats

Warning

Objects in the driver's floor area can limitthe pedal distance or block a depressedpedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow ob-jects in the vehicle such that they are se-cured and cannot enter into the driver'sfloor area. Use floor mats that are suitablefor the vehicle and can be safely attachedto the floor. Do not use loose floor matsand do not layer several floor mats. Makesure that there is sufficient clearance forthe pedals. Ensure that the floor mats aresecurely fastened again after they were re-moved, for instance for cleaning.

Floor mats can be removed from the car'sinterior for cleaning.

If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean witha microfiber cloth and water or a textilecleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet,rub back and forth in the direction of travelonly.

Seite 303

Care MOBILITY


Sensor/camera lensesTo clean sensors and camera lenses, use acloth moistened with a small amount ofglass detergent.

Displays/Screens/Projection lenses

NOTICE

Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids ofany kind can damage the surface of dis-plays and screens. There is a risk of dam-age to property. Clean with a clean, anti-static microfiber cloth.

NOTICE

The surface of displays can be damagedwith improper cleaning. There is a risk ofdamage to property. Avoid pressure that istoo high and do not use any scratchingmaterials.

Clean with a clean, antistatic microfibercloth.

For stubborn soiling on the projection lensof the Head-up Display, dampen the micro-fiber cloth with alcohol. Projection lens, re-fer to page 140.

Long-term vehicle storageWhen the vehicle is shut down for longerthan three months, special measures mustbe taken. Further information is availablefrom a dealer's service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop.

Seite 304

MOBILITY Care


Seite 305

Care MOBILITY


Technical data




General information

The technical data and specifications in theOwner's Manual are used as guidance val-ues. The vehicle-specific data can deviatefrom this, for instance due to the selectedspecial equipment, country version or coun-try-specific measurement method. Detailed

values can be found in the approval docu-ments, on labels on the vehicle or can be ob-tained from a dealer’s service center or an-other qualified service center or repairshop.

Dimensions

The dimensions can vary depending on themodel version, equipment or country-spe-cific measurement method.

The specified heights do not take into ac-count attached parts, for instance a roof an-

tenna, roof racks or spoiler. The heights candeviate, for instance due to the selectedspecial equipment, tires, load and chassisversion.

MINI 3-door

Width with mirrors in/mm 75.9-76.1/1,928-1,932

Width without mirrors in/mm 68-69.4/1,727-1,762

Height in/mm 55.7-55.9/1,414-1,420

Length in/mm 151.1-152.7/3,837-3,879

Wheelbase in/mm 98.2/2,495

Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 35.4-35.8/10.8-10.9

Seite 306

REFERENCE Technical data


MINI 5-door

Width with mirrors in/mm 76.1/1,932

Width without mirrors in/mm 68/1,727

Height in/mm 56.1/1,425

Length in/mm 157.4-158/3,998-4,013

Wheelbase in/mm 101.1/2,567

Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 36.1/11.0

Weights

MINI Cooper, 3-door

Approved gross vehicle weight

Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,627/1,645

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 3,627/1,645

Load

Manual transmission lbs/kg 818/371

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 763/346

Approved front axle load

Manual transmission lbs/kg 1,962/890

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,028/920

Approved rear axle load



MINI Cooper, 5-door




Load


Seite 307

Technical data REFERENCE


MINI Cooper, 5-door








MINI Cooper S, 3-door




Load













Load



Seite 308










MINI John Cooper Works, 3-door




Load









MINI John Cooper Works GP, 3-door models

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 3,318/1,505

Load lbs/kg 452/205

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,028/920

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 1,356/615

Seite 309

Technical data REFERENCE


Capacities

MINI

Fuel tank, approx. US gal/liters 11.6/44.0

Observe further information on fuel quality,refer to page 246.

Seite 310



Appendix

Any updates to the Owner's Manual of thevehicle are listed here.

Updates made after the edito-rial deadline

The following chapters were updated in theprinted version of the Owner's Manual afterthe editorial deadline for the IntegratedOwner's Manual in the vehicle had closed:

– Notes: notes: own safety: maintenance.

– Quick Reference Guide: on the road: re-fueling stop: topping up the engine oil.

– John Cooper Works GP: operation, driv-ing: Steptronic transmission, LaunchControl.

– Driving tips: observe when driving: driv-ing on a race track.

– Mobility: engine oil: topping up the en-gine oil.

– Mobility: coolant: coolant level.

– Mobility: preventive maintenance: MINImaintenance system.

– Mobility: preventive maintenance: Con-dition Based Service CBS.

– Mobility: preventive maintenance: Main-tenance Manual and Service and War-ranty Information Booklet for US modelsand Warranty and Service Guide Bookletfor Canadian models.

– John Cooper Works GP: mobility: wash-ing the vehicle: steam cleaner and highpressure cleaner.

Seite 311

Appendix REFERENCE


Everything from A to Z

Index

A

ABS Antilock Braking System 173 Acceleration Assistant, see Launch Con-

trol 121 Accessories and parts 9 ACC, see Camera-based cruise control 178 Activated-charcoal filter 205 Activation times, parked-car ventila-

tion 206 Active Cruise Control, see Camera-based

cruise control 178 Active Guard, see Intelligent Safety 161 Active Voice Recognition 44 Adaptive brake lights, see Brake force dis-

play 170 Adaptive chassis 175 Additives, engine oil types 277 Adjusting menu contents, Central Informa-

tion Display (CID) 40 Adjustments, steering wheel 90 Airbags 150 Airbags, indicator and warning light 152 Air circulation, see Recirculated-air

mode 201, 204 Air conditioner 200 Air conditioning, climate 201, 203 Air distribution, manual 201, 205 Air drying, see Air conditioning 201, 203 Air flow, air conditioner 201 Air flow, automatic climate control 204 Air pressure, tires 248 Air vents, see Ventilation 206 Alarm system 75 Alarm triggering 75 Alarm, unintentional 76 All-season tires, see Winter tires 258 Amazon Alexa Car Integration 46 Antifreeze, washer fluid 112 Antilock Braking System ABS 173

Anti-slip control, see DSC 173 Anti-theft protection, lug bolts 268 Approach control warning with city light

braking function 162 Approved axle load 307 Apps, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Arrival time 137 Ash tray 213 Assistance when driving off 177 Assistance with breakdown 292 Audio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,

Entertainment and Communication 6 AUTO intensity 204 Automatic climate control 202 Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mir-

ror 89 Automatic deactivation, front-seat passen-

ger airbags 152 Automatic headlight control 145 Automatic locking 74 Automatic transmission with Step-

tronic 114 Automatic unlocking 74 Automatic vehicle wash 300 AUTO program, automatic climate con-

trol 204 AUTO program, intensity 204 Auto Start/Stop function 101 Auto washing 300 Average consumption 136 Average speed 136 Axle loads, weights 307

B

Backrest curvature, see Lumbar support 83 Backrest, seats 82 Band-aids, see First-aid kit 292 Battery, disposing of 291

Seite 312

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z


Battery, vehicle 290 Being towed, see Tow-starting and tow-

ing 296 Belts, safety belts 84 Beverage holder, cup holder 221 Blocking, power window 78 Bluetooth connection 53 Bonus range, GREEN Mode 239 Bottle holder, see Cup holder 221 Brake assistant 173 Brake discs, break-in 230 Brake force display 170 Brake lights, brake force display 170 Brake pads, break-in 230 Braking, information 232 Breakdown assistance 292 Breakdown, Flat Tire Monitor TPM 159 Breaking in 230 Break recommendation, see Fatigue

alert 170 Brightness of Control Display 50 Bulb replacement 284 Bulb replacement, front 285, 286 Bulb replacement, rear 287 Bulb replacement, side 289 Bulbs and lights 284 Button, SOS 293 Button, Start/Stop 98 Bypassing, see Jump-starting 294

C

California Proposition 65 Warning 9 Camera-based assistance systems, see Intel-

ligent Safety 161 Camera-based cruise control 178 Camera lenses, care 304 Camera, rearview camera 191 Can holder, see Cup holder 221 Care, displays 304 Care, light-alloy wheels 302 Care, vehicle 301 Care, washing the vehicle 300 Cargo area 223 Cargo area, adapting size 227 Cargo area, enlarging 226

Cargo area lid 70 Cargo area, loading 223 Cargo area, storage compartments 226 Cargo cover 225 Cargo position, rear seat backrest 226 Cargo rod 225 Cargo, stowing and securing 223 Cargo straps 225 Carpet, care 303 Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust gas

system 231 CBS Condition Based Service 281 Cell phone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment and Communication 6 Center armrest 220 Center console 34 Central Information Display (CID) 36 Central Information Display (CID), see Con-

trol Display 38 Central instrument cluster, LED ring 139 Central locking system, unlocking, from in-

side 67 Central screen, see Control Display 38 Changes, technical, see For Your Own

Safety 8 Changing parts 283 Changing wheels 266 Changing, wheels and tires 257 Charging tray for smartphones, see Wire-

less charging tray 215 Chassis number, see Vehicle identification

number 13 Check Control 125 Checking the oil level electronically 275 Check oil level 275 Children, seating position 92 Children, transporting safely 92 Child restraint system 92 Child restraint system LATCH 95 Child restraint systems, mounting 93 Child safety locks 97 Child seat, mounting 93 Child seats 92 Chrome parts, care 303 Cigarette lighter 213 Cleaning, displays 304

Seite 313

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE


Clearance, water 232 Climate control 200, 202 Clothes hooks 221 Coasting 240 Coasting with engine decoupled, coast-

ing 240 Coasting with idling engine 240 Combination switch, see Turn signals 104 Combi switch, see Wiper system 105, 109 Comfort Access 68 Comfort entry 63 Compartments in the doors 220 Compass 211 Compatible devices, see Suitable devi-

ces 53 Compressor 261 Computer, see Onboard Computer 135 Condensation on windows 205 Condensation under the vehicle 233 Condition Based Service CBS 281 Configuring driving program 177 Confirmation signal 75 Connecting device 52 Connecting electrical devices, see Sock-

ets 214 Connections 52 Consumption, see Average consump-

tion 136 Consumption, see Current consump-

tion 131 Contacts, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Continued driving with a flat tire 157, 160 Control Display 38 Controller 38 Control systems, driving stability 173 Convenient closing 64 Convenient opening 63 Cooling, maximum 203 Cornering light 146 Corrosion on brake discs 233 Cosmetic mirror 213 Coupling, see Pairing 52 Courtesy lights during unlocking 63 Courtesy lights with the vehicle locked 64 Cross-member, trunk, see Stow cargo 225

Cruise control 185 Cruise control, active 178 Cruise control with distance control, see

Camera-based cruise control 178 Cruise control without distance control, see

Cruise control 185 Cruising range 131 Cup holder 221 Current consumption 131 Customer service, see Owner's Manual for

Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-tion 6

D

Damage, tires 257 Dashboard 213 Data memory 10 Data protection, settings 51 Data, technical 306 Date 49 Date, display 131 Daytime pedestrian collision mitiga-

tion 166 Daytime running lights 146 DCC, see Cruise control 185 Decorative trim 213 Defrosting, see Defrosting the win-

dows 202 Defrosting, see Windows, defrosting 205 Defrosting the windows 202 Deleting personal data 51 Deletion of personal data 51 Destination distance 137 Device list 52 Digital clock 130 Digital compass 211 Dimensions 306 Dimmable exterior mirrors 89 Dimmable interior mirror 90 Direction indicator, see Turn signals 104 Display, date 131 Display, electronic, instrument clus-

ter 124, 125 Display, engine temperature 136 Display, GREEN Mode 237

Seite 314



Display, iDrive 36 Display lighting, see Instrument light-

ing 148 Displays 122 Displays, care 304 Disposal, coolant 280 Disposal, vehicle battery 291 Distance control, see PDC 187 Distance to destination 137 Divided screen view, split screen 37 Drive-off assistant 177 Drive-off assistant, see DSC 173 Driver assistance, see Intelligent

Safety 161 Driver Fatigue Detector 170 Driver profiles 71 Driver profiles, exporting profiles 73 Driver profiles, importing profiles 73 Driving Dynamics Control, see MINI Driv-

ing Modes switch 176 Driving Excitement, SPORT 138 Driving instructions, breaking in 230 Driving mode GP MODE 175 Driving mode, GREEN 237 Driving mode, GREEN Driving style analy-

sis 242 Driving modes 176 Driving notes, general 231 Driving notes, things to remember when

driving 230 Driving on racetracks 235 Driving stability control systems 173 Driving style analysis 242 Driving through water 232 Driving tip, GREEN tip 239 Driving tips 231 DSC Dynamic Stability Control 173 DTC Dynamic Traction Control 174 DVD, video, see Owner's Handbook for Nav-

igation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Dynamic damping, see Adaptive chas-

sis 175 Dynamic Stability Control DSC 173 Dynamic Traction Control DTC 174

E

Electronic displays, instrument clus-ter 124, 125

Electronic oil measurement 275 Electronic Stability Program ESP, see

DSC 173 E-mail, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Emergency Request 293 Emergency service, see MINI Roadside As-

sistance 292 Emergency unlocking, fuel filler flap 245 Emergency unlocking, transmission

lock 120 Emergency wheel, compact wheel, see

Emergency wheel 270 Energy control 131 Engine, automatic Start/Stop function 101 Engine, automatic switch-off 101 Engine compartment 272 Engine compartment, working in 273 Engine coolant 279 Engine idling when driving, coasting 240 Engine oil 275 Engine oil, adding 276 Engine oil change 278 Engine oil filler neck 276 Engine oil types to add 277 Engine start, see Jump-starting 294 Engine start, see Starting the engine 99 Engine stop 100 Engine temperature, display 136 Entering a destination, see Owner's Hand-

book for Navigation, Entertainment, Com-munication 6

Entering an address, navigation, see Own-er's Manual for Navigation, Entertainmentand Communication 6

Entering a vehicle wash 300 Entertainment, see Owner's Manual for Nav-

igation, Entertainment and Communica-tion 6

Equipment, interior 208 Error displays, see Check Control 125

Seite 315



ESP Electronic Stability Program, seeDSC 173

Exchanging, wheels and tires 257 Exhaust gas system 231 Exiting a vehicle wash 300 Exterior mirror, Automatic Curb Moni-

tor 89 Exterior mirror, automatic dimming fea-

ture 89 Exterior mirrors 88 Exterior mirrors, malfunction 89 External start 294 External temperature display 130 External temperature warning 130 Eyes for securing cargo 225

F

Failure message, see Check Control 125 False alarm, see Unintentional alarm 76 Fan, see Air flow 201, 204 Fastening safety belts, see Safety belts 84 Fatigue alert 170 Filler neck for engine oil 276 Filter, see Microfilter 202 Filter, see Microfilter/activated-charcoal fil-

ter 205 Fine wood, care 303 First-aid kit 292 Fish, MINIMALISM display 242 Flat tire, changing wheels 266 Flat Tire Monitor TPM 159 Flat tire, repairing 259 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 154 Flat tire, warning light 155, 159 Flooding, driving through 232 Floor carpet, care 303 Floor mats, care 303 Fogged up windows 202 Fold-away position, windshield wip-

ers 108, 111 Foot brake 232 For Your Own Safety 8 Front airbags 150 Front fog lights 147

Front fog lights, LED, bulb replace-ment 286

Front-seat passenger airbags, automatic de-activation 152

Front-seat passenger airbags, indicatorlight 153

Front seats 82 Fuel 246 Fuel cap 244 Fuel filler flap 244 Fuel filler flap, emergency unlocking 245 Fuel gauge 129 Fuel quality 246 Fuel recommendation 246 Fuel, tank capacity 310 Fuse 291

G

Garage door opener, see Integrated Univer-sal Remote Control 208

Gasoline 246 Gear shift indicator 132 General driving notes 231 General settings 48 Glare shield 213 Glass sunroof, initialize the system 81 Glass sunroof, see Panoramic glass sun-

roof 79 Glove compartment 219 GP MODE 175 GPS geolocation, vehicle position 49 GPS, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for


GREEN bonus range 239 GREEN Mode 237 GREEN - program, driving dynamics 176 GREEN tip, driving tip 239 Gross vehicle weight, approved 307 Ground clearance 233

H

Halogen headlights 285

Seite 316



Handbrake, see Parking brake 104 Hand-held transmitter, alternating

code 209 Hands-free device, see Owner's Handbook

for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi-cation 6

Hazard warning flashers 292 Head airbag 151 Headlight control, automatic 145 Headlight flasher 105 Headlight glass 285 Headlights, care 301 Head restraints and seats 82 Head restraints, front 86 Head restraints, rear 87 Head-up Display 140 Head-up Display, shift point indicator 143 Head-up Display, sport displays 142 Head-up Display, standard view 141 Heavy cargo, stowing cargo 223 High-beam Assistant 146 High beams 105 High beams/low beams, see High-beam As-

sistant 146 Hills 233 Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assis-

tant 177 Holder for beverages 221 HomeLink, see Integrated Universal Remote

Control 208 Homepage, see Internet 7 Hood 273 Horn 32 Hot exhaust gas system 231 HUD Head-up Display 140 Hydroplaning 232

I

Ice warning, see External temperaturewarning 130

Icy roads, see External temperature warn-ing 130

Identification marks, tires 254 Identification number, see Vehicle identifi-

cation number 13

Ignition off 98 Ignition on 98 Illuminated ring, central instrument clus-

ter 139 Indication of a flat tire 155, 159 Indicator and warning lights, see Check

Control 125 Indicator light, see Check Control 125 Individual air distribution 201, 205 Individual settings, see Driver profiles 71 Inductive charging of a smartphone, see

Wireless charging tray 215 Inflation pressure, tires 248 Inflation pressure warning, tires 159 Info Display 124 Information 6 Initialize, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 155 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 159 Input, iDrive 36 Instrument cluster 122 Instrument cluster, electronic dis-

plays 124, 125 Instrument lighting 148 Integrated key 66 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehi-

cle 60 Integrated Universal Remote Control 208 Intelligent emergency call 293 Intelligent Safety 161 Intended use 8 Intensity, AUTO program 204 Interior equipment 208 Interior lights 148 Interior lights during unlocking 63 Interior lights with the vehicle locked 64 Interior mirror 88 Interior mirror, automatic dimming fea-

ture 90 Interior mirror, compass 211 Interior mirror, manually dimmable 90 Interior motion sensor 76 Internet site 7 Interval display, service notifications 131 Interval mode 106, 109 In the vicinity of the center console 34 In the vicinity of the roofliner 35

Seite 317



In the vicinity of the steering wheel 32 IOM, see Integrated Owner's Manual in the

vehicle 60

J

Jacking points for the vehicle jack 268 Jam protection system, glass sunroof 80 Jam protection system, windows 78 John Cooper Works GP, brake system 232 John Cooper Works GP, child restraint sys-

tems with tether strap 97 John Cooper Works GP, differences to the

production vehicle 6 John Cooper Works GP, Dynamic Stability

Control DSC 173 John Cooper Works GP, general informa-

tion 6 John Cooper Works GP, GP MODE 175 John Cooper Works GP, lashing eyes 225 John Cooper Works GP, Launch Con-

trol 121 John Cooper Works GP, Manual Speed Lim-

iter 168 John Cooper Works GP, Sport tires 260 John Cooper Works GP, stowing and secur-

ing cargo 223 John Cooper Works GP, Washing the vehi-

cle 300 Jump-starting 294

K

Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 68 Key, see Integrated key 66 Key, see Vehicle key 62 Kickdown, Steptronic transmission 117 Knee airbag 151

L

Label on recommended tires 258 Label, runflat tires 259 Language, set on Control Display 48 Lashing eyes 225

LATCH child restraint fixing system 95 Launch Control 121 Leather care 302 LED ring, central instrument cluster 139 LEDs, light-emitting diodes 284 Letters and numbers, entering 36 Light 144 Light-alloy wheels, care 302 Light-emitting diodes, LEDs 284 Lighter 213 Lighting 144 Light replacement 284 Light replacement, front 285, 286 Light replacement, rear 287 Light replacement, side 289 Lights and bulbs 284 Light switch 144 LIM button, see Manual Speed Limiter 168 List of all messages 50 Load 224 Loading 223 Loading position 226 Location, vehicle position 49 Locking, automatic 74 Locking, from inside 67 Locking, see Opening and Closing 62 Locking, settings 74 Low beams 144 Low beams, automatic, see High-beam As-

sistant 146 Lower back support, mechanical 83 Lug bolt lock 268 Luggage rack, see Roof-mounted luggage

rack 233 Lumbar support, mechanical 83

M

Maintenance 281 Maintenance requirements 281 Maintenance, service notifications 131 Maintenance system, MINI 281 Make-up mirror 213 Malfunction displays, see Check Con-

trol 125 Manual air flow 201

Seite 318



Manual control, air distribution 201, 205 Manual control, air flow 204 Manual mode, transmission 118 Manual operation, PDC Park Distance Con-

trol 189 Manual operation, rearview camera 192 Manual Speed Limiter 168 Manual transmission 113 Manufacturer of the MINI 8 Map update, see Owner's Handbook for Nav-

igation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Matt paint, care 302 Maximum cooling 203 Maximum speed display, see Speed Limit

Info 133 Maximum speed, winter tires 258 Measuring units 49 Mechanical key 66 Media of the Owner's Manual 60 Medical kit 292 Menu in instrument cluster 134 Menus, Central Information Display

(CID) 40 Messages 50 Messages, see Check Control 125 Microfilter 202, 205 MID - program, driving dynamics 176 MINI Connected, see Owner's Handbook for


MINI driving modes 176 MINI logo projection during unlocking 63 MINI maintenance system 281 MINIMALISM analyzer 242 MINIMALISM information 240 Minimum tread, tires 256 MINI Roadside Assistance 292 Mirrors 88 Mobile communication devices in the vehi-

cle 231 Mobile phone, connecting 52 Mobile phone, see Owner's Manual for Navi-

gation, Entertainment and Communica-tion 6

Mobile Service, see MINI Roadside Assis-tance 292

Mobility System 261 Modifications, technical, see For Your Own

Safety 8 Moisture in headlight 285 Monitor, see Control Display 38 Mounting of child restraint systems 93 MP3 player, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 32 Multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment and Communication 6

N

Navigation, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-tion, Entertainment and Communication 6

Neck restraints, front, see Head restraintsfront 86

Neck restraints, rear, see Head restraintsrear 87

Neutral cleaner, see Light-alloy rims 302 New wheels and tires 257

O

OBD Onboard Diagnosis 282 Obstacle marking, rearview camera 193 Octane rating, see Recommended fuel

grade 247 Odometer 130 Oil 275 Oil, adding 276 Oil change 278 Oil filler neck 276 Oil service interval, service notifica-

tions 131 Oil types to add, engine 277 Onboard Computer 135 Onboard Diagnosis OBD 282 Onboard literature, printed 60 Onboard vehicle tool kit 283 On-call service, see MINI Roadside Assis-

tance 292 Opening and Closing 62 Opening, from inside 67

Seite 319



Operating concept Central Information Dis-play (CID) operating concept 36

Operating menus, Central Information Dis-play (CID) 36

Operation via the Controller 40 Operation via touchscreen 41 Optional equipment 8 Owner's Manual, printed 60

P

Paint, car care 302 Panic alarm, see Panic mode 76 Panic mode 76 Panoramic glass sunroof 79 Parallel parking assistant 194 Park Distance Control PDC 187 Parked-car ventilation 206 Parked vehicle, condensation 233 Parking aid, see PDC 187 Parking assistant 194 Parking brake 104 Parking lights 144 Parts and accessories 9 Passenger's side exterior mirror, tilt down,

see Automatic Curb Monitor 89 Pathway lighting 145 Pathway lines, rearview camera 192 PDC Park Distance Control 187 Performance Control 175 Personal profile, see Driver profiles 71 Phone, connecting 52 Plastic, care 303 PostCrash - iBrake 171 Power failure 291 Power windows 77 Pressure, tires 248 Pressure warning, tires 159 Printed onboard literature 60 Profiles, see Driver profiles 71 Programmable memory buttons, Central In-

formation Display (CID) 42 Protective function, glass sunroof 80 Protective function, windows 78 Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 38

R

Racetrack operation 235 Radio-ready state 99 Radio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,

Entertainment and Communication 6 Rain sensor 106, 109 Ratchet straps 225 Rear lights 287 Rear luggage rack 234 Rear seat backrests, folding down 226 Rearview camera 191 Rear-view mirrors, exterior 88 Rear window defroster 202, 205 Rear window wiper, operation 107, 111 Recirculated-air filter 205 Recirculated-air mode 201, 204 Recommended fuel grade 247 Recommended tire brands 258 Refueling 244 Remaining range 131 Remote control, universal 208 Remote services, app, see Owner's Hand-

book for Navigation, Entertainment, Com-munication 6

Replacing parts 283 Replacing the battery, vehicle key 65 Replacing, wheels and tires 257 Reporting safety malfunctions 14 RES CNCL button, camera-based cruise con-

trol 178 RES CNCL button, Cruise Control 185 Reserve warning, see Range 131 Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 155 Retreaded tires 258 Roadside parking lights 145 Rolling code hand-held transmitter 209 RON recommended fuel grade 247 Roofliner 35 Roof-mounted luggage rack 233 Route, navigation, see Owner's Handbook


RSC Runflat System Component, see Runflattires 259

Seite 320



RTTI, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-tion, Entertainment, Communication 6

Rubber components, care 303 Runflat tires 259

S

Safe braking 232 Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and

front passenger seat 86 Safety belts 84 Safety belts, care 303 Safety locks, doors, and windows 97 Safety switch, windows 78 Safety systems, airbags 150 Saving fuel 236 Screens, care 304 Screen, see Control Display 38 Screwdriver 283 Sealant, see Mobility System 261 Seat heating, front 84 Seating position for children 92 Seats and head restraints 82 Seats, front 82 Securing cargo 223 Selection list in instrument cluster 134 Sensors, care 304 Service and warranty 10 Service Center, see MINI Roadside Assis-

tance 292 Service notifications, display 131 Service requirements, Condition Based

Service CBS 281 Servotronic 177 SET button, camera-based cruise con-

trol 178 SET button, Cruise Control 185 Settings, general 48 Settings, locking/unlocking 74 Settings, mirrors 88 Settings, seats and head restraints 82 Shift paddles on the steering wheel 119 Shift point indicator, Head-up Display 143 Side airbag 150 Signaling, horn 32 Signals when unlocking 75

Sitting safely 82 Sizes, see Dimensions 306 Slide/tilt glass roof 79 Smartphone, connecting 52 Smartphone, see Owner's Manual for Navi-

gation, Entertainment and Communica-tion 6

Snow chains 265 Socket, OBD Onboard Diagnosis 282 Sockets, electrical devices 214 Software update 58 SOS button 293 Sound output, see Owner's Handbook for


Spare tire, see Emergency wheel 270 Speed, average 136 Speed Limit Device, see Speed Limiter 168 Speed limit display, see Speed Limit

Info 133 Speed Limiter 168 Speed Limit Info 133 Speed Limit Info, Onboard Computer 137 Speed limit, see Speed Limiter 168 Speed warning 139 Split screen 37 Sport displays 138 Sport displays, Head-up Display 142 SPORT program, driving dynamics 176 Sport program, transmission 118 Sport tires 260 Stability control systems 173 Standard equipment 8 Standard view, Head-up Display 141 Stars, MINIMALISM display 242 Start/stop, automatic function 101 Start/Stop button 98 Starting the engine 99 Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Handbook


Status control display, tires 154 Status information, Central Information Dis-

play (CID) 37 Status of Owner's Manual 8 Status, vehicle 143

Seite 321



Steering assistance 177 Steering column adjustment 90 Steering wheel, adjusting 90 Steptronic Sport transmission, see Step-

tronic transmission 114 Steptronic Sport transmission with double

clutch, see Steptronic transmission 114 Steptronic transmission 114 Steptronic transmission with double clutch,

see Steptronic transmission 114 Stopping the engine 100 Storage compartments 219 Storage, tires 259 Storing the vehicle 304 Stowing and securing cargo 223 Suitable devices 53 Suitable mobile phones 53 Summer tires, tread 256 Sun visor 213 Supplementary Owner's Manuals 60 Supplementary text message 129 Switch for driving dynamics 176 Switch, see Cockpit 32 Symbols 7

T

Tachometer 130 Tailgate 70 Tailgate via vehicle key 64 Tail lights 287 Technical changes, see For Your Own

Safety 8 Technical data 306 Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment and Communication 6 Teleservices, see Owner's Handbook for


Temperature, air conditioner 200 Temperature, automatic climate con-

trol 203 Temperature display for external tempera-

ture 130 Temperature, engine 136 Terminal, starting aid 295

Text message, see Check Control mes-sages 129

Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 75 Thigh support 83 Tilt alarm sensor 76 Tilt down, passenger's side exterior mirror,

see Automatic Curb Monitor 89 Time 48 Time of arrival 137 Tire damage 257 Tire identification marks 254 Tire inflation pressure 248 Tire inflation pressure monitoring, see

TPM 159 Tire pressure 248 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 154 Tire repair kit, see Mobility System 261 Tires 248 Tires, changing 257 Tire sealant, see Mobility System 261 Tires, runflat 259 Tire tread 256 Tone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,

Entertainment and Communication 6 Tools 283 Total vehicle weight 307 Touchscreen 41 Towing 296 Tow-starting 296 TPM Flat Tire Monitor 159 TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 154 Traction control 174 TRACTION, see Dynamic Traction Control,

DTC 174 Traffic bulletins, see Owner's Handbook for


Transmission lock, electronic unlock-ing 120

Transmission lock, releasing manually 120 Transmission, manual transmission 113 Transmission, see Steptronic transmis-

sion 114 Transporting children safely 92 Tread, tires 256 Trip computer 137

Seite 322



Triple turn signal activation 104 Trip odometer 130 Trip recorder, see Trip odometer 130 Trunk, see Cargo area 223 Turning radius lines, rearview camera 192 Turn signal, front 285, 286 Turn signal, indicator light 128 Turn signal, side 289 Turn signals, operation 104 Turn signals, rear, bulb replacement 287

U

Unintentional alarm 76 Units, see Measuring units 49 Universal remote control 208 Unlocking, automatic 74 Unlocking, see Opening and Closing 62 Unlocking, settings 74 Updates made after the editorial deadline 8 Update, software 58 Updating software 58 Upholstery care 302 USB connection 55 USB port, position in vehicle 215 Used battery, disposing of 291 Use, intended 8 Using a smartphone via voice activation 46

V

Vanity mirror 213 Vehicle battery 290 Vehicle breakdown, see Breakdown assis-

tance 292 Vehicle, breaking in 230 Vehicle care 301 Vehicle care products 301 Vehicle features and options 8 Vehicle identification number 13 Vehicle jack 268 Vehicle key, additional 65 Vehicle key, loss 65 Vehicle key, malfunction 65 Vehicle key, opening/closing 62

Vehicle key, replacing the battery 65 Vehicle key, see Vehicle key 62 Vehicle paint, care 302 Vehicle position, vehicle location 49 Vehicle status 143 Vehicle storage 304 Vehicle wash 300 Vehicle wash, automatic 300 Vehicle, washing 300 Ventilation 206 Ventilation, see Parked-car ventilation 206 VIN, see Vehicle identification number 13 Voice activation 44 Voice command response 44 Voice recognition, see Active Voice Recog-

nition 44

W

Warning and indicator lights, see CheckControl 125

Warning displays, see Check Control 125 Warning messages, see Check Control 125 Warning triangle 292 Warranty 8 Washer fluid 112 Washer nozzles, windshield 107, 111 Washing the vehicle 300 Washing the vehicle, John Cooper Works,

GP 300 Water on roads 232 Weights 307 Welcome lights 145 Welcome lights during unlocking 63 Wheel base, vehicle 306 Wheels 248 Wheels, changing 257 Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 154 Windows, powered 77 Windshield cleaning system 105, 109 Windshield defroster 202, 205 Windshield washer fluid 112 Windshield washer nozzles 107, 111 Windshield wipers, fold-away posi-

tion 108, 111

Seite 323



Windshield wipers, see Wiper sys-tem 105, 109

Winter storage, care 304 Winter tires, suitable tires 258 Winter tires, tread 256 Wiper blades, replacing 283 Wiper fluid 112 Wiper system 105, 109 Wireless charging of a smartphone, see

Wireless charging tray 215 Wireless charging tray for smart-

phones 215 Wood, care 303 Word match concept, navigation 36 Wrench 283

Seite 324



01405A1E4E3 ue

*BL5A1E4E300N*

California Proposition 65Warning

For vehicles sold in California:


MINI MOTORER'S GUIDE APP.

Your customized information about the vehicle in an app.Optimized for smartphones & tablets. Can be used offline.

01405A1E4E3 ue

*BL5A1E4E300N*


JCW GP. MINI HARDTOP 2 DOOR / 4 DOOR / OWNER'S MANUAL.

Documents

Transcript of JCW GP. MINI HARDTOP 2 DOOR / 4 DOOR / OWNER'S MANUAL.